diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation')
175 files changed, 5674 insertions, 3462 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/proc-pid-oom_adj b/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/proc-pid-oom_adj new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..cf63f264ce0f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/proc-pid-oom_adj @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +What: /proc/<pid>/oom_adj +When: August 2012 +Why: /proc/<pid>/oom_adj allows userspace to influence the oom killer's + badness heuristic used to determine which task to kill when the kernel + is out of memory. + + The badness heuristic has since been rewritten since the introduction of + this tunable such that its meaning is deprecated. The value was + implemented as a bitshift on a score generated by the badness() + function that did not have any precise units of measure. With the + rewrite, the score is given as a proportion of available memory to the + task allocating pages, so using a bitshift which grows the score + exponentially is, thus, impossible to tune with fine granularity. + + A much more powerful interface, /proc/<pid>/oom_score_adj, was + introduced with the oom killer rewrite that allows users to increase or + decrease the badness() score linearly. This interface will replace + /proc/<pid>/oom_adj. + + A warning will be emitted to the kernel log if an application uses this + deprecated interface. After it is printed once, future warnings will be + suppressed until the kernel is rebooted. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-zram b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-zram new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c8b3b48ec62c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-zram @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +What: /sys/block/zram<id>/disksize +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Nitin Gupta <ngupta@vflare.org> +Description: + The disksize file is read-write and specifies the disk size + which represents the limit on the *uncompressed* worth of data + that can be stored in this disk. + +What: /sys/block/zram<id>/initstate +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Nitin Gupta <ngupta@vflare.org> +Description: + The disksize file is read-only and shows the initialization + state of the device. + +What: /sys/block/zram<id>/reset +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Nitin Gupta <ngupta@vflare.org> +Description: + The disksize file is write-only and allows resetting the + device. The reset operation frees all the memory assocaited + with this device. + +What: /sys/block/zram<id>/num_reads +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Nitin Gupta <ngupta@vflare.org> +Description: + The num_reads file is read-only and specifies the number of + reads (failed or successful) done on this device. + +What: /sys/block/zram<id>/num_writes +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Nitin Gupta <ngupta@vflare.org> +Description: + The num_writes file is read-only and specifies the number of + writes (failed or successful) done on this device. + +What: /sys/block/zram<id>/invalid_io +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Nitin Gupta <ngupta@vflare.org> +Description: + The invalid_io file is read-only and specifies the number of + non-page-size-aligned I/O requests issued to this device. + +What: /sys/block/zram<id>/notify_free +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Nitin Gupta <ngupta@vflare.org> +Description: + The notify_free file is read-only and specifies the number of + swap slot free notifications received by this device. These + notifications are send to a swap block device when a swap slot + is freed. This statistic is applicable only when this disk is + being used as a swap disk. + +What: /sys/block/zram<id>/discard +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Nitin Gupta <ngupta@vflare.org> +Description: + The discard file is read-only and specifies the number of + discard requests received by this device. These requests + provide information to block device regarding blocks which are + no longer used by filesystem. + +What: /sys/block/zram<id>/zero_pages +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Nitin Gupta <ngupta@vflare.org> +Description: + The zero_pages file is read-only and specifies number of zero + filled pages written to this disk. No memory is allocated for + such pages. + +What: /sys/block/zram<id>/orig_data_size +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Nitin Gupta <ngupta@vflare.org> +Description: + The orig_data_size file is read-only and specifies uncompressed + size of data stored in this disk. This excludes zero-filled + pages (zero_pages) since no memory is allocated for them. + Unit: bytes + +What: /sys/block/zram<id>/compr_data_size +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Nitin Gupta <ngupta@vflare.org> +Description: + The compr_data_size file is read-only and specifies compressed + size of data stored in this disk. So, compression ratio can be + calculated using orig_data_size and this statistic. + Unit: bytes + +What: /sys/block/zram<id>/mem_used_total +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Nitin Gupta <ngupta@vflare.org> +Description: + The mem_used_total file is read-only and specifies the amount + of memory, including allocator fragmentation and metadata + overhead, allocated for this disk. So, allocator space + efficiency can be calculated using compr_data_size and this + statistic. + Unit: bytes
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-rbd b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-rbd new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..90a87e2a572b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-rbd @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ +What: /sys/bus/rbd/ +Date: November 2010 +Contact: Yehuda Sadeh <yehuda@hq.newdream.net>, + Sage Weil <sage@newdream.net> +Description: + +Being used for adding and removing rbd block devices. + +Usage: <mon ip addr> <options> <pool name> <rbd image name> [snap name] + + $ echo "192.168.0.1 name=admin rbd foo" > /sys/bus/rbd/add + +The snapshot name can be "-" or omitted to map the image read/write. A <dev-id> +will be assigned for any registered block device. If snapshot is used, it will +be mapped read-only. + +Removal of a device: + + $ echo <dev-id> > /sys/bus/rbd/remove + +Entries under /sys/bus/rbd/devices/<dev-id>/ +-------------------------------------------- + +client_id + + The ceph unique client id that was assigned for this specific session. + +major + + The block device major number. + +name + + The name of the rbd image. + +pool + + The pool where this rbd image resides. The pool-name pair is unique + per rados system. + +size + + The size (in bytes) of the mapped block device. + +refresh + + Writing to this file will reread the image header data and set + all relevant datastructures accordingly. + +current_snap + + The current snapshot for which the device is mapped. + +create_snap + + Create a snapshot: + + $ echo <snap-name> > /sys/bus/rbd/devices/<dev-id>/snap_create + +rollback_snap + + Rolls back data to the specified snapshot. This goes over the entire + list of rados blocks and sends a rollback command to each. + + $ echo <snap-name> > /sys/bus/rbd/devices/<dev-id>/snap_rollback + +snap_* + + A directory per each snapshot + + +Entries under /sys/bus/rbd/devices/<dev-id>/snap_<snap-name> +------------------------------------------------------------- + +id + + The rados internal snapshot id assigned for this snapshot + +size + + The size of the image when this snapshot was taken. + + diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led index 9e4541d71cb6..edff6630c805 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led @@ -26,3 +26,12 @@ Description: scheduler is chosen. Trigger specific parameters can appear in /sys/class/leds/<led> once a given trigger is selected. +What: /sys/class/leds/<led>/inverted +Date: January 2011 +KernelVersion: 2.6.38 +Contact: Richard Purdie <rpurdie@rpsys.net> +Description: + Invert the LED on/off state. This parameter is specific to + gpio and backlight triggers. In case of the backlight trigger, + it is usefull when driving a LED which is intended to indicate + a device in a standby like state. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-batman-adv b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-batman-adv new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..38dd762def4b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-batman-adv @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ + +What: /sys/class/net/<iface>/batman-adv/mesh_iface +Date: May 2010 +Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Description: + The /sys/class/net/<iface>/batman-adv/mesh_iface file + displays the batman mesh interface this <iface> + currently is associated with. + +What: /sys/class/net/<iface>/batman-adv/iface_status +Date: May 2010 +Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Description: + Indicates the status of <iface> as it is seen by batman. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-mesh b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-mesh new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..748fe1701d25 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-mesh @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + +What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/aggregated_ogms +Date: May 2010 +Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Description: + Indicates whether the batman protocol messages of the + mesh <mesh_iface> shall be aggregated or not. + +What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/bonding +Date: June 2010 +Contact: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de> +Description: + Indicates whether the data traffic going through the + mesh will be sent using multiple interfaces at the + same time (if available). + +What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/fragmentation +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Andreas Langer <an.langer@gmx.de> +Description: + Indicates whether the data traffic going through the + mesh will be fragmented or silently discarded if the + packet size exceeds the outgoing interface MTU. + +What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/gw_bandwidth +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Description: + Defines the bandwidth which is propagated by this + node if gw_mode was set to 'server'. + +What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/gw_mode +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Description: + Defines the state of the gateway features. Can be + either 'off', 'client' or 'server'. + +What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/gw_sel_class +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Description: + Defines the selection criteria this node will use + to choose a gateway if gw_mode was set to 'client'. + +What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/orig_interval +Date: May 2010 +Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Description: + Defines the interval in milliseconds in which batman + sends its protocol messages. + +What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/hop_penalty +Date: Oct 2010 +Contact: Linus Lüssing <linus.luessing@web.de> +Description: + Defines the penalty which will be applied to an + originator message's tq-field on every hop. + +What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/vis_mode +Date: May 2010 +Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Description: + Each batman node only maintains information about its + own local neighborhood, therefore generating graphs + showing the topology of the entire mesh is not easily + feasible without having a central instance to collect + the local topologies from all nodes. This file allows + to activate the collecting (server) mode. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone index 063bda7fe707..698b8081c473 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/actual_dpi +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/actual_dpi Date: March 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: It is possible to switch the dpi setting of the mouse with the @@ -17,13 +17,13 @@ Description: It is possible to switch the dpi setting of the mouse with the This file is readonly. -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/actual_profile +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/actual_profile Date: March 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: When read, this file returns the number of the actual profile. This file is readonly. -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/firmware_version +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/firmware_version Date: March 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ Description: When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the left. E.g. a returned value of 138 means 1.38 This file is readonly. -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/profile[1-5] +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/profile[1-5] Date: March 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the stored in the profile doesn't need to fit the number of the store. -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/settings +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/settings Date: March 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: When read, this file returns the settings stored in the mouse. @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Description: When read, this file returns the settings stored in the mouse. The data has to be 36 bytes long. The mouse will reject invalid data. -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/startup_profile +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/startup_profile Date: March 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1 to 5. @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1 to 5. When written, this file sets the number of the startup profile and the mouse activates this profile immediately. -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/tcu +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/tcu Date: March 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse has a "Tracking Control Unit" which lets the user @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Description: The mouse has a "Tracking Control Unit" which lets the user Writing 1 in this file will start the calibration which takes around 6 seconds to complete and activates the TCU. -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/weight +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/weight Date: March 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can be equipped with one of four supplied weights diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0f9f30eb1742 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/actual_profile +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When read, this file returns the number of the actual profile in + range 0-4. + This file is readonly. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/firmware_version +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the + firmware reported by the mouse. Using the integer value eases + further usage in other programs. To receive the real version + number the decimal point has to be shifted 2 positions to the + left. E.g. a returned value of 121 means 1.21 + This file is readonly. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/macro +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse can store a macro with max 500 key/button strokes + internally. + When written, this file lets one set the sequence for a specific + button for a specific profile. Button and profile numbers are + included in written data. The data has to be 2082 bytes long. + This file is writeonly. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile_buttons +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the + press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. + profile_buttons holds informations about button layout. + When written, this file lets one write the respective profile + buttons back to the mouse. The data has to be 77 bytes long. + The mouse will reject invalid data. + Which profile to write is determined by the profile number + contained in the data. + This file is writeonly. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_buttons +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the + press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. + profile_buttons holds informations about button layout. + When read, these files return the respective profile buttons. + The returned data is 77 bytes in size. + This file is readonly. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile_settings +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the + press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. + profile_settings holds informations like resolution, sensitivity + and light effects. + When written, this file lets one write the respective profile + settings back to the mouse. The data has to be 43 bytes long. + The mouse will reject invalid data. + Which profile to write is determined by the profile number + contained in the data. + This file is writeonly. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_settings +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the + press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. + profile_settings holds informations like resolution, sensitivity + and light effects. + When read, these files return the respective profile settings. + The returned data is 43 bytes in size. + This file is readonly. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/sensor +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse has a tracking- and a distance-control-unit. These + can be activated/deactivated and the lift-off distance can be + set. The data has to be 6 bytes long. + This file is writeonly. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/startup_profile +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0-4. + When read, this attribute returns the number of the profile + that's active when the mouse is powered on. + When written, this file sets the number of the startup profile + and the mouse activates this profile immediately. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/tcu +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written a calibration process for the tracking control unit + can be initiated/cancelled. + The data has to be 3 bytes long. + This file is writeonly. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/tcu_image +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When read the mouse returns a 30x30 pixel image of the + sampled underground. This works only in the course of a + calibration process initiated with tcu. + The returned data is 1028 bytes in size. + This file is readonly. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra index ad1125b02ff4..1c37b823f142 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/actual_cpi +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/actual_cpi Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: It is possible to switch the cpi setting of the mouse with the @@ -14,14 +14,14 @@ Description: It is possible to switch the cpi setting of the mouse with the This file is readonly. -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/actual_profile +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/actual_profile Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: When read, this file returns the number of the actual profile in range 0-4. This file is readonly. -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/firmware_version +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/firmware_version Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ Description: When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the left. E.g. a returned value of 138 means 1.38 This file is readonly. -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/profile_settings +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile_settings Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the contained in the data. This file is writeonly. -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/profile[1-5]_settings +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile[1-5]_settings Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the The returned data is 13 bytes in size. This file is readonly. -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/profile_buttons +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile_buttons Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the contained in the data. This file is writeonly. -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/profile[1-5]_buttons +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile[1-5]_buttons Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the The returned data is 19 bytes in size. This file is readonly. -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/startup_profile +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/startup_profile Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0-4. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0-4. that's active when the mouse is powered on. This file is readonly. -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/settings +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/settings Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: When read, this file returns the settings stored in the mouse. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop index 1d775390e856..41ff8ae4dee0 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop @@ -47,6 +47,20 @@ Date: January 2007 KernelVersion: 2.6.20 Contact: "Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net> Description: - Control the bluetooth device. 1 means on, 0 means off. + Control the wlan device. 1 means on, 0 means off. This may control the led, the device or both. Users: Lapsus + +What: /sys/devices/platform/asus_laptop/wimax +Date: October 2010 +KernelVersion: 2.6.37 +Contact: "Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net> +Description: + Control the wimax device. 1 means on, 0 means off. + +What: /sys/devices/platform/asus_laptop/wwan +Date: October 2010 +KernelVersion: 2.6.37 +Contact: "Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net> +Description: + Control the wwan (3G) device. 1 means on, 0 means off. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-eeepc-wmi b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-eeepc-wmi new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e4b5fef5fadd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-eeepc-wmi @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +What: /sys/devices/platform/eeepc-wmi/cpufv +Date: Oct 2010 +KernelVersion: 2.6.37 +Contact: "Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net> +Description: + Change CPU clock configuration (write-only). + There are three available clock configuration: + * 0 -> Super Performance Mode + * 1 -> High Performance Mode + * 2 -> Power Saving Mode diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-ideapad-laptop b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-ideapad-laptop new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..807fca2ae2a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-ideapad-laptop @@ -0,0 +1,6 @@ +What: /sys/devices/platform/ideapad/camera_power +Date: Dec 2010 +KernelVersion: 2.6.37 +Contact: "Ike Panhc <ike.pan@canonical.com>" +Description: + Control the power of camera module. 1 means on, 0 means off. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-tty b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-tty new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b138b663bf54 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-tty @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +What: /sys/class/tty/console/active +Date: Nov 2010 +Contact: Kay Sievers <kay.sievers@vrfy.org> +Description: + Shows the list of currently configured + console devices, like 'tty1 ttyS0'. + The last entry in the file is the active + device connected to /dev/console. + The file supports poll() to detect virtual + console switches. + +What: /sys/class/tty/tty0/active +Date: Nov 2010 +Contact: Kay Sievers <kay.sievers@vrfy.org> +Description: + Shows the currently active virtual console + device, like 'tty1'. + The file supports poll() to detect virtual + console switches. diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl index 19a1210c2530..03641a08e275 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl @@ -146,6 +146,7 @@ !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_rx_mgmt !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_mgmt_tx_status !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_cqm_rssi_notify +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_cqm_pktloss_notify !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_michael_mic_failure </chapter> <chapter> @@ -332,10 +333,16 @@ <title>functions/definitions</title> !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_status !Finclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211_rx_flags +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211_tx_control_flags +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211_rate_control_flags +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_rate !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_info +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_ni !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_irqsafe !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status_ni !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rts_get !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rts_duration @@ -346,6 +353,7 @@ !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queue !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_wake_queues !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queues +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_queue_stopped </sect1> </chapter> @@ -354,6 +362,13 @@ !Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Frame filtering !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_filter_flags </chapter> + + <chapter id="workqueue"> + <title>The mac80211 workqueue</title> +!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211 workqueue +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_queue_work +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_queue_delayed_work + </chapter> </part> <part id="advanced"> @@ -374,6 +389,9 @@ !Finclude/net/mac80211.h set_key_cmd !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_key_conf !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_key_flags +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tkip_key_type +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_tkip_key +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_key_removed </chapter> <chapter id="powersave"> @@ -417,6 +435,18 @@ supported by mac80211, add notes about supporting hw crypto with it. </para> +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic + </chapter> + + <chapter id="station-handling"> + <title>Station handling</title> + <para>TODO</para> +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h sta_notify_cmd +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_find_sta +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta_block_awake </chapter> <chapter id="hardware-scan-offload"> @@ -424,6 +454,28 @@ <para>TBD</para> !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_scan_completed </chapter> + + <chapter id="aggregation"> + <title>Aggregation</title> + <sect1> + <title>TX A-MPDU aggregation</title> +!Pnet/mac80211/agg-tx.c TX A-MPDU aggregation +!Cnet/mac80211/agg-tx.c + </sect1> + <sect1> + <title>RX A-MPDU aggregation</title> +!Pnet/mac80211/agg-rx.c RX A-MPDU aggregation +!Cnet/mac80211/agg-rx.c + </sect1> +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action + </chapter> + + <chapter id="smps"> + <title>Spatial Multiplexing Powersave (SMPS)</title> +!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Spatial multiplexing power save +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_request_smps +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_smps_mode + </chapter> </part> <part id="rate-control"> @@ -435,9 +487,16 @@ interface and how it relates to mac80211 and drivers. </para> </partintro> - <chapter id="dummy"> - <title>dummy chapter</title> + <chapter id="ratecontrol-api"> + <title>Rate Control API</title> <para>TBD</para> +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h rate_control_changed +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_rate_control +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h rate_control_send_low </chapter> </part> @@ -485,6 +544,13 @@ </sect1> </chapter> + <chapter id="aggregation-internals"> + <title>Aggregation</title> +!Fnet/mac80211/sta_info.h sta_ampdu_mlme +!Fnet/mac80211/sta_info.h tid_ampdu_tx +!Fnet/mac80211/sta_info.h tid_ampdu_rx + </chapter> + <chapter id="synchronisation"> <title>Synchronisation</title> <para>TBD</para> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl index 22edcbb9ddaf..35447e081736 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl @@ -304,6 +304,10 @@ X!Idrivers/video/console/fonts.c !Edrivers/input/ff-core.c !Edrivers/input/ff-memless.c </sect1> + <sect1><title>Multitouch Library</title> +!Iinclude/linux/input/mt.h +!Edrivers/input/input-mt.c + </sect1> <sect1><title>Polled input devices</title> !Iinclude/linux/input-polldev.h !Edrivers/input/input-polldev.c diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl index 490d862c5f0d..d71b57fcf116 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl @@ -710,7 +710,18 @@ Task Addr Pid Parent [*] cpu State Thread Command <listitem><para>A simple shell</para></listitem> <listitem><para>The kdb core command set</para></listitem> <listitem><para>A registration API to register additional kdb shell commands.</para> - <para>A good example of a self-contained kdb module is the "ftdump" command for dumping the ftrace buffer. See: kernel/trace/trace_kdb.c</para></listitem> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem><para>A good example of a self-contained kdb module + is the "ftdump" command for dumping the ftrace buffer. See: + kernel/trace/trace_kdb.c</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>For an example of how to dynamically register + a new kdb command you can build the kdb_hello.ko kernel module + from samples/kdb/kdb_hello.c. To build this example you can + set CONFIG_SAMPLES=y and CONFIG_SAMPLE_KDB=m in your kernel + config. Later run "modprobe kdb_hello" and the next time you + enter the kdb shell, you can run the "hello" + command.</para></listitem> + </itemizedlist></listitem> <listitem><para>The implementation for kdb_printf() which emits messages directly to I/O drivers, bypassing the kernel log.</para></listitem> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media-entities.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/media-entities.tmpl index 6ae97157b1c7..be34dcbe0d90 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media-entities.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media-entities.tmpl @@ -250,6 +250,9 @@ <!ENTITY sub-yuv422p SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-yuv422p.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-yuyv SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-yuyv.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-yvyu SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-yvyu.xml"> +<!ENTITY sub-srggb10 SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-srggb10.xml"> +<!ENTITY sub-srggb8 SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-srggb8.xml"> +<!ENTITY sub-y10 SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-y10.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-pixfmt SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-cropcap SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-cropcap.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-dbg-g-register SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-dbg-g-register.xml"> @@ -347,6 +350,9 @@ <!ENTITY yuv422p SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-yuv422p.xml"> <!ENTITY yuyv SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-yuyv.xml"> <!ENTITY yvyu SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-yvyu.xml"> +<!ENTITY srggb10 SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-srggb10.xml"> +<!ENTITY srggb8 SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-srggb8.xml"> +<!ENTITY y10 SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-y10.xml"> <!ENTITY cropcap SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-cropcap.xml"> <!ENTITY dbg-g-register SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-dbg-g-register.xml"> <!ENTITY encoder-cmd SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-encoder-cmd.xml"> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl index 020ac80d4682..620eb3f6a90a 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ static void board_hwcontrol(struct mtd_info *mtd, int cmd) <title>Device ready function</title> <para> If the hardware interface has the ready busy pin of the NAND chip connected to a - GPIO or other accesible I/O pin, this function is used to read back the state of the + GPIO or other accessible I/O pin, this function is used to read back the state of the pin. The function has no arguments and should return 0, if the device is busy (R/B pin is low) and 1, if the device is ready (R/B pin is high). If the hardware interface does not give access to the ready busy pin, then diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/sh.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/sh.tmpl index d858d92cf6d9..4a38f604fa66 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/sh.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/sh.tmpl @@ -79,10 +79,6 @@ </sect2> </sect1> </chapter> - <chapter id="clk"> - <title>Clock Framework Extensions</title> -!Iinclude/linux/sh_clk.h - </chapter> <chapter id="mach"> <title>Machine Specific Interfaces</title> <sect1 id="dreamcast"> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl index 4d4ce0e61e42..b4665b9c40b0 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ </orgname> <address> - <email>hjk@linutronix.de</email> + <email>hjk@hansjkoch.de</email> </address> </affiliation> </author> @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ GPL version 2. <para>If you know of any translations for this document, or you are interested in translating it, please email me -<email>hjk@linutronix.de</email>. +<email>hjk@hansjkoch.de</email>. </para> </sect1> @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ interested in translating it, please email me <title>Feedback</title> <para>Find something wrong with this document? (Or perhaps something right?) I would love to hear from you. Please email me at - <email>hjk@linutronix.de</email>.</para> + <email>hjk@hansjkoch.de</email>.</para> </sect1> </chapter> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/compat.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/compat.xml index 54447f0d0784..c9ce61d981f5 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/compat.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/compat.xml @@ -21,11 +21,15 @@ API.</para> <title>Opening and Closing Devices</title> <para>For compatibility reasons the character device file names -recommended for V4L2 video capture, overlay, radio, teletext and raw +recommended for V4L2 video capture, overlay, radio and raw vbi capture devices did not change from those used by V4L. They are listed in <xref linkend="devices" /> and below in <xref linkend="v4l-dev" />.</para> + <para>The teletext devices (minor range 192-223) have been removed in +V4L2 and no longer exist. There is no hardware available anymore for handling +pure teletext. Instead raw or sliced VBI is used.</para> + <para>The V4L <filename>videodev</filename> module automatically assigns minor numbers to drivers in load order, depending on the registered device type. We recommend that V4L2 drivers by default @@ -66,13 +70,6 @@ not compatible with V4L or V4L2.</para> </footnote>, <entry>64-127</entry> </row> <row> - <entry>Teletext decoder</entry> - <entry><para><filename>/dev/vtx</filename>, -<filename>/dev/vtx0</filename> to -<filename>/dev/vtx31</filename></para></entry> - <entry>192-223</entry> - </row> - <row> <entry>Raw VBI capture</entry> <entry><para><filename>/dev/vbi</filename>, <filename>/dev/vbi0</filename> to @@ -2345,6 +2342,17 @@ more information.</para> </listitem> </orderedlist> </section> + <section> + <title>V4L2 in Linux 2.6.37</title> + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Remove the vtx (videotext/teletext) API. This API was no longer +used and no hardware exists to verify the API. Nor were any userspace applications found +that used it. It was originally scheduled for removal in 2.6.35. + </para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> <section id="other"> <title>Relation of V4L2 to other Linux multimedia APIs</title> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/controls.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/controls.xml index 8408caaee276..2fae3e87ce73 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/controls.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/controls.xml @@ -312,10 +312,17 @@ minimum value disables backlight compensation.</entry> information and bits 24-31 must be zero.</entry> </row> <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_ILLUMINATORS_1</constant> + <constant>V4L2_CID_ILLUMINATORS_2</constant></entry> + <entry>boolean</entry> + <entry>Switch on or off the illuminator 1 or 2 of the device + (usually a microscope).</entry> + </row> + <row> <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_LASTP1</constant></entry> <entry></entry> <entry>End of the predefined control IDs (currently -<constant>V4L2_CID_BG_COLOR</constant> + 1).</entry> +<constant>V4L2_CID_ILLUMINATORS_2</constant> + 1).</entry> </row> <row> <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_PRIVATE_BASE</constant></entry> @@ -357,9 +364,6 @@ enumerate_menu (void) querymenu.index++) { if (0 == ioctl (fd, &VIDIOC-QUERYMENU;, &querymenu)) { printf (" %s\n", querymenu.name); - } else { - perror ("VIDIOC_QUERYMENU"); - exit (EXIT_FAILURE); } } } diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-rds.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-rds.xml index 0869d701b1e5..360d2737e649 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-rds.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-rds.xml @@ -3,15 +3,16 @@ <para>The Radio Data System transmits supplementary information in binary format, for example the station name or travel information, on an inaudible audio subcarrier of a radio program. This -interface is aimed at devices capable of receiving and decoding RDS +interface is aimed at devices capable of receiving and/or transmitting RDS information.</para> <para>For more information see the core RDS standard <xref linkend="en50067" /> and the RBDS standard <xref linkend="nrsc4" />.</para> <para>Note that the RBDS standard as is used in the USA is almost identical -to the RDS standard. Any RDS decoder can also handle RBDS. Only some of the fields -have slightly different meanings. See the RBDS standard for more information.</para> +to the RDS standard. Any RDS decoder/encoder can also handle RBDS. Only some of the +fields have slightly different meanings. See the RBDS standard for more +information.</para> <para>The RBDS standard also specifies support for MMBS (Modified Mobile Search). This is a proprietary format which seems to be discontinued. The RDS interface does not @@ -21,16 +22,25 @@ be needed, then please contact the linux-media mailing list: &v4l-ml;.</para> <section> <title>Querying Capabilities</title> - <para>Devices supporting the RDS capturing API -set the <constant>V4L2_CAP_RDS_CAPTURE</constant> flag in + <para>Devices supporting the RDS capturing API set +the <constant>V4L2_CAP_RDS_CAPTURE</constant> flag in the <structfield>capabilities</structfield> field of &v4l2-capability; -returned by the &VIDIOC-QUERYCAP; ioctl. -Any tuner that supports RDS will set the -<constant>V4L2_TUNER_CAP_RDS</constant> flag in the <structfield>capability</structfield> -field of &v4l2-tuner;. -Whether an RDS signal is present can be detected by looking at -the <structfield>rxsubchans</structfield> field of &v4l2-tuner;: the -<constant>V4L2_TUNER_SUB_RDS</constant> will be set if RDS data was detected.</para> +returned by the &VIDIOC-QUERYCAP; ioctl. Any tuner that supports RDS +will set the <constant>V4L2_TUNER_CAP_RDS</constant> flag in +the <structfield>capability</structfield> field of &v4l2-tuner;. If +the driver only passes RDS blocks without interpreting the data +the <constant>V4L2_TUNER_SUB_RDS_BLOCK_IO</constant> flag has to be +set, see <link linkend="reading-rds-data">Reading RDS data</link>. +For future use the +flag <constant>V4L2_TUNER_SUB_RDS_CONTROLS</constant> has also been +defined. However, a driver for a radio tuner with this capability does +not yet exist, so if you are planning to write such a driver you +should discuss this on the linux-media mailing list: &v4l-ml;.</para> + + <para> Whether an RDS signal is present can be detected by looking +at the <structfield>rxsubchans</structfield> field of &v4l2-tuner;: +the <constant>V4L2_TUNER_SUB_RDS</constant> will be set if RDS data +was detected.</para> <para>Devices supporting the RDS output API set the <constant>V4L2_CAP_RDS_OUTPUT</constant> flag in @@ -40,16 +50,31 @@ Any modulator that supports RDS will set the <constant>V4L2_TUNER_CAP_RDS</constant> flag in the <structfield>capability</structfield> field of &v4l2-modulator;. In order to enable the RDS transmission one must set the <constant>V4L2_TUNER_SUB_RDS</constant> -bit in the <structfield>txsubchans</structfield> field of &v4l2-modulator;.</para> - +bit in the <structfield>txsubchans</structfield> field of &v4l2-modulator;. +If the driver only passes RDS blocks without interpreting the data +the <constant>V4L2_TUNER_SUB_RDS_BLOCK_IO</constant> flag has to be set. If the +tuner is capable of handling RDS entities like program identification codes and radio +text, the flag <constant>V4L2_TUNER_SUB_RDS_CONTROLS</constant> should be set, +see <link linkend="writing-rds-data">Writing RDS data</link> and +<link linkend="fm-tx-controls">FM Transmitter Control Reference</link>.</para> </section> - <section> + <section id="reading-rds-data"> <title>Reading RDS data</title> <para>RDS data can be read from the radio device -with the &func-read; function. The data is packed in groups of three bytes, +with the &func-read; function. The data is packed in groups of three bytes.</para> + </section> + + <section id="writing-rds-data"> + <title>Writing RDS data</title> + + <para>RDS data can be written to the radio device +with the &func-write; function. The data is packed in groups of three bytes, as follows:</para> + </section> + + <section> <table frame="none" pgwide="1" id="v4l2-rds-data"> <title>struct <structname>v4l2_rds_data</structname></title> @@ -111,48 +136,57 @@ as follows:</para> <tbody valign="top"> <row> <entry>V4L2_RDS_BLOCK_MSK</entry> + <entry> </entry> <entry>7</entry> <entry>Mask for bits 0-2 to get the block ID.</entry> </row> <row> <entry>V4L2_RDS_BLOCK_A</entry> + <entry> </entry> <entry>0</entry> <entry>Block A.</entry> </row> <row> <entry>V4L2_RDS_BLOCK_B</entry> + <entry> </entry> <entry>1</entry> <entry>Block B.</entry> </row> <row> <entry>V4L2_RDS_BLOCK_C</entry> + <entry> </entry> <entry>2</entry> <entry>Block C.</entry> </row> <row> <entry>V4L2_RDS_BLOCK_D</entry> + <entry> </entry> <entry>3</entry> <entry>Block D.</entry> </row> <row> <entry>V4L2_RDS_BLOCK_C_ALT</entry> + <entry> </entry> <entry>4</entry> <entry>Block C'.</entry> </row> <row> <entry>V4L2_RDS_BLOCK_INVALID</entry> + <entry>read-only</entry> <entry>7</entry> <entry>An invalid block.</entry> </row> <row> <entry>V4L2_RDS_BLOCK_CORRECTED</entry> + <entry>read-only</entry> <entry>0x40</entry> <entry>A bit error was detected but corrected.</entry> </row> <row> <entry>V4L2_RDS_BLOCK_ERROR</entry> + <entry>read-only</entry> <entry>0x80</entry> - <entry>An incorrectable error occurred.</entry> + <entry>An uncorrectable error occurred.</entry> </row> </tbody> </tgroup> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-teletext.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-teletext.xml index 76184e8ed618..414b1cfff9f4 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-teletext.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-teletext.xml @@ -1,35 +1,32 @@ <title>Teletext Interface</title> - <para>This interface aims at devices receiving and demodulating + <para>This interface was aimed at devices receiving and demodulating Teletext data [<xref linkend="ets300706" />, <xref linkend="itu653" />], evaluating the Teletext packages and storing formatted pages in cache memory. Such devices are usually implemented as microcontrollers with serial -interface (I<superscript>2</superscript>C) and can be found on older +interface (I<superscript>2</superscript>C) and could be found on old TV cards, dedicated Teletext decoding cards and home-brew devices connected to the PC parallel port.</para> - <para>The Teletext API was designed by Martin Buck. It is defined in + <para>The Teletext API was designed by Martin Buck. It was defined in the kernel header file <filename>linux/videotext.h</filename>, the specification is available from <ulink url="ftp://ftp.gwdg.de/pub/linux/misc/videotext/"> ftp://ftp.gwdg.de/pub/linux/misc/videotext/</ulink>. (Videotext is the name of -the German public television Teletext service.) Conventional character -device file names are <filename>/dev/vtx</filename> and -<filename>/dev/vttuner</filename>, with device number 83, 0 and 83, 16 -respectively. A similar interface exists for the Philips SAA5249 -Teletext decoder [specification?] with character device file names -<filename>/dev/tlkN</filename>, device number 102, N.</para> +the German public television Teletext service.)</para> <para>Eventually the Teletext API was integrated into the V4L API with character device file names <filename>/dev/vtx0</filename> to <filename>/dev/vtx31</filename>, device major number 81, minor numbers -192 to 223. For reference the V4L Teletext API specification is -reproduced here in full: "Teletext interfaces talk the existing VTX -API." Teletext devices with major number 83 and 102 will be removed in -Linux 2.6.</para> +192 to 223.</para> - <para>There are no plans to replace the Teletext API or to integrate -it into V4L2. Please write to the linux-media mailing list: &v4l-ml; -when the need arises.</para> + <para>However, teletext decoders were quickly replaced by more +generic VBI demodulators and those dedicated teletext decoders no longer exist. +For many years the vtx devices were still around, even though nobody used +them. So the decision was made to finally remove support for the Teletext API in +kernel 2.6.37.</para> + + <para>Modern devices all use the <link linkend="raw-vbi">raw</link> or +<link linkend="sliced">sliced</link> VBI API.</para> <!-- Local Variables: diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/func-ioctl.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/func-ioctl.xml index 00f9690e1c28..b60fd37a6295 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/func-ioctl.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/func-ioctl.xml @@ -34,8 +34,7 @@ <varlistentry> <term><parameter>request</parameter></term> <listitem> - <para>V4L2 ioctl request code as defined in the <link -linkend="videodev">videodev.h</link> header file, for example + <para>V4L2 ioctl request code as defined in the <filename>videodev2.h</filename> header file, for example VIDIOC_QUERYCAP.</para> </listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -57,7 +56,7 @@ file descriptor. An ioctl <parameter>request</parameter> has encoded in it whether the argument is an input, output or read/write parameter, and the size of the argument <parameter>argp</parameter> in bytes. Macros and defines specifying V4L2 ioctl requests are located -in the <link linkend="videodev">videodev.h</link> header file. +in the <filename>videodev2.h</filename> header file. Applications should use their own copy, not include the version in the kernel sources on the system they compile on. All V4L2 ioctl requests, their respective function and parameters are specified in <xref diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-packed-rgb.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-packed-rgb.xml index 26e879231088..4db272b8a0d3 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-packed-rgb.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-packed-rgb.xml @@ -739,7 +739,7 @@ defined in error. Drivers may interpret them as in <xref <entry>b<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>b<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-BGR666"> + <row><!-- id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-BGR666" --> <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_BGR666</constant></entry> <entry>'BGRH'</entry> <entry></entry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-srggb10.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-srggb10.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7b274092e60c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-srggb10.xml @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + <refentry> + <refmeta> + <refentrytitle>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB10 ('RG10'), + V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG10 ('BA10'), + V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGBRG10 ('GB10'), + V4L2_PIX_FMT_SBGGR10 ('BG10'), + </refentrytitle> + &manvol; + </refmeta> + <refnamediv> + <refname id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SRGGB10"><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB10</constant></refname> + <refname id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SGRBG10"><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG10</constant></refname> + <refname id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SGBRG10"><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGBRG10</constant></refname> + <refname id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SBGGR10"><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SBGGR10</constant></refname> + <refpurpose>10-bit Bayer formats expanded to 16 bits</refpurpose> + </refnamediv> + <refsect1> + <title>Description</title> + + <para>The following four pixel formats are raw sRGB / Bayer formats with +10 bits per colour. Each colour component is stored in a 16-bit word, with 6 +unused high bits filled with zeros. Each n-pixel row contains n/2 green samples +and n/2 blue or red samples, with alternating red and blue rows. Bytes are +stored in memory in little endian order. They are conventionally described +as GRGR... BGBG..., RGRG... GBGB..., etc. Below is an example of one of these +formats</para> + + <example> + <title><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SBGGR10</constant> 4 × 4 +pixel image</title> + + <formalpara> + <title>Byte Order.</title> + <para>Each cell is one byte, high 6 bits in high bytes are 0. + <informaltable frame="none"> + <tgroup cols="5" align="center"> + <colspec align="left" colwidth="2*" /> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry>start + 0:</entry> + <entry>B<subscript>00low</subscript></entry> + <entry>B<subscript>00high</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>01low</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>01high</subscript></entry> + <entry>B<subscript>02low</subscript></entry> + <entry>B<subscript>02high</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>03low</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>03high</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start + 8:</entry> + <entry>G<subscript>10low</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>10high</subscript></entry> + <entry>R<subscript>11low</subscript></entry> + <entry>R<subscript>11high</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>12low</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>12high</subscript></entry> + <entry>R<subscript>13low</subscript></entry> + <entry>R<subscript>13high</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start + 16:</entry> + <entry>B<subscript>20low</subscript></entry> + <entry>B<subscript>20high</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>21low</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>21high</subscript></entry> + <entry>B<subscript>22low</subscript></entry> + <entry>B<subscript>22high</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>23low</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>23high</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start + 24:</entry> + <entry>G<subscript>30low</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>30high</subscript></entry> + <entry>R<subscript>31low</subscript></entry> + <entry>R<subscript>31high</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>32low</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>32high</subscript></entry> + <entry>R<subscript>33low</subscript></entry> + <entry>R<subscript>33high</subscript></entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </informaltable> + </para> + </formalpara> + </example> + </refsect1> +</refentry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-srggb8.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-srggb8.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2570e3be3cf1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-srggb8.xml @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + <refentry id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SRGGB8"> + <refmeta> + <refentrytitle>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB8 ('RGGB')</refentrytitle> + &manvol; + </refmeta> + <refnamediv> + <refname><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB8</constant></refname> + <refpurpose>Bayer RGB format</refpurpose> + </refnamediv> + <refsect1> + <title>Description</title> + + <para>This is commonly the native format of digital cameras, +reflecting the arrangement of sensors on the CCD device. Only one red, +green or blue value is given for each pixel. Missing components must +be interpolated from neighbouring pixels. From left to right the first +row consists of a red and green value, the second row of a green and +blue value. This scheme repeats to the right and down for every two +columns and rows.</para> + + <example> + <title><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB8</constant> 4 × 4 +pixel image</title> + + <formalpara> + <title>Byte Order.</title> + <para>Each cell is one byte. + <informaltable frame="none"> + <tgroup cols="5" align="center"> + <colspec align="left" colwidth="2*" /> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry>start + 0:</entry> + <entry>R<subscript>00</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>01</subscript></entry> + <entry>R<subscript>02</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>03</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start + 4:</entry> + <entry>G<subscript>10</subscript></entry> + <entry>B<subscript>11</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>12</subscript></entry> + <entry>B<subscript>13</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start + 8:</entry> + <entry>R<subscript>20</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>21</subscript></entry> + <entry>R<subscript>22</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>23</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start + 12:</entry> + <entry>G<subscript>30</subscript></entry> + <entry>B<subscript>31</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>32</subscript></entry> + <entry>B<subscript>33</subscript></entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </informaltable> + </para> + </formalpara> + </example> + </refsect1> + </refentry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-y10.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-y10.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d065043db8d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-y10.xml @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +<refentry id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-Y10"> + <refmeta> + <refentrytitle>V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y10 ('Y10 ')</refentrytitle> + &manvol; + </refmeta> + <refnamediv> + <refname><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y10</constant></refname> + <refpurpose>Grey-scale image</refpurpose> + </refnamediv> + <refsect1> + <title>Description</title> + + <para>This is a grey-scale image with a depth of 10 bits per pixel. Pixels +are stored in 16-bit words with unused high bits padded with 0. The least +significant byte is stored at lower memory addresses (little-endian).</para> + + <example> + <title><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y10</constant> 4 × 4 +pixel image</title> + + <formalpara> + <title>Byte Order.</title> + <para>Each cell is one byte. + <informaltable frame="none"> + <tgroup cols="9" align="center"> + <colspec align="left" colwidth="2*" /> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry>start + 0:</entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>00low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>00high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>01low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>01high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>02low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>02high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>03low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>03high</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start + 8:</entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>10low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>10high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>11low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>11high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>12low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>12high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>13low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>13high</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start + 16:</entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>20low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>20high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>21low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>21high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>22low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>22high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>23low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>23high</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start + 24:</entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>30low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>30high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>31low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>31high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>32low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>32high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>33low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>33high</subscript></entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </informaltable> + </para> + </formalpara> + </example> + </refsect1> +</refentry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt.xml index c4ad0a8e42dc..cfffc88d7383 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt.xml @@ -142,8 +142,8 @@ leftmost pixel of the second row from the top, and so on. The last row has just as many pad bytes after it as the other rows.</para> <para>In V4L2 each format has an identifier which looks like -<constant>PIX_FMT_XXX</constant>, defined in the <link -linkend="videodev">videodev.h</link> header file. These identifiers +<constant>PIX_FMT_XXX</constant>, defined in the <filename>videodev2.h</filename> +header file. These identifiers represent <link linkend="v4l2-fourcc">four character codes</link> which are also listed below, however they are not the same as those used in the Windows world.</para> @@ -566,7 +566,9 @@ access the palette, this must be done with ioctls of the Linux framebuffer API.< &sub-sbggr8; &sub-sgbrg8; &sub-sgrbg8; + &sub-srggb8; &sub-sbggr16; + &sub-srggb10; </section> <section id="yuv-formats"> @@ -589,6 +591,7 @@ information.</para> &sub-packed-yuv; &sub-grey; + &sub-y10; &sub-y16; &sub-yuyv; &sub-uyvy; @@ -685,6 +688,11 @@ http://www.ivtvdriver.org/</ulink></para><para>The format is documented in the kernel sources in the file <filename>Documentation/video4linux/cx2341x/README.hm12</filename> </para></entry> </row> + <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-CPIA1"> + <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_CPIA1</constant></entry> + <entry>'CPIA'</entry> + <entry>YUV format used by the gspca cpia1 driver.</entry> + </row> <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SPCA501"> <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SPCA501</constant></entry> <entry>'S501'</entry> @@ -705,11 +713,6 @@ kernel sources in the file <filename>Documentation/video4linux/cx2341x/README.hm <entry>'S561'</entry> <entry>Compressed GBRG Bayer format used by the gspca driver.</entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SGRBG10"> - <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG10</constant></entry> - <entry>'DA10'</entry> - <entry>10 bit raw Bayer, expanded to 16 bits.</entry> - </row> <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SGRBG10DPCM8"> <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG10DPCM8</constant></entry> <entry>'DB10'</entry> @@ -770,6 +773,11 @@ kernel sources in the file <filename>Documentation/video4linux/cx2341x/README.hm <entry>'S920'</entry> <entry>YUV 4:2:0 format of the gspca sn9c20x driver.</entry> </row> + <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SN9C2028"> + <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SN9C2028</constant></entry> + <entry>'SONX'</entry> + <entry>Compressed GBRG bayer format of the gspca sn9c2028 driver.</entry> + </row> <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-STV0680"> <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_STV0680</constant></entry> <entry>'S680'</entry> @@ -787,6 +795,20 @@ http://www.thedirks.org/winnov/</ulink></para></entry> <entry>'TM60'</entry> <entry><para>Used by Trident tm6000</para></entry> </row> + <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-CIT-YYVYUY"> + <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_CIT_YYVYUY</constant></entry> + <entry>'CITV'</entry> + <entry><para>Used by xirlink CIT, found at IBM webcams.</para> + <para>Uses one line of Y then 1 line of VYUY</para> + </entry> + </row> + <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-KONICA420"> + <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_KONICA420</constant></entry> + <entry>'KONI'</entry> + <entry><para>Used by Konica webcams.</para> + <para>YUV420 planar in blocks of 256 pixels.</para> + </entry> + </row> <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-YYUV"> <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_YYUV</constant></entry> <entry>'YYUV'</entry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/v4l2.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/v4l2.xml index 7c3c098d5d08..839e93e875ae 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/v4l2.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/v4l2.xml @@ -99,6 +99,7 @@ Remote Controller chapter.</contrib> <year>2007</year> <year>2008</year> <year>2009</year> + <year>2010</year> <holder>Bill Dirks, Michael H. Schimek, Hans Verkuil, Martin Rubli, Andy Walls, Muralidharan Karicheri, Mauro Carvalho Chehab</holder> </copyright> @@ -110,10 +111,17 @@ Rubli, Andy Walls, Muralidharan Karicheri, Mauro Carvalho Chehab</holder> <!-- Put document revisions here, newest first. --> <!-- API revisions (changes and additions of defines, enums, structs, ioctls) must be noted in more detail in the history chapter -(compat.sgml), along with the possible impact on existing drivers and +(compat.xml), along with the possible impact on existing drivers and applications. --> <revision> + <revnumber>2.6.37</revnumber> + <date>2010-08-06</date> + <authorinitials>hv</authorinitials> + <revremark>Removed obsolete vtx (videotext) API.</revremark> + </revision> + + <revision> <revnumber>2.6.33</revnumber> <date>2009-12-03</date> <authorinitials>mk</authorinitials> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/videodev2.h.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/videodev2.h.xml index 865b06d9e679..325b23b6964c 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/videodev2.h.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/videodev2.h.xml @@ -154,23 +154,13 @@ enum <link linkend="v4l2-buf-type">v4l2_buf_type</link> { V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VBI_OUTPUT = 5, V4L2_BUF_TYPE_SLICED_VBI_CAPTURE = 6, V4L2_BUF_TYPE_SLICED_VBI_OUTPUT = 7, -#if 1 /*KEEP*/ +#if 1 /* Experimental */ V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT_OVERLAY = 8, #endif V4L2_BUF_TYPE_PRIVATE = 0x80, }; -enum <link linkend="v4l2-ctrl-type">v4l2_ctrl_type</link> { - V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_INTEGER = 1, - V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_BOOLEAN = 2, - V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_MENU = 3, - V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_BUTTON = 4, - V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_INTEGER64 = 5, - V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_CTRL_CLASS = 6, - V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_STRING = 7, -}; - enum <link linkend="v4l2-tuner-type">v4l2_tuner_type</link> { V4L2_TUNER_RADIO = 1, V4L2_TUNER_ANALOG_TV = 2, @@ -288,6 +278,7 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-pix-format">v4l2_pix_format</link> { #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-RGB565">V4L2_PIX_FMT_RGB565</link> v4l2_fourcc('R', 'G', 'B', 'P') /* 16 RGB-5-6-5 */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-RGB555X">V4L2_PIX_FMT_RGB555X</link> v4l2_fourcc('R', 'G', 'B', 'Q') /* 16 RGB-5-5-5 BE */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-RGB565X">V4L2_PIX_FMT_RGB565X</link> v4l2_fourcc('R', 'G', 'B', 'R') /* 16 RGB-5-6-5 BE */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-BGR666">V4L2_PIX_FMT_BGR666</link> v4l2_fourcc('B', 'G', 'R', 'H') /* 18 BGR-6-6-6 */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-BGR24">V4L2_PIX_FMT_BGR24</link> v4l2_fourcc('B', 'G', 'R', '3') /* 24 BGR-8-8-8 */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-RGB24">V4L2_PIX_FMT_RGB24</link> v4l2_fourcc('R', 'G', 'B', '3') /* 24 RGB-8-8-8 */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-BGR32">V4L2_PIX_FMT_BGR32</link> v4l2_fourcc('B', 'G', 'R', '4') /* 32 BGR-8-8-8-8 */ @@ -295,6 +286,9 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-pix-format">v4l2_pix_format</link> { /* Grey formats */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-GREY">V4L2_PIX_FMT_GREY</link> v4l2_fourcc('G', 'R', 'E', 'Y') /* 8 Greyscale */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-Y4">V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y4</link> v4l2_fourcc('Y', '0', '4', ' ') /* 4 Greyscale */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-Y6">V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y6</link> v4l2_fourcc('Y', '0', '6', ' ') /* 6 Greyscale */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-Y10">V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y10</link> v4l2_fourcc('Y', '1', '0', ' ') /* 10 Greyscale */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-Y16">V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y16</link> v4l2_fourcc('Y', '1', '6', ' ') /* 16 Greyscale */ /* Palette formats */ @@ -330,7 +324,11 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-pix-format">v4l2_pix_format</link> { #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SBGGR8">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SBGGR8</link> v4l2_fourcc('B', 'A', '8', '1') /* 8 BGBG.. GRGR.. */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SGBRG8">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGBRG8</link> v4l2_fourcc('G', 'B', 'R', 'G') /* 8 GBGB.. RGRG.. */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SGRBG8">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG8</link> v4l2_fourcc('G', 'R', 'B', 'G') /* 8 GRGR.. BGBG.. */ -#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SGRBG10">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG10</link> v4l2_fourcc('B', 'A', '1', '0') /* 10bit raw bayer */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SRGGB8">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB8</link> v4l2_fourcc('R', 'G', 'G', 'B') /* 8 RGRG.. GBGB.. */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SBGGR10">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SBGGR10</link> v4l2_fourcc('B', 'G', '1', '0') /* 10 BGBG.. GRGR.. */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SGBRG10">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGBRG10</link> v4l2_fourcc('G', 'B', '1', '0') /* 10 GBGB.. RGRG.. */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SGRBG10">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG10</link> v4l2_fourcc('B', 'A', '1', '0') /* 10 GRGR.. BGBG.. */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SRGGB10">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB10</link> v4l2_fourcc('R', 'G', '1', '0') /* 10 RGRG.. GBGB.. */ /* 10bit raw bayer DPCM compressed to 8 bits */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SGRBG10DPCM8">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG10DPCM8</link> v4l2_fourcc('B', 'D', '1', '0') /* @@ -346,6 +344,7 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-pix-format">v4l2_pix_format</link> { #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-MPEG">V4L2_PIX_FMT_MPEG</link> v4l2_fourcc('M', 'P', 'E', 'G') /* MPEG-1/2/4 */ /* Vendor-specific formats */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-CPIA1">V4L2_PIX_FMT_CPIA1</link> v4l2_fourcc('C', 'P', 'I', 'A') /* cpia1 YUV */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-WNVA">V4L2_PIX_FMT_WNVA</link> v4l2_fourcc('W', 'N', 'V', 'A') /* Winnov hw compress */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SN9C10X">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SN9C10X</link> v4l2_fourcc('S', '9', '1', '0') /* SN9C10x compression */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SN9C20X-I420">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SN9C20X_I420</link> v4l2_fourcc('S', '9', '2', '0') /* SN9C20x YUV 4:2:0 */ @@ -358,12 +357,15 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-pix-format">v4l2_pix_format</link> { #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SPCA561">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SPCA561</link> v4l2_fourcc('S', '5', '6', '1') /* compressed GBRG bayer */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-PAC207">V4L2_PIX_FMT_PAC207</link> v4l2_fourcc('P', '2', '0', '7') /* compressed BGGR bayer */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-MR97310A">V4L2_PIX_FMT_MR97310A</link> v4l2_fourcc('M', '3', '1', '0') /* compressed BGGR bayer */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SN9C2028">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SN9C2028</link> v4l2_fourcc('S', 'O', 'N', 'X') /* compressed GBRG bayer */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SQ905C">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SQ905C</link> v4l2_fourcc('9', '0', '5', 'C') /* compressed RGGB bayer */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-PJPG">V4L2_PIX_FMT_PJPG</link> v4l2_fourcc('P', 'J', 'P', 'G') /* Pixart 73xx JPEG */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-OV511">V4L2_PIX_FMT_OV511</link> v4l2_fourcc('O', '5', '1', '1') /* ov511 JPEG */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-OV518">V4L2_PIX_FMT_OV518</link> v4l2_fourcc('O', '5', '1', '8') /* ov518 JPEG */ -#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-TM6000">V4L2_PIX_FMT_TM6000</link> v4l2_fourcc('T', 'M', '6', '0') /* tm5600/tm60x0 */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-STV0680">V4L2_PIX_FMT_STV0680</link> v4l2_fourcc('S', '6', '8', '0') /* stv0680 bayer */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-TM6000">V4L2_PIX_FMT_TM6000</link> v4l2_fourcc('T', 'M', '6', '0') /* tm5600/tm60x0 */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-CIT-YYVYUY">V4L2_PIX_FMT_CIT_YYVYUY</link> v4l2_fourcc('C', 'I', 'T', 'V') /* one line of Y then 1 line of VYUY */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-KONICA420">V4L2_PIX_FMT_KONICA420</link> v4l2_fourcc('K', 'O', 'N', 'I') /* YUV420 planar in blocks of 256 pixels */ /* * F O R M A T E N U M E R A T I O N @@ -380,7 +382,7 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-fmtdesc">v4l2_fmtdesc</link> { #define V4L2_FMT_FLAG_COMPRESSED 0x0001 #define V4L2_FMT_FLAG_EMULATED 0x0002 -#if 1 /*KEEP*/ +#if 1 /* Experimental Frame Size and frame rate enumeration */ /* * F R A M E S I Z E E N U M E R A T I O N @@ -544,6 +546,8 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-buffer">v4l2_buffer</link> { #define V4L2_BUF_FLAG_KEYFRAME 0x0008 /* Image is a keyframe (I-frame) */ #define V4L2_BUF_FLAG_PFRAME 0x0010 /* Image is a P-frame */ #define V4L2_BUF_FLAG_BFRAME 0x0020 /* Image is a B-frame */ +/* Buffer is ready, but the data contained within is corrupted. */ +#define V4L2_BUF_FLAG_ERROR 0x0040 #define V4L2_BUF_FLAG_TIMECODE 0x0100 /* timecode field is valid */ #define V4L2_BUF_FLAG_INPUT 0x0200 /* input field is valid */ @@ -934,6 +938,16 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-ext-controls">v4l2_ext_controls</link> { #define V4L2_CTRL_ID2CLASS(id) ((id) & 0x0fff0000UL) #define V4L2_CTRL_DRIVER_PRIV(id) (((id) & 0xffff) >= 0x1000) +enum <link linkend="v4l2-ctrl-type">v4l2_ctrl_type</link> { + V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_INTEGER = 1, + V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_BOOLEAN = 2, + V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_MENU = 3, + V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_BUTTON = 4, + V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_INTEGER64 = 5, + V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_CTRL_CLASS = 6, + V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_STRING = 7, +}; + /* Used in the VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL ioctl for querying controls */ struct <link linkend="v4l2-queryctrl">v4l2_queryctrl</link> { __u32 id; @@ -1018,21 +1032,27 @@ enum <link linkend="v4l2-colorfx">v4l2_colorfx</link> { V4L2_COLORFX_NONE = 0, V4L2_COLORFX_BW = 1, V4L2_COLORFX_SEPIA = 2, - V4L2_COLORFX_NEGATIVE = 3, - V4L2_COLORFX_EMBOSS = 4, - V4L2_COLORFX_SKETCH = 5, - V4L2_COLORFX_SKY_BLUE = 6, + V4L2_COLORFX_NEGATIVE = 3, + V4L2_COLORFX_EMBOSS = 4, + V4L2_COLORFX_SKETCH = 5, + V4L2_COLORFX_SKY_BLUE = 6, V4L2_COLORFX_GRASS_GREEN = 7, V4L2_COLORFX_SKIN_WHITEN = 8, - V4L2_COLORFX_VIVID = 9. + V4L2_COLORFX_VIVID = 9, }; #define V4L2_CID_AUTOBRIGHTNESS (V4L2_CID_BASE+32) #define V4L2_CID_BAND_STOP_FILTER (V4L2_CID_BASE+33) #define V4L2_CID_ROTATE (V4L2_CID_BASE+34) #define V4L2_CID_BG_COLOR (V4L2_CID_BASE+35) + +#define V4L2_CID_CHROMA_GAIN (V4L2_CID_BASE+36) + +#define V4L2_CID_ILLUMINATORS_1 (V4L2_CID_BASE+37) +#define V4L2_CID_ILLUMINATORS_2 (V4L2_CID_BASE+38) + /* last CID + 1 */ -#define V4L2_CID_LASTP1 (V4L2_CID_BASE+36) +#define V4L2_CID_LASTP1 (V4L2_CID_BASE+39) /* MPEG-class control IDs defined by V4L2 */ #define V4L2_CID_MPEG_BASE (V4L2_CTRL_CLASS_MPEG | 0x900) @@ -1349,6 +1369,8 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-modulator">v4l2_modulator</link> { #define V4L2_TUNER_CAP_SAP 0x0020 #define V4L2_TUNER_CAP_LANG1 0x0040 #define V4L2_TUNER_CAP_RDS 0x0080 +#define V4L2_TUNER_CAP_RDS_BLOCK_IO 0x0100 +#define V4L2_TUNER_CAP_RDS_CONTROLS 0x0200 /* Flags for the 'rxsubchans' field */ #define V4L2_TUNER_SUB_MONO 0x0001 @@ -1378,7 +1400,8 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-hw-freq-seek">v4l2_hw_freq_seek</link> { enum <link linkend="v4l2-tuner-type">v4l2_tuner_type</link> type; __u32 seek_upward; __u32 wrap_around; - __u32 reserved[8]; + __u32 spacing; + __u32 reserved[7]; }; /* @@ -1433,7 +1456,7 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-audioout">v4l2_audioout</link> { * * NOTE: EXPERIMENTAL API */ -#if 1 /*KEEP*/ +#if 1 #define V4L2_ENC_IDX_FRAME_I (0) #define V4L2_ENC_IDX_FRAME_P (1) #define V4L2_ENC_IDX_FRAME_B (2) @@ -1626,6 +1649,38 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-streamparm">v4l2_streamparm</link> { }; /* + * E V E N T S + */ + +#define V4L2_EVENT_ALL 0 +#define V4L2_EVENT_VSYNC 1 +#define V4L2_EVENT_EOS 2 +#define V4L2_EVENT_PRIVATE_START 0x08000000 + +/* Payload for V4L2_EVENT_VSYNC */ +struct <link linkend="v4l2-event-vsync">v4l2_event_vsync</link> { + /* Can be V4L2_FIELD_ANY, _NONE, _TOP or _BOTTOM */ + __u8 field; +} __attribute__ ((packed)); + +struct <link linkend="v4l2-event">v4l2_event</link> { + __u32 type; + union { + struct <link linkend="v4l2-event-vsync">v4l2_event_vsync</link> vsync; + __u8 data[64]; + } u; + __u32 pending; + __u32 sequence; + struct timespec timestamp; + __u32 reserved[9]; +}; + +struct <link linkend="v4l2-event-subscription">v4l2_event_subscription</link> { + __u32 type; + __u32 reserved[7]; +}; + +/* * A D V A N C E D D E B U G G I N G * * NOTE: EXPERIMENTAL API, NEVER RELY ON THIS IN APPLICATIONS! @@ -1720,7 +1775,7 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-dbg-chip-ident">v4l2_dbg_chip_ident</link> { #define VIDIOC_G_EXT_CTRLS _IOWR('V', 71, struct <link linkend="v4l2-ext-controls">v4l2_ext_controls</link>) #define VIDIOC_S_EXT_CTRLS _IOWR('V', 72, struct <link linkend="v4l2-ext-controls">v4l2_ext_controls</link>) #define VIDIOC_TRY_EXT_CTRLS _IOWR('V', 73, struct <link linkend="v4l2-ext-controls">v4l2_ext_controls</link>) -#if 1 /*KEEP*/ +#if 1 #define VIDIOC_ENUM_FRAMESIZES _IOWR('V', 74, struct <link linkend="v4l2-frmsizeenum">v4l2_frmsizeenum</link>) #define VIDIOC_ENUM_FRAMEINTERVALS _IOWR('V', 75, struct <link linkend="v4l2-frmivalenum">v4l2_frmivalenum</link>) #define VIDIOC_G_ENC_INDEX _IOR('V', 76, struct <link linkend="v4l2-enc-idx">v4l2_enc_idx</link>) @@ -1728,7 +1783,7 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-dbg-chip-ident">v4l2_dbg_chip_ident</link> { #define VIDIOC_TRY_ENCODER_CMD _IOWR('V', 78, struct <link linkend="v4l2-encoder-cmd">v4l2_encoder_cmd</link>) #endif -#if 1 /*KEEP*/ +#if 1 /* Experimental, meant for debugging, testing and internal use. Only implemented if CONFIG_VIDEO_ADV_DEBUG is defined. You must be root to use these ioctls. Never use these in applications! */ @@ -1747,6 +1802,9 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-dbg-chip-ident">v4l2_dbg_chip_ident</link> { #define VIDIOC_QUERY_DV_PRESET _IOR('V', 86, struct <link linkend="v4l2-dv-preset">v4l2_dv_preset</link>) #define VIDIOC_S_DV_TIMINGS _IOWR('V', 87, struct <link linkend="v4l2-dv-timings">v4l2_dv_timings</link>) #define VIDIOC_G_DV_TIMINGS _IOWR('V', 88, struct <link linkend="v4l2-dv-timings">v4l2_dv_timings</link>) +#define VIDIOC_DQEVENT _IOR('V', 89, struct <link linkend="v4l2-event">v4l2_event</link>) +#define VIDIOC_SUBSCRIBE_EVENT _IOW('V', 90, struct <link linkend="v4l2-event-subscription">v4l2_event_subscription</link>) +#define VIDIOC_UNSUBSCRIBE_EVENT _IOW('V', 91, struct <link linkend="v4l2-event-subscription">v4l2_event_subscription</link>) /* Reminder: when adding new ioctls please add support for them to drivers/media/video/v4l2-compat-ioctl32.c as well! */ diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-preset.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-preset.xml index 3c6784e132f3..d733721a7519 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-preset.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-preset.xml @@ -16,8 +16,7 @@ <funcdef>int <function>ioctl</function></funcdef> <paramdef>int <parameter>fd</parameter></paramdef> <paramdef>int <parameter>request</parameter></paramdef> - <paramdef>&v4l2-dv-preset; -*<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef> + <paramdef>struct v4l2_dv_preset *<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef> </funcprototype> </funcsynopsis> </refsynopsisdiv> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-timings.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-timings.xml index ecc19576bb8f..d5ec6abf0ce2 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-timings.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-timings.xml @@ -16,8 +16,7 @@ <funcdef>int <function>ioctl</function></funcdef> <paramdef>int <parameter>fd</parameter></paramdef> <paramdef>int <parameter>request</parameter></paramdef> - <paramdef>&v4l2-dv-timings; -*<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef> + <paramdef>struct v4l2_dv_timings *<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef> </funcprototype> </funcsynopsis> </refsynopsisdiv> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-query-dv-preset.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-query-dv-preset.xml index 402229ee06f6..d272f7ab91b8 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-query-dv-preset.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-query-dv-preset.xml @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ input</refpurpose> <funcdef>int <function>ioctl</function></funcdef> <paramdef>int <parameter>fd</parameter></paramdef> <paramdef>int <parameter>request</parameter></paramdef> - <paramdef>&v4l2-dv-preset; *<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef> + <paramdef>struct v4l2_dv_preset *<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef> </funcprototype> </funcsynopsis> </refsynopsisdiv> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-querycap.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-querycap.xml index 6ab7e25b31b6..d499da93a450 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-querycap.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-querycap.xml @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ data.</entry> <row> <entry><constant>V4L2_CAP_RDS_CAPTURE</constant></entry> <entry>0x00000100</entry> - <entry>The device supports the <link linkend="rds">RDS</link> interface.</entry> + <entry>The device supports the <link linkend="rds">RDS</link> capture interface.</entry> </row> <row> <entry><constant>V4L2_CAP_VIDEO_OUTPUT_OVERLAY</constant></entry> @@ -206,6 +206,11 @@ driver capabilities.</para></footnote></entry> hardware frequency seeking.</entry> </row> <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_CAP_RDS_OUTPUT</constant></entry> + <entry>0x00000800</entry> + <entry>The device supports the <link linkend="rds">RDS</link> output interface.</entry> + </row> + <row> <entry><constant>V4L2_CAP_TUNER</constant></entry> <entry>0x00010000</entry> <entry>The device has some sort of tuner to diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-queryctrl.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-queryctrl.xml index 8e0e055ac934..0d5e8283cf32 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-queryctrl.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-queryctrl.xml @@ -103,8 +103,12 @@ structure. The driver fills the rest of the structure or returns an <structfield>index</structfield> is invalid. Menu items are enumerated by calling <constant>VIDIOC_QUERYMENU</constant> with successive <structfield>index</structfield> values from &v4l2-queryctrl; -<structfield>minimum</structfield> (0) to -<structfield>maximum</structfield>, inclusive.</para> +<structfield>minimum</structfield> to +<structfield>maximum</structfield>, inclusive. Note that it is possible +for <constant>VIDIOC_QUERYMENU</constant> to return an &EINVAL; for some +indices between <structfield>minimum</structfield> and <structfield>maximum</structfield>. +In that case that particular menu item is not supported by this driver. Also note that +the <structfield>minimum</structfield> value is not necessarily 0.</para> <para>See also the examples in <xref linkend="control" />.</para> @@ -139,7 +143,7 @@ string. This information is intended for the user.</entry> <entry><structfield>minimum</structfield></entry> <entry>Minimum value, inclusive. This field gives a lower bound for <constant>V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_INTEGER</constant> controls and the -lowest valid index (always 0) for <constant>V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_MENU</constant> controls. +lowest valid index for <constant>V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_MENU</constant> controls. For <constant>V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_STRING</constant> controls the minimum value gives the minimum length of the string. This length <emphasis>does not include the terminating zero</emphasis>. It may not be valid for any other type of control, including @@ -279,7 +283,7 @@ values which are actually different on the hardware.</entry> </row> <row> <entry><constant>V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_MENU</constant></entry> - <entry>0</entry> + <entry>≥ 0</entry> <entry>1</entry> <entry>N-1</entry> <entry>The control has a menu of N choices. The names of @@ -405,8 +409,10 @@ writing a value will cause the device to carry out a given action <term><errorcode>EINVAL</errorcode></term> <listitem> <para>The &v4l2-queryctrl; <structfield>id</structfield> -is invalid. The &v4l2-querymenu; <structfield>id</structfield> or -<structfield>index</structfield> is invalid.</para> +is invalid. The &v4l2-querymenu; <structfield>id</structfield> is +invalid or <structfield>index</structfield> is out of range (less than +<structfield>minimum</structfield> or greater than <structfield>maximum</structfield>) +or this particular menu item is not supported by the driver.</para> </listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-s-hw-freq-seek.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-s-hw-freq-seek.xml index 14b3ec7ed75b..c30dcc4232c0 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-s-hw-freq-seek.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-s-hw-freq-seek.xml @@ -51,7 +51,8 @@ <para>Start a hardware frequency seek from the current frequency. To do this applications initialize the <structfield>tuner</structfield>, -<structfield>type</structfield>, <structfield>seek_upward</structfield> and +<structfield>type</structfield>, <structfield>seek_upward</structfield>, +<structfield>spacing</structfield> and <structfield>wrap_around</structfield> fields, and zero out the <structfield>reserved</structfield> array of a &v4l2-hw-freq-seek; and call the <constant>VIDIOC_S_HW_FREQ_SEEK</constant> ioctl with a pointer @@ -89,7 +90,12 @@ field and the &v4l2-tuner; <structfield>index</structfield> field.</entry> </row> <row> <entry>__u32</entry> - <entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[8]</entry> + <entry><structfield>spacing</structfield></entry> + <entry>If non-zero, defines the hardware seek resolution in Hz. The driver selects the nearest value that is supported by the device. If spacing is zero a reasonable default value is used.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>__u32</entry> + <entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[7]</entry> <entry>Reserved for future extensions. Drivers and applications must set the array to zero.</entry> </row> diff --git a/Documentation/Makefile b/Documentation/Makefile index 6fc7ea1d1f9d..9b4bc5c76f33 100644 --- a/Documentation/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/Makefile @@ -1,3 +1,3 @@ obj-m := DocBook/ accounting/ auxdisplay/ connector/ \ filesystems/ filesystems/configfs/ ia64/ laptops/ networking/ \ - pcmcia/ spi/ timers/ video4linux/ vm/ watchdog/src/ + pcmcia/ spi/ timers/ vm/ watchdog/src/ diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt b/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt index a851118775d8..6a8c73f55b80 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt @@ -1,18 +1,22 @@ CONFIG_RCU_TRACE debugfs Files and Formats -The rcutree implementation of RCU provides debugfs trace output that -summarizes counters and state. This information is useful for debugging -RCU itself, and can sometimes also help to debug abuses of RCU. -The following sections describe the debugfs files and formats. +The rcutree and rcutiny implementations of RCU provide debugfs trace +output that summarizes counters and state. This information is useful for +debugging RCU itself, and can sometimes also help to debug abuses of RCU. +The following sections describe the debugfs files and formats, first +for rcutree and next for rcutiny. -Hierarchical RCU debugfs Files and Formats +CONFIG_TREE_RCU and CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU debugfs Files and Formats -This implementation of RCU provides three debugfs files under the +These implementations of RCU provides five debugfs files under the top-level directory RCU: rcu/rcudata (which displays fields in struct -rcu_data), rcu/rcugp (which displays grace-period counters), and -rcu/rcuhier (which displays the struct rcu_node hierarchy). +rcu_data), rcu/rcudata.csv (which is a .csv spreadsheet version of +rcu/rcudata), rcu/rcugp (which displays grace-period counters), +rcu/rcuhier (which displays the struct rcu_node hierarchy), and +rcu/rcu_pending (which displays counts of the reasons that the +rcu_pending() function decided that there was core RCU work to do). The output of "cat rcu/rcudata" looks as follows: @@ -130,7 +134,8 @@ o "ci" is the number of RCU callbacks that have been invoked for been registered in absence of CPU-hotplug activity. o "co" is the number of RCU callbacks that have been orphaned due to - this CPU going offline. + this CPU going offline. These orphaned callbacks have been moved + to an arbitrarily chosen online CPU. o "ca" is the number of RCU callbacks that have been adopted due to other CPUs going offline. Note that ci+co-ca+ql is the number of @@ -168,12 +173,12 @@ o "gpnum" is the number of grace periods that have started. It is The output of "cat rcu/rcuhier" looks as follows, with very long lines: -c=6902 g=6903 s=2 jfq=3 j=72c7 nfqs=13142/nfqsng=0(13142) fqlh=6 oqlen=0 +c=6902 g=6903 s=2 jfq=3 j=72c7 nfqs=13142/nfqsng=0(13142) fqlh=6 1/1 .>. 0:127 ^0 3/3 .>. 0:35 ^0 0/0 .>. 36:71 ^1 0/0 .>. 72:107 ^2 0/0 .>. 108:127 ^3 3/3f .>. 0:5 ^0 2/3 .>. 6:11 ^1 0/0 .>. 12:17 ^2 0/0 .>. 18:23 ^3 0/0 .>. 24:29 ^4 0/0 .>. 30:35 ^5 0/0 .>. 36:41 ^0 0/0 .>. 42:47 ^1 0/0 .>. 48:53 ^2 0/0 .>. 54:59 ^3 0/0 .>. 60:65 ^4 0/0 .>. 66:71 ^5 0/0 .>. 72:77 ^0 0/0 .>. 78:83 ^1 0/0 .>. 84:89 ^2 0/0 .>. 90:95 ^3 0/0 .>. 96:101 ^4 0/0 .>. 102:107 ^5 0/0 .>. 108:113 ^0 0/0 .>. 114:119 ^1 0/0 .>. 120:125 ^2 0/0 .>. 126:127 ^3 rcu_bh: -c=-226 g=-226 s=1 jfq=-5701 j=72c7 nfqs=88/nfqsng=0(88) fqlh=0 oqlen=0 +c=-226 g=-226 s=1 jfq=-5701 j=72c7 nfqs=88/nfqsng=0(88) fqlh=0 0/1 .>. 0:127 ^0 0/3 .>. 0:35 ^0 0/0 .>. 36:71 ^1 0/0 .>. 72:107 ^2 0/0 .>. 108:127 ^3 0/3f .>. 0:5 ^0 0/3 .>. 6:11 ^1 0/0 .>. 12:17 ^2 0/0 .>. 18:23 ^3 0/0 .>. 24:29 ^4 0/0 .>. 30:35 ^5 0/0 .>. 36:41 ^0 0/0 .>. 42:47 ^1 0/0 .>. 48:53 ^2 0/0 .>. 54:59 ^3 0/0 .>. 60:65 ^4 0/0 .>. 66:71 ^5 0/0 .>. 72:77 ^0 0/0 .>. 78:83 ^1 0/0 .>. 84:89 ^2 0/0 .>. 90:95 ^3 0/0 .>. 96:101 ^4 0/0 .>. 102:107 ^5 0/0 .>. 108:113 ^0 0/0 .>. 114:119 ^1 0/0 .>. 120:125 ^2 0/0 .>. 126:127 ^3 @@ -212,11 +217,6 @@ o "fqlh" is the number of calls to force_quiescent_state() that exited immediately (without even being counted in nfqs above) due to contention on ->fqslock. -o "oqlen" is the number of callbacks on the "orphan" callback - list. RCU callbacks are placed on this list by CPUs going - offline, and are "adopted" either by the CPU helping the outgoing - CPU or by the next rcu_barrier*() call, whichever comes first. - o Each element of the form "1/1 0:127 ^0" represents one struct rcu_node. Each line represents one level of the hierarchy, from root to leaves. It is best to think of the rcu_data structures @@ -326,3 +326,115 @@ o "nn" is the number of times that this CPU needed nothing. Alert readers will note that the rcu "nn" number for a given CPU very closely matches the rcu_bh "np" number for that same CPU. This is due to short-circuit evaluation in rcu_pending(). + + +CONFIG_TINY_RCU and CONFIG_TINY_PREEMPT_RCU debugfs Files and Formats + +These implementations of RCU provides a single debugfs file under the +top-level directory RCU, namely rcu/rcudata, which displays fields in +rcu_bh_ctrlblk, rcu_sched_ctrlblk and, for CONFIG_TINY_PREEMPT_RCU, +rcu_preempt_ctrlblk. + +The output of "cat rcu/rcudata" is as follows: + +rcu_preempt: qlen=24 gp=1097669 g197/p197/c197 tasks=... + ttb=. btg=no ntb=184 neb=0 nnb=183 j=01f7 bt=0274 + normal balk: nt=1097669 gt=0 bt=371 b=0 ny=25073378 nos=0 + exp balk: bt=0 nos=0 +rcu_sched: qlen: 0 +rcu_bh: qlen: 0 + +This is split into rcu_preempt, rcu_sched, and rcu_bh sections, with the +rcu_preempt section appearing only in CONFIG_TINY_PREEMPT_RCU builds. +The last three lines of the rcu_preempt section appear only in +CONFIG_RCU_BOOST kernel builds. The fields are as follows: + +o "qlen" is the number of RCU callbacks currently waiting either + for an RCU grace period or waiting to be invoked. This is the + only field present for rcu_sched and rcu_bh, due to the + short-circuiting of grace period in those two cases. + +o "gp" is the number of grace periods that have completed. + +o "g197/p197/c197" displays the grace-period state, with the + "g" number being the number of grace periods that have started + (mod 256), the "p" number being the number of grace periods + that the CPU has responded to (also mod 256), and the "c" + number being the number of grace periods that have completed + (once again mode 256). + + Why have both "gp" and "g"? Because the data flowing into + "gp" is only present in a CONFIG_RCU_TRACE kernel. + +o "tasks" is a set of bits. The first bit is "T" if there are + currently tasks that have recently blocked within an RCU + read-side critical section, the second bit is "N" if any of the + aforementioned tasks are blocking the current RCU grace period, + and the third bit is "E" if any of the aforementioned tasks are + blocking the current expedited grace period. Each bit is "." + if the corresponding condition does not hold. + +o "ttb" is a single bit. It is "B" if any of the blocked tasks + need to be priority boosted and "." otherwise. + +o "btg" indicates whether boosting has been carried out during + the current grace period, with "exp" indicating that boosting + is in progress for an expedited grace period, "no" indicating + that boosting has not yet started for a normal grace period, + "begun" indicating that boosting has bebug for a normal grace + period, and "done" indicating that boosting has completed for + a normal grace period. + +o "ntb" is the total number of tasks subjected to RCU priority boosting + periods since boot. + +o "neb" is the number of expedited grace periods that have had + to resort to RCU priority boosting since boot. + +o "nnb" is the number of normal grace periods that have had + to resort to RCU priority boosting since boot. + +o "j" is the low-order 12 bits of the jiffies counter in hexadecimal. + +o "bt" is the low-order 12 bits of the value that the jiffies counter + will have at the next time that boosting is scheduled to begin. + +o In the line beginning with "normal balk", the fields are as follows: + + o "nt" is the number of times that the system balked from + boosting because there were no blocked tasks to boost. + Note that the system will balk from boosting even if the + grace period is overdue when the currently running task + is looping within an RCU read-side critical section. + There is no point in boosting in this case, because + boosting a running task won't make it run any faster. + + o "gt" is the number of times that the system balked + from boosting because, although there were blocked tasks, + none of them were preventing the current grace period + from completing. + + o "bt" is the number of times that the system balked + from boosting because boosting was already in progress. + + o "b" is the number of times that the system balked from + boosting because boosting had already completed for + the grace period in question. + + o "ny" is the number of times that the system balked from + boosting because it was not yet time to start boosting + the grace period in question. + + o "nos" is the number of times that the system balked from + boosting for inexplicable ("not otherwise specified") + reasons. This can actually happen due to races involving + increments of the jiffies counter. + +o In the line beginning with "exp balk", the fields are as follows: + + o "bt" is the number of times that the system balked from + boosting because there were no blocked tasks to boost. + + o "nos" is the number of times that the system balked from + boosting for inexplicable ("not otherwise specified") + reasons. diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c b/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c index a2976a6de033..e9c77788a39d 100644 --- a/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c +++ b/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c @@ -516,6 +516,7 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) default: fprintf(stderr, "Unknown nla_type %d\n", na->nla_type); + case TASKSTATS_TYPE_NULL: break; } na = (struct nlattr *) (GENLMSG_DATA(&msg) + len); diff --git a/Documentation/arm/00-INDEX b/Documentation/arm/00-INDEX index ecf7d04bca26..91c24a1e8a9e 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/arm/00-INDEX @@ -34,3 +34,5 @@ memory.txt - description of the virtual memory layout nwfpe/ - NWFPE floating point emulator documentation +swp_emulation + - SWP/SWPB emulation handler/logging description diff --git a/Documentation/arm/OMAP/DSS b/Documentation/arm/OMAP/DSS index 0af0e9eed5d6..888ae7b83ae4 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/OMAP/DSS +++ b/Documentation/arm/OMAP/DSS @@ -255,9 +255,10 @@ framebuffer parameters. Kernel boot arguments --------------------- -vram=<size> - - Amount of total VRAM to preallocate. For example, "10M". omapfb - allocates memory for framebuffers from VRAM. +vram=<size>[,<physaddr>] + - Amount of total VRAM to preallocate and optionally a physical start + memory address. For example, "10M". omapfb allocates memory for + framebuffers from VRAM. omapfb.mode=<display>:<mode>[,...] - Default video mode for specified displays. For example, diff --git a/Documentation/arm/OMAP/omap_pm b/Documentation/arm/OMAP/omap_pm index 5389440aade3..9012bb039094 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/OMAP/omap_pm +++ b/Documentation/arm/OMAP/omap_pm @@ -127,3 +127,28 @@ implementation needs: 10. (*pdata->cpu_set_freq)(unsigned long f) 11. (*pdata->cpu_get_freq)(void) + +Customizing OPP for platform +============================ +Defining CONFIG_PM should enable OPP layer for the silicon +and the registration of OPP table should take place automatically. +However, in special cases, the default OPP table may need to be +tweaked, for e.g.: + * enable default OPPs which are disabled by default, but which + could be enabled on a platform + * Disable an unsupported OPP on the platform + * Define and add a custom opp table entry +in these cases, the board file needs to do additional steps as follows: +arch/arm/mach-omapx/board-xyz.c + #include "pm.h" + .... + static void __init omap_xyz_init_irq(void) + { + .... + /* Initialize the default table */ + omapx_opp_init(); + /* Do customization to the defaults */ + .... + } +NOTE: omapx_opp_init will be omap3_opp_init or as required +based on the omap family. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/swp_emulation b/Documentation/arm/swp_emulation new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..af903d22fd93 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/arm/swp_emulation @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +Software emulation of deprecated SWP instruction (CONFIG_SWP_EMULATE) +--------------------------------------------------------------------- + +ARMv6 architecture deprecates use of the SWP/SWPB instructions, and recommeds +moving to the load-locked/store-conditional instructions LDREX and STREX. + +ARMv7 multiprocessing extensions introduce the ability to disable these +instructions, triggering an undefined instruction exception when executed. +Trapped instructions are emulated using an LDREX/STREX or LDREXB/STREXB +sequence. If a memory access fault (an abort) occurs, a segmentation fault is +signalled to the triggering process. + +/proc/cpu/swp_emulation holds some statistics/information, including the PID of +the last process to trigger the emulation to be invocated. For example: +--- +Emulated SWP: 12 +Emulated SWPB: 0 +Aborted SWP{B}: 1 +Last process: 314 +--- + +NOTE: when accessing uncached shared regions, LDREX/STREX rely on an external +transaction monitoring block called a global monitor to maintain update +atomicity. If your system does not implement a global monitor, this option can +cause programs that perform SWP operations to uncached memory to deadlock, as +the STREX operation will always fail. + diff --git a/Documentation/block/switching-sched.txt b/Documentation/block/switching-sched.txt index d5af3f630814..71cfbdc0f74d 100644 --- a/Documentation/block/switching-sched.txt +++ b/Documentation/block/switching-sched.txt @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ you can do so by typing: As of the Linux 2.6.10 kernel, it is now possible to change the IO scheduler for a given block device on the fly (thus making it possible, for instance, to set the CFQ scheduler for the system default, but -set a specific device to use the anticipatory or noop schedulers - which +set a specific device to use the deadline or noop schedulers - which can improve that device's throughput). To set a specific scheduler, simply do this: @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ a "cat /sys/block/DEV/queue/scheduler" - the list of valid names will be displayed, with the currently selected scheduler in brackets: # cat /sys/block/hda/queue/scheduler -noop anticipatory deadline [cfq] -# echo anticipatory > /sys/block/hda/queue/scheduler +noop deadline [cfq] +# echo deadline > /sys/block/hda/queue/scheduler # cat /sys/block/hda/queue/scheduler -noop [anticipatory] deadline cfq +noop [deadline] cfq diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroup_event_listener.c b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroup_event_listener.c index 8c2bfc4a6358..3e082f96dc12 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroup_event_listener.c +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroup_event_listener.c @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ int main(int argc, char **argv) if (ret == -1) { perror("cgroup.event_control " - "is not accessable any more"); + "is not accessible any more"); break; } diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt index 190018b0c649..44b8b7af8019 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt @@ -355,13 +355,13 @@ subsystems, type: To change the set of subsystems bound to a mounted hierarchy, just remount with different options: -# mount -o remount,cpuset,ns hier1 /dev/cgroup +# mount -o remount,cpuset,blkio hier1 /dev/cgroup -Now memory is removed from the hierarchy and ns is added. +Now memory is removed from the hierarchy and blkio is added. -Note this will add ns to the hierarchy but won't remove memory or +Note this will add blkio to the hierarchy but won't remove memory or cpuset, because the new options are appended to the old ones: -# mount -o remount,ns /dev/cgroup +# mount -o remount,blkio /dev/cgroup To Specify a hierarchy's release_agent: # mount -t cgroup -o cpuset,release_agent="/sbin/cpuset_release_agent" \ diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt index b7eececfb195..fc8fa97a09ac 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt @@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ Under below explanation, we assume CONFIG_MEM_RES_CTRL_SWAP=y. written to move_charge_at_immigrate. 9.10 Memory thresholds - Memory controler implements memory thresholds using cgroups notification + Memory controller implements memory thresholds using cgroups notification API. You can use Documentation/cgroups/cgroup_event_listener.c to test it. diff --git a/Documentation/coccinelle.txt b/Documentation/coccinelle.txt index cd2b02837066..96b690348ba1 100644 --- a/Documentation/coccinelle.txt +++ b/Documentation/coccinelle.txt @@ -24,6 +24,9 @@ of many distributions, e.g. : You can get the latest version released from the Coccinelle homepage at http://coccinelle.lip6.fr/ +Information and tips about Coccinelle are also provided on the wiki +pages at http://cocci.ekstranet.diku.dk/wiki/doku.php + Once you have it, run the following command: ./configure @@ -33,6 +36,10 @@ as a regular user, and install it with sudo make install +The semantic patches in the kernel will work best with Coccinelle version +0.2.4 or later. Using earlier versions may incur some parse errors in the +semantic patch code, but any results that are obtained should still be +correct. Using Coccinelle on the Linux kernel ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ @@ -41,20 +48,22 @@ A Coccinelle-specific target is defined in the top level Makefile. This target is named 'coccicheck' and calls the 'coccicheck' front-end in the 'scripts' directory. -Four modes are defined: report, patch, context, and org. The mode to +Four modes are defined: patch, report, context, and org. The mode to use is specified by setting the MODE variable with 'MODE=<mode>'. +'patch' proposes a fix, when possible. + 'report' generates a list in the following format: file:line:column-column: message -'patch' proposes a fix, when possible. - 'context' highlights lines of interest and their context in a diff-like style.Lines of interest are indicated with '-'. 'org' generates a report in the Org mode format of Emacs. -Note that not all semantic patches implement all modes. +Note that not all semantic patches implement all modes. For easy use +of Coccinelle, the default mode is "chain" which tries the previous +modes in the order above until one succeeds. To make a report for every semantic patch, run the following command: @@ -68,9 +77,9 @@ To produce patches, run: The coccicheck target applies every semantic patch available in the -subdirectories of 'scripts/coccinelle' to the entire Linux kernel. +sub-directories of 'scripts/coccinelle' to the entire Linux kernel. -For each semantic patch, a changelog message is proposed. It gives a +For each semantic patch, a commit message is proposed. It gives a description of the problem being checked by the semantic patch, and includes a reference to Coccinelle. @@ -93,12 +102,35 @@ or make coccicheck COCCI=<my_SP.cocci> MODE=report + Using Coccinelle on (modified) files +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +To apply Coccinelle on a file basis, instead of a directory basis, the +following command may be used: + + make C=1 CHECK="scripts/coccicheck" + +To check only newly edited code, use the value 2 for the C flag, i.e. + + make C=2 CHECK="scripts/coccicheck" + +This runs every semantic patch in scripts/coccinelle by default. The +COCCI variable may additionally be used to only apply a single +semantic patch as shown in the previous section. + +The "chain" mode is the default. You can select another one with the +MODE variable explained above. + +In this mode, there is no information about semantic patches +displayed, and no commit message proposed. + + Proposing new semantic patches ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ New semantic patches can be proposed and submitted by kernel developers. For sake of clarity, they should be organized in the -subdirectories of 'scripts/coccinelle/'. +sub-directories of 'scripts/coccinelle/'. Detailed description of the 'report' mode @@ -111,7 +143,7 @@ Example: Running - make coccicheck MODE=report COCCI=scripts/coccinelle/err_cast.cocci + make coccicheck MODE=report COCCI=scripts/coccinelle/api/err_cast.cocci will execute the following part of the SmPL script. @@ -149,7 +181,7 @@ identified. Example: Running - make coccicheck MODE=patch COCCI=scripts/coccinelle/err_cast.cocci + make coccicheck MODE=patch COCCI=scripts/coccinelle/api/err_cast.cocci will execute the following part of the SmPL script. @@ -193,7 +225,7 @@ NOTE: The diff-like output generated is NOT an applicable patch. The Example: Running - make coccicheck MODE=context COCCI=scripts/coccinelle/err_cast.cocci + make coccicheck MODE=context COCCI=scripts/coccinelle/api/err_cast.cocci will execute the following part of the SmPL script. @@ -228,7 +260,7 @@ diff -u -p /home/user/linux/crypto/ctr.c /tmp/nothing Example: Running - make coccicheck MODE=org COCCI=scripts/coccinelle/err_cast.cocci + make coccicheck MODE=org COCCI=scripts/coccinelle/api/err_cast.cocci will execute the following part of the SmPL script. diff --git a/Documentation/development-process/2.Process b/Documentation/development-process/2.Process index 97726eba6102..911a45186340 100644 --- a/Documentation/development-process/2.Process +++ b/Documentation/development-process/2.Process @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ The stages that a patch goes through are, generally: inclusion, it should be accepted by a relevant subsystem maintainer - though this acceptance is not a guarantee that the patch will make it all the way to the mainline. The patch will show up in the maintainer's - subsystem tree and into the staging trees (described below). When the + subsystem tree and into the -next trees (described below). When the process works, this step leads to more extensive review of the patch and the discovery of any problems resulting from the integration of this patch with work being done by others. @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ finding the right maintainer. Sending patches directly to Linus is not normally the right way to go. -2.4: STAGING TREES +2.4: NEXT TREES The chain of subsystem trees guides the flow of patches into the kernel, but it also raises an interesting question: what if somebody wants to look @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ changes land in the mainline kernel. One could pull changes from all of the interesting subsystem trees, but that would be a big and error-prone job. -The answer comes in the form of staging trees, where subsystem trees are +The answer comes in the form of -next trees, where subsystem trees are collected for testing and review. The older of these trees, maintained by Andrew Morton, is called "-mm" (for memory management, which is how it got started). The -mm tree integrates patches from a long list of subsystem @@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ directory at: Use of the MMOTM tree is likely to be a frustrating experience, though; there is a definite chance that it will not even compile. -The other staging tree, started more recently, is linux-next, maintained by +The other -next tree, started more recently, is linux-next, maintained by Stephen Rothwell. The linux-next tree is, by design, a snapshot of what the mainline is expected to look like after the next merge window closes. Linux-next trees are announced on the linux-kernel and linux-next mailing @@ -303,12 +303,25 @@ volatility of linux-next tends to make it a difficult development target. See http://lwn.net/Articles/289013/ for more information on this topic, and stay tuned; much is still in flux where linux-next is involved. -Besides the mmotm and linux-next trees, the kernel source tree now contains -the drivers/staging/ directory and many sub-directories for drivers or -filesystems that are on their way to being added to the kernel tree -proper, but they remain in drivers/staging/ while they still need more -work. - +2.4.1: STAGING TREES + +The kernel source tree now contains the drivers/staging/ directory, where +many sub-directories for drivers or filesystems that are on their way to +being added to the kernel tree live. They remain in drivers/staging while +they still need more work; once complete, they can be moved into the +kernel proper. This is a way to keep track of drivers that aren't +up to Linux kernel coding or quality standards, but people may want to use +them and track development. + +Greg Kroah-Hartman currently (as of 2.6.36) maintains the staging tree. +Drivers that still need work are sent to him, with each driver having +its own subdirectory in drivers/staging/. Along with the driver source +files, a TODO file should be present in the directory as well. The TODO +file lists the pending work that the driver needs for acceptance into +the kernel proper, as well as a list of people that should be Cc'd for any +patches to the driver. Staging drivers that don't currently build should +have their config entries depend upon CONFIG_BROKEN. Once they can +be successfully built without outside patches, CONFIG_BROKEN can be removed. 2.5: TOOLS diff --git a/Documentation/devices.txt b/Documentation/devices.txt index c58abf1ccc71..eccffe715229 100644 --- a/Documentation/devices.txt +++ b/Documentation/devices.txt @@ -1496,9 +1496,6 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated. 64 = /dev/radio0 Radio device ... 127 = /dev/radio63 Radio device - 192 = /dev/vtx0 Teletext device - ... - 223 = /dev/vtx31 Teletext device 224 = /dev/vbi0 Vertical blank interrupt ... 255 = /dev/vbi31 Vertical blank interrupt @@ -2520,6 +2517,12 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated. 8 = /dev/mmcblk1 Second SD/MMC card ... + The start of next SD/MMC card can be configured with + CONFIG_MMC_BLOCK_MINORS, or overridden at boot/modprobe + time using the mmcblk.perdev_minors option. That would + bump the offset between each card to be the configured + value instead of the default 8. + 179 char CCube DVXChip-based PCI products 0 = /dev/dvxirq0 First DVX device 1 = /dev/dvxirq1 Second DVX device diff --git a/Documentation/dontdiff b/Documentation/dontdiff index d9bcffd59433..470d3dba1a69 100644 --- a/Documentation/dontdiff +++ b/Documentation/dontdiff @@ -62,6 +62,10 @@ aic7*reg_print.c* aic7*seq.h* aicasm aicdb.h* +altivec1.c +altivec2.c +altivec4.c +altivec8.c asm-offsets.h asm_offsets.h autoconf.h* @@ -76,6 +80,7 @@ btfixupprep build bvmlinux bzImage* +capflags.c classlist.h* comp*.log compile.h* @@ -94,6 +99,7 @@ devlist.h* docproc elf2ecoff elfconfig.h* +evergreen_reg_safe.h fixdep flask.h fore200e_mkfirm @@ -108,9 +114,16 @@ genksyms *_gray256.c ihex2fw ikconfig.h* +inat-tables.c initramfs_data.cpio initramfs_data.cpio.gz initramfs_list +int16.c +int1.c +int2.c +int32.c +int4.c +int8.c kallsyms kconfig keywords.c @@ -140,6 +153,7 @@ mkprep mktables mktree modpost +modules.builtin modules.order modversions.h* ncscope.* @@ -153,14 +167,23 @@ pca200e.bin pca200e_ecd.bin2 piggy.gz piggyback +piggy.S pnmtologo ppc_defs.h* pss_boot.h qconf +r100_reg_safe.h +r200_reg_safe.h +r300_reg_safe.h +r420_reg_safe.h +r600_reg_safe.h raid6altivec*.c raid6int*.c raid6tables.c relocs +rn50_reg_safe.h +rs600_reg_safe.h +rv515_reg_safe.h series setup setup.bin @@ -169,6 +192,7 @@ sImage sm_tbl* split-include syscalltab.h +tables.c tags tftpboot.img timeconst.h @@ -190,6 +214,7 @@ vmlinux vmlinux-* vmlinux.aout vmlinux.lds +voffset.h vsyscall.lds vsyscall_32.lds wanxlfw.inc @@ -200,3 +225,4 @@ wakeup.elf wakeup.lds zImage* zconf.hash.c +zoffset.h diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/interface.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/interface.txt deleted file mode 100644 index c66912bfe866..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/driver-model/interface.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,129 +0,0 @@ - -Device Interfaces - -Introduction -~~~~~~~~~~~~ - -Device interfaces are the logical interfaces of device classes that correlate -directly to userspace interfaces, like device nodes. - -Each device class may have multiple interfaces through which you can -access the same device. An input device may support the mouse interface, -the 'evdev' interface, and the touchscreen interface. A SCSI disk would -support the disk interface, the SCSI generic interface, and possibly a raw -device interface. - -Device interfaces are registered with the class they belong to. As devices -are added to the class, they are added to each interface registered with -the class. The interface is responsible for determining whether the device -supports the interface or not. - - -Programming Interface -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ - -struct device_interface { - char * name; - rwlock_t lock; - u32 devnum; - struct device_class * devclass; - - struct list_head node; - struct driver_dir_entry dir; - - int (*add_device)(struct device *); - int (*add_device)(struct intf_data *); -}; - -int interface_register(struct device_interface *); -void interface_unregister(struct device_interface *); - - -An interface must specify the device class it belongs to. It is added -to that class's list of interfaces on registration. - - -Interfaces can be added to a device class at any time. Whenever it is -added, each device in the class is passed to the interface's -add_device callback. When an interface is removed, each device is -removed from the interface. - - -Devices -~~~~~~~ -Once a device is added to a device class, it is added to each -interface that is registered with the device class. The class -is expected to place a class-specific data structure in -struct device::class_data. The interface can use that (along with -other fields of struct device) to determine whether or not the driver -and/or device support that particular interface. - - -Data -~~~~ - -struct intf_data { - struct list_head node; - struct device_interface * intf; - struct device * dev; - u32 intf_num; -}; - -int interface_add_data(struct interface_data *); - -The interface is responsible for allocating and initializing a struct -intf_data and calling interface_add_data() to add it to the device's list -of interfaces it belongs to. This list will be iterated over when the device -is removed from the class (instead of all possible interfaces for a class). -This structure should probably be embedded in whatever per-device data -structure the interface is allocating anyway. - -Devices are enumerated within the interface. This happens in interface_add_data() -and the enumerated value is stored in the struct intf_data for that device. - -sysfs -~~~~~ -Each interface is given a directory in the directory of the device -class it belongs to: - -Interfaces get a directory in the class's directory as well: - - class/ - `-- input - |-- devices - |-- drivers - |-- mouse - `-- evdev - -When a device is added to the interface, a symlink is created that points -to the device's directory in the physical hierarchy: - - class/ - `-- input - |-- devices - | `-- 1 -> ../../../root/pci0/00:1f.0/usb_bus/00:1f.2-1:0/ - |-- drivers - | `-- usb:usb_mouse -> ../../../bus/drivers/usb_mouse/ - |-- mouse - | `-- 1 -> ../../../root/pci0/00:1f.0/usb_bus/00:1f.2-1:0/ - `-- evdev - `-- 1 -> ../../../root/pci0/00:1f.0/usb_bus/00:1f.2-1:0/ - - -Future Plans -~~~~~~~~~~~~ -A device interface is correlated directly with a userspace interface -for a device, specifically a device node. For instance, a SCSI disk -exposes at least two interfaces to userspace: the standard SCSI disk -interface and the SCSI generic interface. It might also export a raw -device interface. - -Many interfaces have a major number associated with them and each -device gets a minor number. Or, multiple interfaces might share one -major number, and each will receive a range of minor numbers (like in -the case of input devices). - -These major and minor numbers could be stored in the interface -structure. Major and minor allocations could happen when the interface -is registered with the class, or via a helper function. - diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware b/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware index 350959f4e41b..59690de8ebfe 100644 --- a/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware +++ b/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware @@ -26,7 +26,8 @@ use IO::Handle; "dec3000s", "vp7041", "dibusb", "nxt2002", "nxt2004", "or51211", "or51132_qam", "or51132_vsb", "bluebird", "opera1", "cx231xx", "cx18", "cx23885", "pvrusb2", "mpc718", - "af9015", "ngene", "az6027"); + "af9015", "ngene", "az6027", "lme2510_lg", "lme2510c_s7395", + "lme2510c_s7395_old"); # Check args syntax() if (scalar(@ARGV) != 1); @@ -584,6 +585,49 @@ sub az6027{ $firmware; } + +sub lme2510_lg { + my $sourcefile = "LMEBDA_DVBS.sys"; + my $hash = "fc6017ad01e79890a97ec53bea157ed2"; + my $outfile = "dvb-usb-lme2510-lg.fw"; + my $hasho = "caa065d5fdbd2c09ad57b399bbf55cad"; + + checkstandard(); + + verify($sourcefile, $hash); + extract($sourcefile, 4168, 3841, $outfile); + verify($outfile, $hasho); + $outfile; +} + +sub lme2510c_s7395 { + my $sourcefile = "US2A0D.sys"; + my $hash = "b0155a8083fb822a3bd47bc360e74601"; + my $outfile = "dvb-usb-lme2510c-s7395.fw"; + my $hasho = "3a3cf1aeebd17b6ddc04cebe131e94cf"; + + checkstandard(); + + verify($sourcefile, $hash); + extract($sourcefile, 37248, 3720, $outfile); + verify($outfile, $hasho); + $outfile; +} + +sub lme2510c_s7395_old { + my $sourcefile = "LMEBDA_DVBS7395C.sys"; + my $hash = "7572ae0eb9cdf91baabd7c0ba9e09b31"; + my $outfile = "dvb-usb-lme2510c-s7395.fw"; + my $hasho = "90430c5b435eb5c6f88fd44a9d950674"; + + checkstandard(); + + verify($sourcefile, $hash); + extract($sourcefile, 4208, 3881, $outfile); + verify($outfile, $hasho); + $outfile; +} + # --------------------------------------------------------------- # Utilities diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/lmedm04.txt b/Documentation/dvb/lmedm04.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..641886504201 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/dvb/lmedm04.txt @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +To extract firmware for the DM04/QQBOX you need to copy the +following file(s) to this directory. + +for DM04+/QQBOX LME2510C (Sharp 7395 Tuner) +------------------------------------------- + +The Sharp 7395 driver can be found in windows/system32/driver + +US2A0D.sys (dated 17 Mar 2009) + + +and run +./get_dvb_firmware lme2510c_s7395 + + will produce + dvb-usb-lme2510c-s7395.fw + +An alternative but older firmware can be found on the driver +disk DVB-S_EN_3.5A in BDADriver/driver + +LMEBDA_DVBS7395C.sys (dated 18 Jan 2008) + +and run +./get_dvb_firmware lme2510c_s7395_old + + will produce + dvb-usb-lme2510c-s7395.fw + +-------------------------------------------------------------------- + +The LG firmware can be found on the driver +disk DM04+_5.1A[LG] in BDADriver/driver + +for DM04 LME2510 (LG Tuner) +--------------------------- + +LMEBDA_DVBS.sys (dated 13 Nov 2007) + +and run +./get_dvb_firmware lme2510_lg + + will produce + dvb-usb-lme2510-lg.fw + + +Other LG firmware can be extracted manually from US280D.sys +only found in windows/system32/driver. + +dd if=US280D.sys ibs=1 skip=42360 count=3924 of=dvb-usb-lme2510-lg.fw + +for DM04 LME2510C (LG Tuner) +--------------------------- + +dd if=US280D.sys ibs=1 skip=35200 count=3850 of=dvb-usb-lme2510c-lg.fw + +--------------------------------------------------------------------- + +Copy the firmware file(s) to /lib/firmware diff --git a/Documentation/edac.txt b/Documentation/edac.txt index 0b875e8da969..9ee774de57cd 100644 --- a/Documentation/edac.txt +++ b/Documentation/edac.txt @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ csrow3. The representation of the above is reflected in the directory tree in EDAC's sysfs interface. Starting in directory /sys/devices/system/edac/mc each memory controller will be represented -by its own 'mcX' directory, where 'X" is the index of the MC. +by its own 'mcX' directory, where 'X' is the index of the MC. ..../edac/mc/ @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ by its own 'mcX' directory, where 'X" is the index of the MC. .... Under each 'mcX' directory each 'csrowX' is again represented by a -'csrowX', where 'X" is the csrow index: +'csrowX', where 'X' is the csrow index: .../mc/mc0/ @@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ EDAC control and attribute files. In 'mcX' directories are EDAC control and attribute files for -this 'X" instance of the memory controllers: +this 'X' instance of the memory controllers: Counter reset control file: @@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ Sdram memory scrubbing rate: 'csrowX' DIRECTORIES In the 'csrowX' directories are EDAC control and attribute files for -this 'X" instance of csrow: +this 'X' instance of csrow: Total Uncorrectable Errors count attribute file: diff --git a/Documentation/email-clients.txt b/Documentation/email-clients.txt index 945ff3fda433..a0b58e29f911 100644 --- a/Documentation/email-clients.txt +++ b/Documentation/email-clients.txt @@ -104,6 +104,13 @@ Then from the "Message" menu item, select insert file and choose your patch. As an added bonus you can customise the message creation toolbar menu and put the "insert file" icon there. +Make the the composer window wide enough so that no lines wrap. As of +KMail 1.13.5 (KDE 4.5.4), KMail will apply word wrapping when sending +the email if the lines wrap in the composer window. Having word wrapping +disabled in the Options menu isn't enough. Thus, if your patch has very +long lines, you must make the composer window very wide before sending +the email. See: https://bugs.kde.org/show_bug.cgi?id=174034 + You can safely GPG sign attachments, but inlined text is preferred for patches so do not GPG sign them. Signing patches that have been inserted as inlined text will make them tricky to extract from their 7-bit encoding. @@ -179,26 +186,8 @@ Sylpheed (GUI) ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Thunderbird (GUI) -By default, thunderbird likes to mangle text, but there are ways to -coerce it into being nice. - -- Under account settings, composition and addressing, uncheck "Compose - messages in HTML format". - -- Edit your Thunderbird config settings to tell it not to wrap lines: - user_pref("mailnews.wraplength", 0); - -- Edit your Thunderbird config settings so that it won't use format=flowed: - user_pref("mailnews.send_plaintext_flowed", false); - -- You need to get Thunderbird into preformat mode: -. If you compose HTML messages by default, it's not too hard. Just select - "Preformat" from the drop-down box just under the subject line. -. If you compose in text by default, you have to tell it to compose a new - message in HTML (just as a one-off), and then force it from there back to - text, else it will wrap lines. To do this, use shift-click on the Write - icon to compose to get HTML compose mode, then select "Preformat" from - the drop-down box just under the subject line. +Thunderbird is an Outlook clone that likes to mangle text, but there are ways +to coerce it into behaving. - Allows use of an external editor: The easiest thing to do with Thunderbird and patches is to use an @@ -208,6 +197,27 @@ coerce it into being nice. View->Toolbars->Customize... and finally just click on it when in the Compose dialog. +To beat some sense out of the internal editor, do this: + +- Under account settings, composition and addressing, uncheck "Compose + messages in HTML format". + +- Edit your Thunderbird config settings so that it won't use format=flowed. + Go to "edit->preferences->advanced->config editor" to bring up the + thunderbird's registry editor, and set "mailnews.send_plaintext_flowed" to + "false". + +- Enable "preformat" mode: Shft-click on the Write icon to bring up the HTML + composer, select "Preformat" from the drop-down box just under the subject + line, then close the message without saving. (This setting also applies to + the text composer, but the only control for it is in the HTML composer.) + +- Install the "toggle wordwrap" extension. Download the file from: + https://addons.mozilla.org/thunderbird/addon/2351/ + Then go to "tools->add ons", select "install" at the bottom of the screen, + and browse to where you saved the .xul file. This adds an "Enable + Wordwrap" entry under the Options menu of the message composer. + ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ TkRat (GUI) diff --git a/Documentation/fb/00-INDEX b/Documentation/fb/00-INDEX index a618fd99c9f0..30a70542e823 100644 --- a/Documentation/fb/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/fb/00-INDEX @@ -4,33 +4,41 @@ please mail me. Geert Uytterhoeven <geert@linux-m68k.org> 00-INDEX - - this file + - this file. arkfb.txt - info on the fbdev driver for ARK Logic chips. aty128fb.txt - info on the ATI Rage128 frame buffer driver. cirrusfb.txt - info on the driver for Cirrus Logic chipsets. +cmap_xfbdev.txt + - an introduction to fbdev's cmap structures. deferred_io.txt - an introduction to deferred IO. +efifb.txt + - info on the EFI platform driver for Intel based Apple computers. +ep93xx-fb.txt + - info on the driver for EP93xx LCD controller. fbcon.txt - intro to and usage guide for the framebuffer console (fbcon). framebuffer.txt - introduction to frame buffer devices. -imacfb.txt - - info on the generic EFI platform driver for Intel based Macs. +gxfb.txt + - info on the framebuffer driver for AMD Geode GX2 based processors. intel810.txt - documentation for the Intel 810/815 framebuffer driver. intelfb.txt - docs for Intel 830M/845G/852GM/855GM/865G/915G/945G fb driver. internals.txt - quick overview of frame buffer device internals. +lxfb.txt + - info on the framebuffer driver for AMD Geode LX based processors. matroxfb.txt - info on the Matrox framebuffer driver for Alpha, Intel and PPC. +metronomefb.txt + - info on the driver for the Metronome display controller. modedb.txt - info on the video mode database. -matroxfb.txt - - info on the Matrox frame buffer driver. pvr2fb.txt - info on the PowerVR 2 frame buffer driver. pxafb.txt @@ -39,13 +47,23 @@ s3fb.txt - info on the fbdev driver for S3 Trio/Virge chips. sa1100fb.txt - information about the driver for the SA-1100 LCD controller. +sh7760fb.txt + - info on the SH7760/SH7763 integrated LCDC Framebuffer driver. sisfb.txt - info on the framebuffer device driver for various SiS chips. sstfb.txt - info on the frame buffer driver for 3dfx' Voodoo Graphics boards. tgafb.txt - - info on the TGA (DECChip 21030) frame buffer driver + - info on the TGA (DECChip 21030) frame buffer driver. +tridentfb.txt + info on the framebuffer driver for some Trident chip based cards. +uvesafb.txt + - info on the userspace VESA (VBE2+ compliant) frame buffer device. vesafb.txt - - info on the VESA frame buffer device + - info on the VESA frame buffer device. +viafb.modes + - list of modes for VIA Integration Graphic Chip. +viafb.txt + - info on the VIA Integration Graphic Chip console framebuffer driver. vt8623fb.txt - info on the fb driver for the graphics core in VIA VT8623 chipsets. diff --git a/Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt b/Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7fdde2a02a27 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt @@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ + +What is udlfb? +=============== + +This is a driver for DisplayLink USB 2.0 era graphics chips. + +DisplayLink chips provide simple hline/blit operations with some compression, +pairing that with a hardware framebuffer (16MB) on the other end of the +USB wire. That hardware framebuffer is able to drive the VGA, DVI, or HDMI +monitor with no CPU involvement until a pixel has to change. + +The CPU or other local resource does all the rendering; optinally compares the +result with a local shadow of the remote hardware framebuffer to identify +the minimal set of pixels that have changed; and compresses and sends those +pixels line-by-line via USB bulk transfers. + +Because of the efficiency of bulk transfers and a protocol on top that +does not require any acks - the effect is very low latency that +can support surprisingly high resolutions with good performance for +non-gaming and non-video applications. + +Mode setting, EDID read, etc are other bulk or control transfers. Mode +setting is very flexible - able to set nearly arbitrary modes from any timing. + +Advantages of USB graphics in general: + + * Ability to add a nearly arbitrary number of displays to any USB 2.0 + capable system. On Linux, number of displays is limited by fbdev interface + (FB_MAX is currently 32). Of course, all USB devices on the same + host controller share the same 480Mbs USB 2.0 interface. + +Advantages of supporting DisplayLink chips with kernel framebuffer interface: + + * The actual hardware functionality of DisplayLink chips matches nearly + one-to-one with the fbdev interface, making the driver quite small and + tight relative to the functionality it provides. + * X servers and other applications can use the standard fbdev interface + from user mode to talk to the device, without needing to know anything + about USB or DisplayLink's protocol at all. A "displaylink" X driver + and a slightly modified "fbdev" X driver are among those that already do. + +Disadvantages: + + * Fbdev's mmap interface assumes a real hardware framebuffer is mapped. + In the case of USB graphics, it is just an allocated (virtual) buffer. + Writes need to be detected and encoded into USB bulk transfers by the CPU. + Accurate damage/changed area notifications work around this problem. + In the future, hopefully fbdev will be enhanced with an small standard + interface to allow mmap clients to report damage, for the benefit + of virtual or remote framebuffers. + * Fbdev does not arbitrate client ownership of the framebuffer well. + * Fbcon assumes the first framebuffer it finds should be consumed for console. + * It's not clear what the future of fbdev is, given the rise of KMS/DRM. + +How to use it? +============== + +Udlfb, when loaded as a module, will match against all USB 2.0 generation +DisplayLink chips (Alex and Ollie family). It will then attempt to read the EDID +of the monitor, and set the best common mode between the DisplayLink device +and the monitor's capabilities. + +If the DisplayLink device is successful, it will paint a "green screen" which +means that from a hardware and fbdev software perspective, everything is good. + +At that point, a /dev/fb? interface will be present for user-mode applications +to open and begin writing to the framebuffer of the DisplayLink device using +standard fbdev calls. Note that if mmap() is used, by default the user mode +application must send down damage notifcations to trigger repaints of the +changed regions. Alternatively, udlfb can be recompiled with experimental +defio support enabled, to support a page-fault based detection mechanism +that can work without explicit notifcation. + +The most common client of udlfb is xf86-video-displaylink or a modified +xf86-video-fbdev X server. These servers have no real DisplayLink specific +code. They write to the standard framebuffer interface and rely on udlfb +to do its thing. The one extra feature they have is the ability to report +rectangles from the X DAMAGE protocol extension down to udlfb via udlfb's +damage interface (which will hopefully be standardized for all virtual +framebuffers that need damage info). These damage notifications allow +udlfb to efficiently process the changed pixels. + +Module Options +============== + +Special configuration for udlfb is usually unnecessary. There are a few +options, however. + +From the command line, pass options to modprobe +modprobe udlfb defio=1 console=1 + +Or for permanent option, create file like /etc/modprobe.d/options with text +options udlfb defio=1 console=1 + +Accepted options: + +fb_defio Make use of the fb_defio (CONFIG_FB_DEFERRED_IO) kernel + module to track changed areas of the framebuffer by page faults. + Standard fbdev applications that use mmap but that do not + report damage, may be able to work with this enabled. + Disabled by default because of overhead and other issues. + +console Allow fbcon to attach to udlfb provided framebuffers. This + is disabled by default because fbcon will aggressively consume + the first framebuffer it finds, which isn't usually what the + user wants in the case of USB displays. + +Sysfs Attributes +================ + +Udlfb creates several files in /sys/class/graphics/fb? +Where ? is the sequential framebuffer id of the particular DisplayLink device + +edid If a valid EDID blob is written to this file (typically + by a udev rule), then udlfb will use this EDID as a + backup in case reading the actual EDID of the monitor + attached to the DisplayLink device fails. This is + especially useful for fixed panels, etc. that cannot + communicate their capabilities via EDID. Reading + this file returns the current EDID of the attached + monitor (or last backup value written). This is + useful to get the EDID of the attached monitor, + which can be passed to utilities like parse-edid. + +metrics_bytes_rendered 32-bit count of pixel bytes rendered + +metrics_bytes_identical 32-bit count of how many of those bytes were found to be + unchanged, based on a shadow framebuffer check + +metrics_bytes_sent 32-bit count of how many bytes were transferred over + USB to communicate the resulting changed pixels to the + hardware. Includes compression and protocol overhead + +metrics_cpu_kcycles_used 32-bit count of CPU cycles used in processing the + above pixels (in thousands of cycles). + +metrics_reset Write-only. Any write to this file resets all metrics + above to zero. Note that the 32-bit counters above + roll over very quickly. To get reliable results, design + performance tests to start and finish in a very short + period of time (one minute or less is safe). + +-- +Bernie Thompson <bernie@plugable.com> diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index f3da8c0a3af2..6cbbd20534cf 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt @@ -97,21 +97,38 @@ Who: Pavel Machek <pavel@ucw.cz> --------------------------- -What: Video4Linux API 1 ioctls and from Video devices. -When: July 2009 -Files: include/linux/videodev.h -Check: include/linux/videodev.h -Why: V4L1 AP1 was replaced by V4L2 API during migration from 2.4 to 2.6 - series. The old API have lots of drawbacks and don't provide enough - means to work with all video and audio standards. The newer API is - already available on the main drivers and should be used instead. - Newer drivers should use v4l_compat_translate_ioctl function to handle - old calls, replacing to newer ones. - Decoder iocts are using internally to allow video drivers to - communicate with video decoders. This should also be improved to allow - V4L2 calls being translated into compatible internal ioctls. - Compatibility ioctls will be provided, for a while, via - v4l1-compat module. +What: Video4Linux obsolete drivers using V4L1 API +When: kernel 2.6.39 +Files: drivers/staging/se401/* drivers/staging/usbvideo/* +Check: drivers/staging/se401/se401.c drivers/staging/usbvideo/usbvideo.c +Why: There are some drivers still using V4L1 API, despite all efforts we've done + to migrate. Those drivers are for obsolete hardware that the old maintainer + didn't care (or not have the hardware anymore), and that no other developer + could find any hardware to buy. They probably have no practical usage today, + and people with such old hardware could probably keep using an older version + of the kernel. Those drivers will be moved to staging on 2.6.38 and, if nobody + cares enough to port and test them with V4L2 API, they'll be removed on 2.6.39. +Who: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org> + +--------------------------- + +What: Video4Linux: Remove obsolete ioctl's +When: kernel 2.6.39 +Files: include/media/videodev2.h +Why: Some ioctl's were defined wrong on 2.6.2 and 2.6.6, using the wrong + type of R/W arguments. They were fixed, but the old ioctl names are + still there, maintained to avoid breaking binary compatibility: + #define VIDIOC_OVERLAY_OLD _IOWR('V', 14, int) + #define VIDIOC_S_PARM_OLD _IOW('V', 22, struct v4l2_streamparm) + #define VIDIOC_S_CTRL_OLD _IOW('V', 28, struct v4l2_control) + #define VIDIOC_G_AUDIO_OLD _IOWR('V', 33, struct v4l2_audio) + #define VIDIOC_G_AUDOUT_OLD _IOWR('V', 49, struct v4l2_audioout) + #define VIDIOC_CROPCAP_OLD _IOR('V', 58, struct v4l2_cropcap) + There's no sense on preserving those forever, as it is very doubtful + that someone would try to use a such old binary with a modern kernel. + Removing them will allow us to remove some magic done at the V4L ioctl + handler. + Who: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org> --------------------------- @@ -176,6 +193,20 @@ Why: /proc/<pid>/oom_adj allows userspace to influence the oom killer's --------------------------- +What: CS5535/CS5536 obsolete GPIO driver +When: June 2011 +Files: drivers/staging/cs5535_gpio/* +Check: drivers/staging/cs5535_gpio/cs5535_gpio.c +Why: A newer driver replaces this; it is drivers/gpio/cs5535-gpio.c, and + integrates with the Linux GPIO subsystem. The old driver has been + moved to staging, and will be removed altogether around 2.6.40. + Please test the new driver, and ensure that the functionality you + need and any bugfixes from the old driver are available in the new + one. +Who: Andres Salomon <dilinger@queued.net> + +-------------------------- + What: remove EXPORT_SYMBOL(kernel_thread) When: August 2006 Files: arch/*/kernel/*_ksyms.c @@ -470,29 +501,6 @@ When: April 2011 Why: Superseded by xt_CT Who: Netfilter developer team <netfilter-devel@vger.kernel.org> ---------------------------- - -What: video4linux /dev/vtx teletext API support -When: 2.6.35 -Files: drivers/media/video/saa5246a.c drivers/media/video/saa5249.c - include/linux/videotext.h -Why: The vtx device nodes have been superseded by vbi device nodes - for many years. No applications exist that use the vtx support. - Of the two i2c drivers that actually support this API the saa5249 - has been impossible to use for a year now and no known hardware - that supports this device exists. The saa5246a is theoretically - supported by the old mxb boards, but it never actually worked. - - In summary: there is no hardware that can use this API and there - are no applications actually implementing this API. - - The vtx support still reserves minors 192-223 and we would really - like to reuse those for upcoming new functionality. In the unlikely - event that new hardware appears that wants to use the functionality - provided by the vtx API, then that functionality should be build - around the sliced VBI API instead. -Who: Hans Verkuil <hverkuil@xs4all.nl> - ---------------------------- What: IRQF_DISABLED @@ -562,3 +570,33 @@ Why: This is a legacy interface which have been replaced by a more Who: NeilBrown <neilb@suse.de> ---------------------------- + +What: i2c_adapter.id +When: June 2011 +Why: This field is deprecated. I2C device drivers shouldn't change their + behavior based on the underlying I2C adapter. Instead, the I2C + adapter driver should instantiate the I2C devices and provide the + needed platform-specific information. +Who: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> + +---------------------------- + +What: cancel_rearming_delayed_work[queue]() +When: 2.6.39 + +Why: The functions have been superceded by cancel_delayed_work_sync() + quite some time ago. The conversion is trivial and there is no + in-kernel user left. +Who: Tejun Heo <tj@kernel.org> + +---------------------------- + +What: Legacy, non-standard chassis intrusion detection interface. +When: June 2011 +Why: The adm9240, w83792d and w83793 hardware monitoring drivers have + legacy interfaces for chassis intrusion detection. A standard + interface has been added to each driver, so the legacy interface + can be removed. +Who: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> + +---------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/00-INDEX b/Documentation/filesystems/00-INDEX index 4303614b5add..8c624a18f67d 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/00-INDEX @@ -96,8 +96,6 @@ seq_file.txt - how to use the seq_file API sharedsubtree.txt - a description of shared subtrees for namespaces. -smbfs.txt - - info on using filesystems with the SMB protocol (Win 3.11 and NT). spufs.txt - info and mount options for the SPU filesystem used on Cell. sysfs-pci.txt diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt index f9765e8cf086..b22abba78fed 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ OPTIONS This can be used to share devices/named pipes/sockets between hosts. This functionality will be expanded in later versions. - access there are three access modes. + access there are four access modes. user = if a user tries to access a file on v9fs filesystem for the first time, v9fs sends an attach command (Tattach) for that user. @@ -120,6 +120,8 @@ OPTIONS the files on the mounted filesystem any = v9fs does single attach and performs all operations as one user + client = ACL based access check on the 9p client + side for access validation cachetag cache tag to use the specified persistent cache. cache tags for existing cache sessions can be listed at diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking index 8a817f656f0a..977d8919cc69 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking @@ -9,23 +9,25 @@ be able to use diff(1). --------------------------- dentry_operations -------------------------- prototypes: - int (*d_revalidate)(struct dentry *, int); - int (*d_hash) (struct dentry *, struct qstr *); - int (*d_compare) (struct dentry *, struct qstr *, struct qstr *); + int (*d_revalidate)(struct dentry *, struct nameidata *); + int (*d_hash)(const struct dentry *, const struct inode *, + struct qstr *); + int (*d_compare)(const struct dentry *, const struct inode *, + const struct dentry *, const struct inode *, + unsigned int, const char *, const struct qstr *); int (*d_delete)(struct dentry *); void (*d_release)(struct dentry *); void (*d_iput)(struct dentry *, struct inode *); char *(*d_dname)((struct dentry *dentry, char *buffer, int buflen); locking rules: - none have BKL - dcache_lock rename_lock ->d_lock may block -d_revalidate: no no no yes -d_hash no no no yes -d_compare: no yes no no -d_delete: yes no yes no -d_release: no no no yes -d_iput: no no no yes + rename_lock ->d_lock may block rcu-walk +d_revalidate: no no yes (ref-walk) maybe +d_hash no no no maybe +d_compare: yes no no maybe +d_delete: no yes no no +d_release: no no yes no +d_iput: no no yes no d_dname: no no no no --------------------------- inode_operations --------------------------- @@ -42,18 +44,23 @@ ata *); int (*rename) (struct inode *, struct dentry *, struct inode *, struct dentry *); int (*readlink) (struct dentry *, char __user *,int); - int (*follow_link) (struct dentry *, struct nameidata *); + void * (*follow_link) (struct dentry *, struct nameidata *); + void (*put_link) (struct dentry *, struct nameidata *, void *); void (*truncate) (struct inode *); - int (*permission) (struct inode *, int, struct nameidata *); + int (*permission) (struct inode *, int, unsigned int); + int (*check_acl)(struct inode *, int, unsigned int); int (*setattr) (struct dentry *, struct iattr *); int (*getattr) (struct vfsmount *, struct dentry *, struct kstat *); int (*setxattr) (struct dentry *, const char *,const void *,size_t,int); ssize_t (*getxattr) (struct dentry *, const char *, void *, size_t); ssize_t (*listxattr) (struct dentry *, char *, size_t); int (*removexattr) (struct dentry *, const char *); + void (*truncate_range)(struct inode *, loff_t, loff_t); + long (*fallocate)(struct inode *inode, int mode, loff_t offset, loff_t len); + int (*fiemap)(struct inode *, struct fiemap_extent_info *, u64 start, u64 len); locking rules: - all may block, none have BKL + all may block i_mutex(inode) lookup: yes create: yes @@ -66,19 +73,24 @@ rmdir: yes (both) (see below) rename: yes (all) (see below) readlink: no follow_link: no +put_link: no truncate: yes (see below) setattr: yes -permission: no +permission: no (may not block if called in rcu-walk mode) +check_acl: no getattr: no setxattr: yes getxattr: no listxattr: no removexattr: yes +truncate_range: yes +fallocate: no +fiemap: no Additionally, ->rmdir(), ->unlink() and ->rename() have ->i_mutex on victim. cross-directory ->rename() has (per-superblock) ->s_vfs_rename_sem. ->truncate() is never called directly - it's a callback, not a -method. It's called by vmtruncate() - library function normally used by +method. It's called by vmtruncate() - deprecated library function used by ->setattr(). Locking information above applies to that call (i.e. is inherited from ->setattr() - vmtruncate() is used when ATTR_SIZE had been passed). @@ -91,7 +103,7 @@ prototypes: struct inode *(*alloc_inode)(struct super_block *sb); void (*destroy_inode)(struct inode *); void (*dirty_inode) (struct inode *); - int (*write_inode) (struct inode *, int); + int (*write_inode) (struct inode *, struct writeback_control *wbc); int (*drop_inode) (struct inode *); void (*evict_inode) (struct inode *); void (*put_super) (struct super_block *); @@ -105,10 +117,10 @@ prototypes: int (*show_options)(struct seq_file *, struct vfsmount *); ssize_t (*quota_read)(struct super_block *, int, char *, size_t, loff_t); ssize_t (*quota_write)(struct super_block *, int, const char *, size_t, loff_t); + int (*bdev_try_to_free_page)(struct super_block*, struct page*, gfp_t); locking rules: All may block [not true, see below] - None have BKL s_umount alloc_inode: destroy_inode: @@ -127,6 +139,7 @@ umount_begin: no show_options: no (namespace_sem) quota_read: no (see below) quota_write: no (see below) +bdev_try_to_free_page: no (see below) ->statfs() has s_umount (shared) when called by ustat(2) (native or compat), but that's an accident of bad API; s_umount is used to pin @@ -139,19 +152,25 @@ be the only ones operating on the quota file by the quota code (via dqio_sem) (unless an admin really wants to screw up something and writes to quota files with quotas on). For other details about locking see also dquot_operations section. +->bdev_try_to_free_page is called from the ->releasepage handler of +the block device inode. See there for more details. --------------------------- file_system_type --------------------------- prototypes: int (*get_sb) (struct file_system_type *, int, const char *, void *, struct vfsmount *); + struct dentry *(*mount) (struct file_system_type *, int, + const char *, void *); void (*kill_sb) (struct super_block *); locking rules: - may block BKL -get_sb yes no -kill_sb yes no + may block +get_sb yes +mount yes +kill_sb yes ->get_sb() returns error or 0 with locked superblock attached to the vfsmount (exclusive on ->s_umount). +->mount() returns ERR_PTR or the root dentry. ->kill_sb() takes a write-locked superblock, does all shutdown work on it, unlocks and drops the reference. @@ -173,28 +192,38 @@ prototypes: sector_t (*bmap)(struct address_space *, sector_t); int (*invalidatepage) (struct page *, unsigned long); int (*releasepage) (struct page *, int); + void (*freepage)(struct page *); int (*direct_IO)(int, struct kiocb *, const struct iovec *iov, loff_t offset, unsigned long nr_segs); - int (*launder_page) (struct page *); + int (*get_xip_mem)(struct address_space *, pgoff_t, int, void **, + unsigned long *); + int (*migratepage)(struct address_space *, struct page *, struct page *); + int (*launder_page)(struct page *); + int (*is_partially_uptodate)(struct page *, read_descriptor_t *, unsigned long); + int (*error_remove_page)(struct address_space *, struct page *); locking rules: - All except set_page_dirty may block - - BKL PageLocked(page) i_mutex -writepage: no yes, unlocks (see below) -readpage: no yes, unlocks -sync_page: no maybe -writepages: no -set_page_dirty no no -readpages: no -write_begin: no locks the page yes -write_end: no yes, unlocks yes -perform_write: no n/a yes -bmap: no -invalidatepage: no yes -releasepage: no yes -direct_IO: no -launder_page: no yes + All except set_page_dirty and freepage may block + + PageLocked(page) i_mutex +writepage: yes, unlocks (see below) +readpage: yes, unlocks +sync_page: maybe +writepages: +set_page_dirty no +readpages: +write_begin: locks the page yes +write_end: yes, unlocks yes +bmap: +invalidatepage: yes +releasepage: yes +freepage: yes +direct_IO: +get_xip_mem: maybe +migratepage: yes (both) +launder_page: yes +is_partially_uptodate: yes +error_remove_page: yes ->write_begin(), ->write_end(), ->sync_page() and ->readpage() may be called from the request handler (/dev/loop). @@ -274,9 +303,8 @@ under spinlock (it cannot block) and is sometimes called with the page not locked. ->bmap() is currently used by legacy ioctl() (FIBMAP) provided by some -filesystems and by the swapper. The latter will eventually go away. All -instances do not actually need the BKL. Please, keep it that way and don't -breed new callers. +filesystems and by the swapper. The latter will eventually go away. Please, +keep it that way and don't breed new callers. ->invalidatepage() is called when the filesystem must attempt to drop some or all of the buffers from the page when it is being truncated. It @@ -288,55 +316,46 @@ buffers from the page in preparation for freeing it. It returns zero to indicate that the buffers are (or may be) freeable. If ->releasepage is zero, the kernel assumes that the fs has no private interest in the buffers. + ->freepage() is called when the kernel is done dropping the page +from the page cache. + ->launder_page() may be called prior to releasing a page if it is still found to be dirty. It returns zero if the page was successfully cleaned, or an error value if not. Note that in order to prevent the page getting mapped back in and redirtied, it needs to be kept locked across the entire operation. - Note: currently almost all instances of address_space methods are -using BKL for internal serialization and that's one of the worst sources -of contention. Normally they are calling library functions (in fs/buffer.c) -and pass foo_get_block() as a callback (on local block-based filesystems, -indeed). BKL is not needed for library stuff and is usually taken by -foo_get_block(). It's an overkill, since block bitmaps can be protected by -internal fs locking and real critical areas are much smaller than the areas -filesystems protect now. - ----------------------- file_lock_operations ------------------------------ prototypes: - void (*fl_insert)(struct file_lock *); /* lock insertion callback */ - void (*fl_remove)(struct file_lock *); /* lock removal callback */ void (*fl_copy_lock)(struct file_lock *, struct file_lock *); void (*fl_release_private)(struct file_lock *); locking rules: - BKL may block -fl_insert: yes no -fl_remove: yes no -fl_copy_lock: yes no -fl_release_private: yes yes + file_lock_lock may block +fl_copy_lock: yes no +fl_release_private: maybe no ----------------------- lock_manager_operations --------------------------- prototypes: int (*fl_compare_owner)(struct file_lock *, struct file_lock *); void (*fl_notify)(struct file_lock *); /* unblock callback */ - void (*fl_copy_lock)(struct file_lock *, struct file_lock *); + int (*fl_grant)(struct file_lock *, struct file_lock *, int); void (*fl_release_private)(struct file_lock *); void (*fl_break)(struct file_lock *); /* break_lease callback */ + int (*fl_mylease)(struct file_lock *, struct file_lock *); + int (*fl_change)(struct file_lock **, int); locking rules: - BKL may block -fl_compare_owner: yes no -fl_notify: yes no -fl_copy_lock: yes no -fl_release_private: yes yes -fl_break: yes no - - Currently only NFSD and NLM provide instances of this class. None of the -them block. If you have out-of-tree instances - please, show up. Locking -in that area will change. + file_lock_lock may block +fl_compare_owner: yes no +fl_notify: yes no +fl_grant: no no +fl_release_private: maybe no +fl_break: yes no +fl_mylease: yes no +fl_change yes no + --------------------------- buffer_head ----------------------------------- prototypes: void (*b_end_io)(struct buffer_head *bh, int uptodate); @@ -361,17 +380,17 @@ prototypes: void (*swap_slot_free_notify) (struct block_device *, unsigned long); locking rules: - BKL bd_mutex -open: no yes -release: no yes -ioctl: no no -compat_ioctl: no no -direct_access: no no -media_changed: no no -unlock_native_capacity: no no -revalidate_disk: no no -getgeo: no no -swap_slot_free_notify: no no (see below) + bd_mutex +open: yes +release: yes +ioctl: no +compat_ioctl: no +direct_access: no +media_changed: no +unlock_native_capacity: no +revalidate_disk: no +getgeo: no +swap_slot_free_notify: no (see below) media_changed, unlock_native_capacity and revalidate_disk are called only from check_disk_change(). @@ -410,34 +429,21 @@ prototypes: unsigned long (*get_unmapped_area)(struct file *, unsigned long, unsigned long, unsigned long, unsigned long); int (*check_flags)(int); + int (*flock) (struct file *, int, struct file_lock *); + ssize_t (*splice_write)(struct pipe_inode_info *, struct file *, loff_t *, + size_t, unsigned int); + ssize_t (*splice_read)(struct file *, loff_t *, struct pipe_inode_info *, + size_t, unsigned int); + int (*setlease)(struct file *, long, struct file_lock **); }; locking rules: - All may block. - BKL -llseek: no (see below) -read: no -aio_read: no -write: no -aio_write: no -readdir: no -poll: no -unlocked_ioctl: no -compat_ioctl: no -mmap: no -open: no -flush: no -release: no -fsync: no (see below) -aio_fsync: no -fasync: no -lock: yes -readv: no -writev: no -sendfile: no -sendpage: no -get_unmapped_area: no -check_flags: no + All may block except for ->setlease. + No VFS locks held on entry except for ->fsync and ->setlease. + +->fsync() has i_mutex on inode. + +->setlease has the file_list_lock held and must not sleep. ->llseek() locking has moved from llseek to the individual llseek implementations. If your fs is not using generic_file_llseek, you @@ -447,17 +453,10 @@ mutex or just to use i_size_read() instead. Note: this does not protect the file->f_pos against concurrent modifications since this is something the userspace has to take care about. -Note: ext2_release() was *the* source of contention on fs-intensive -loads and dropping BKL on ->release() helps to get rid of that (we still -grab BKL for cases when we close a file that had been opened r/w, but that -can and should be done using the internal locking with smaller critical areas). -Current worst offender is ext2_get_block()... - -->fasync() is called without BKL protection, and is responsible for -maintaining the FASYNC bit in filp->f_flags. Most instances call -fasync_helper(), which does that maintenance, so it's not normally -something one needs to worry about. Return values > 0 will be mapped to -zero in the VFS layer. +->fasync() is responsible for maintaining the FASYNC bit in filp->f_flags. +Most instances call fasync_helper(), which does that maintenance, so it's +not normally something one needs to worry about. Return values > 0 will be +mapped to zero in the VFS layer. ->readdir() and ->ioctl() on directories must be changed. Ideally we would move ->readdir() to inode_operations and use a separate method for directory @@ -468,8 +467,6 @@ components. And there are other reasons why the current interface is a mess... ->read on directories probably must go away - we should just enforce -EISDIR in sys_read() and friends. -->fsync() has i_mutex on inode. - --------------------------- dquot_operations ------------------------------- prototypes: int (*write_dquot) (struct dquot *); @@ -504,12 +501,12 @@ prototypes: int (*access)(struct vm_area_struct *, unsigned long, void*, int, int); locking rules: - BKL mmap_sem PageLocked(page) -open: no yes -close: no yes -fault: no yes can return with page locked -page_mkwrite: no yes can return with page locked -access: no yes + mmap_sem PageLocked(page) +open: yes +close: yes +fault: yes can return with page locked +page_mkwrite: yes can return with page locked +access: yes ->fault() is called when a previously not present pte is about to be faulted in. The filesystem must find and return the page associated @@ -536,6 +533,3 @@ VM_IO | VM_PFNMAP VMAs. (if you break something or notice that it is broken and do not fix it yourself - at least put it here) - -ipc/shm.c::shm_delete() - may need BKL. -->read() and ->write() in many drivers are (probably) missing BKL. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_explicit.c b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_explicit.c index d428cc9f07f3..fd53869f5633 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_explicit.c +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_explicit.c @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ static ssize_t childless_storeme_write(struct childless *childless, char *p = (char *) page; tmp = simple_strtoul(p, &p, 10); - if (!p || (*p && (*p != '\n'))) + if ((*p != '\0') && (*p != '\n')) return -EINVAL; if (tmp > INT_MAX) diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/dentry-locking.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/dentry-locking.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 79334ed5daa7..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/dentry-locking.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,174 +0,0 @@ -RCU-based dcache locking model -============================== - -On many workloads, the most common operation on dcache is to look up a -dentry, given a parent dentry and the name of the child. Typically, -for every open(), stat() etc., the dentry corresponding to the -pathname will be looked up by walking the tree starting with the first -component of the pathname and using that dentry along with the next -component to look up the next level and so on. Since it is a frequent -operation for workloads like multiuser environments and web servers, -it is important to optimize this path. - -Prior to 2.5.10, dcache_lock was acquired in d_lookup and thus in -every component during path look-up. Since 2.5.10 onwards, fast-walk -algorithm changed this by holding the dcache_lock at the beginning and -walking as many cached path component dentries as possible. This -significantly decreases the number of acquisition of -dcache_lock. However it also increases the lock hold time -significantly and affects performance in large SMP machines. Since -2.5.62 kernel, dcache has been using a new locking model that uses RCU -to make dcache look-up lock-free. - -The current dcache locking model is not very different from the -existing dcache locking model. Prior to 2.5.62 kernel, dcache_lock -protected the hash chain, d_child, d_alias, d_lru lists as well as -d_inode and several other things like mount look-up. RCU-based changes -affect only the way the hash chain is protected. For everything else -the dcache_lock must be taken for both traversing as well as -updating. The hash chain updates too take the dcache_lock. The -significant change is the way d_lookup traverses the hash chain, it -doesn't acquire the dcache_lock for this and rely on RCU to ensure -that the dentry has not been *freed*. - - -Dcache locking details -====================== - -For many multi-user workloads, open() and stat() on files are very -frequently occurring operations. Both involve walking of path names to -find the dentry corresponding to the concerned file. In 2.4 kernel, -dcache_lock was held during look-up of each path component. Contention -and cache-line bouncing of this global lock caused significant -scalability problems. With the introduction of RCU in Linux kernel, -this was worked around by making the look-up of path components during -path walking lock-free. - - -Safe lock-free look-up of dcache hash table -=========================================== - -Dcache is a complex data structure with the hash table entries also -linked together in other lists. In 2.4 kernel, dcache_lock protected -all the lists. We applied RCU only on hash chain walking. The rest of -the lists are still protected by dcache_lock. Some of the important -changes are : - -1. The deletion from hash chain is done using hlist_del_rcu() macro - which doesn't initialize next pointer of the deleted dentry and - this allows us to walk safely lock-free while a deletion is - happening. - -2. Insertion of a dentry into the hash table is done using - hlist_add_head_rcu() which take care of ordering the writes - the - writes to the dentry must be visible before the dentry is - inserted. This works in conjunction with hlist_for_each_rcu(), - which has since been replaced by hlist_for_each_entry_rcu(), while - walking the hash chain. The only requirement is that all - initialization to the dentry must be done before - hlist_add_head_rcu() since we don't have dcache_lock protection - while traversing the hash chain. This isn't different from the - existing code. - -3. The dentry looked up without holding dcache_lock by cannot be - returned for walking if it is unhashed. It then may have a NULL - d_inode or other bogosity since RCU doesn't protect the other - fields in the dentry. We therefore use a flag DCACHE_UNHASHED to - indicate unhashed dentries and use this in conjunction with a - per-dentry lock (d_lock). Once looked up without the dcache_lock, - we acquire the per-dentry lock (d_lock) and check if the dentry is - unhashed. If so, the look-up is failed. If not, the reference count - of the dentry is increased and the dentry is returned. - -4. Once a dentry is looked up, it must be ensured during the path walk - for that component it doesn't go away. In pre-2.5.10 code, this was - done holding a reference to the dentry. dcache_rcu does the same. - In some sense, dcache_rcu path walking looks like the pre-2.5.10 - version. - -5. All dentry hash chain updates must take the dcache_lock as well as - the per-dentry lock in that order. dput() does this to ensure that - a dentry that has just been looked up in another CPU doesn't get - deleted before dget() can be done on it. - -6. There are several ways to do reference counting of RCU protected - objects. One such example is in ipv4 route cache where deferred - freeing (using call_rcu()) is done as soon as the reference count - goes to zero. This cannot be done in the case of dentries because - tearing down of dentries require blocking (dentry_iput()) which - isn't supported from RCU callbacks. Instead, tearing down of - dentries happen synchronously in dput(), but actual freeing happens - later when RCU grace period is over. This allows safe lock-free - walking of the hash chains, but a matched dentry may have been - partially torn down. The checking of DCACHE_UNHASHED flag with - d_lock held detects such dentries and prevents them from being - returned from look-up. - - -Maintaining POSIX rename semantics -================================== - -Since look-up of dentries is lock-free, it can race against a -concurrent rename operation. For example, during rename of file A to -B, look-up of either A or B must succeed. So, if look-up of B happens -after A has been removed from the hash chain but not added to the new -hash chain, it may fail. Also, a comparison while the name is being -written concurrently by a rename may result in false positive matches -violating rename semantics. Issues related to race with rename are -handled as described below : - -1. Look-up can be done in two ways - d_lookup() which is safe from - simultaneous renames and __d_lookup() which is not. If - __d_lookup() fails, it must be followed up by a d_lookup() to - correctly determine whether a dentry is in the hash table or - not. d_lookup() protects look-ups using a sequence lock - (rename_lock). - -2. The name associated with a dentry (d_name) may be changed if a - rename is allowed to happen simultaneously. To avoid memcmp() in - __d_lookup() go out of bounds due to a rename and false positive - comparison, the name comparison is done while holding the - per-dentry lock. This prevents concurrent renames during this - operation. - -3. Hash table walking during look-up may move to a different bucket as - the current dentry is moved to a different bucket due to rename. - But we use hlists in dcache hash table and they are - null-terminated. So, even if a dentry moves to a different bucket, - hash chain walk will terminate. [with a list_head list, it may not - since termination is when the list_head in the original bucket is - reached]. Since we redo the d_parent check and compare name while - holding d_lock, lock-free look-up will not race against d_move(). - -4. There can be a theoretical race when a dentry keeps coming back to - original bucket due to double moves. Due to this look-up may - consider that it has never moved and can end up in a infinite loop. - But this is not any worse that theoretical livelocks we already - have in the kernel. - - -Important guidelines for filesystem developers related to dcache_rcu -==================================================================== - -1. Existing dcache interfaces (pre-2.5.62) exported to filesystem - don't change. Only dcache internal implementation changes. However - filesystems *must not* delete from the dentry hash chains directly - using the list macros like allowed earlier. They must use dcache - APIs like d_drop() or __d_drop() depending on the situation. - -2. d_flags is now protected by a per-dentry lock (d_lock). All access - to d_flags must be protected by it. - -3. For a hashed dentry, checking of d_count needs to be protected by - d_lock. - - -Papers and other documentation on dcache locking -================================================ - -1. Scaling dcache with RCU (http://linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=7124). - -2. http://lse.sourceforge.net/locking/dcache/dcache.html - - - diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt index ac2a261c5f7d..6ef8cf3bc9a3 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt @@ -457,6 +457,9 @@ ChangeLog Note, a technical ChangeLog aimed at kernel hackers is in fs/ntfs/ChangeLog. +2.1.30: + - Fix writev() (it kept writing the first segment over and over again + instead of moving onto subsequent segments). 2.1.29: - Fix a deadlock when mounting read-write. 2.1.28: diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..eb59c8b44be9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.txt @@ -0,0 +1,382 @@ +Path walking and name lookup locking +==================================== + +Path resolution is the finding a dentry corresponding to a path name string, by +performing a path walk. Typically, for every open(), stat() etc., the path name +will be resolved. Paths are resolved by walking the namespace tree, starting +with the first component of the pathname (eg. root or cwd) with a known dentry, +then finding the child of that dentry, which is named the next component in the +path string. Then repeating the lookup from the child dentry and finding its +child with the next element, and so on. + +Since it is a frequent operation for workloads like multiuser environments and +web servers, it is important to optimize this code. + +Path walking synchronisation history: +Prior to 2.5.10, dcache_lock was acquired in d_lookup (dcache hash lookup) and +thus in every component during path look-up. Since 2.5.10 onwards, fast-walk +algorithm changed this by holding the dcache_lock at the beginning and walking +as many cached path component dentries as possible. This significantly +decreases the number of acquisition of dcache_lock. However it also increases +the lock hold time significantly and affects performance in large SMP machines. +Since 2.5.62 kernel, dcache has been using a new locking model that uses RCU to +make dcache look-up lock-free. + +All the above algorithms required taking a lock and reference count on the +dentry that was looked up, so that may be used as the basis for walking the +next path element. This is inefficient and unscalable. It is inefficient +because of the locks and atomic operations required for every dentry element +slows things down. It is not scalable because many parallel applications that +are path-walk intensive tend to do path lookups starting from a common dentry +(usually, the root "/" or current working directory). So contention on these +common path elements causes lock and cacheline queueing. + +Since 2.6.38, RCU is used to make a significant part of the entire path walk +(including dcache look-up) completely "store-free" (so, no locks, atomics, or +even stores into cachelines of common dentries). This is known as "rcu-walk" +path walking. + +Path walking overview +===================== + +A name string specifies a start (root directory, cwd, fd-relative) and a +sequence of elements (directory entry names), which together refer to a path in +the namespace. A path is represented as a (dentry, vfsmount) tuple. The name +elements are sub-strings, seperated by '/'. + +Name lookups will want to find a particular path that a name string refers to +(usually the final element, or parent of final element). This is done by taking +the path given by the name's starting point (which we know in advance -- eg. +current->fs->cwd or current->fs->root) as the first parent of the lookup. Then +iteratively for each subsequent name element, look up the child of the current +parent with the given name and if it is not the desired entry, make it the +parent for the next lookup. + +A parent, of course, must be a directory, and we must have appropriate +permissions on the parent inode to be able to walk into it. + +Turning the child into a parent for the next lookup requires more checks and +procedures. Symlinks essentially substitute the symlink name for the target +name in the name string, and require some recursive path walking. Mount points +must be followed into (thus changing the vfsmount that subsequent path elements +refer to), switching from the mount point path to the root of the particular +mounted vfsmount. These behaviours are variously modified depending on the +exact path walking flags. + +Path walking then must, broadly, do several particular things: +- find the start point of the walk; +- perform permissions and validity checks on inodes; +- perform dcache hash name lookups on (parent, name element) tuples; +- traverse mount points; +- traverse symlinks; +- lookup and create missing parts of the path on demand. + +Safe store-free look-up of dcache hash table +============================================ + +Dcache name lookup +------------------ +In order to lookup a dcache (parent, name) tuple, we take a hash on the tuple +and use that to select a bucket in the dcache-hash table. The list of entries +in that bucket is then walked, and we do a full comparison of each entry +against our (parent, name) tuple. + +The hash lists are RCU protected, so list walking is not serialised with +concurrent updates (insertion, deletion from the hash). This is a standard RCU +list application with the exception of renames, which will be covered below. + +Parent and name members of a dentry, as well as its membership in the dcache +hash, and its inode are protected by the per-dentry d_lock spinlock. A +reference is taken on the dentry (while the fields are verified under d_lock), +and this stabilises its d_inode pointer and actual inode. This gives a stable +point to perform the next step of our path walk against. + +These members are also protected by d_seq seqlock, although this offers +read-only protection and no durability of results, so care must be taken when +using d_seq for synchronisation (see seqcount based lookups, below). + +Renames +------- +Back to the rename case. In usual RCU protected lists, the only operations that +will happen to an object is insertion, and then eventually removal from the +list. The object will not be reused until an RCU grace period is complete. +This ensures the RCU list traversal primitives can run over the object without +problems (see RCU documentation for how this works). + +However when a dentry is renamed, its hash value can change, requiring it to be +moved to a new hash list. Allocating and inserting a new alias would be +expensive and also problematic for directory dentries. Latency would be far to +high to wait for a grace period after removing the dentry and before inserting +it in the new hash bucket. So what is done is to insert the dentry into the +new list immediately. + +However, when the dentry's list pointers are updated to point to objects in the +new list before waiting for a grace period, this can result in a concurrent RCU +lookup of the old list veering off into the new (incorrect) list and missing +the remaining dentries on the list. + +There is no fundamental problem with walking down the wrong list, because the +dentry comparisons will never match. However it is fatal to miss a matching +dentry. So a seqlock is used to detect when a rename has occurred, and so the +lookup can be retried. + + 1 2 3 + +---+ +---+ +---+ +hlist-->| N-+->| N-+->| N-+-> +head <--+-P |<-+-P |<-+-P | + +---+ +---+ +---+ + +Rename of dentry 2 may require it deleted from the above list, and inserted +into a new list. Deleting 2 gives the following list. + + 1 3 + +---+ +---+ (don't worry, the longer pointers do not +hlist-->| N-+-------->| N-+-> impose a measurable performance overhead +head <--+-P |<--------+-P | on modern CPUs) + +---+ +---+ + ^ 2 ^ + | +---+ | + | | N-+----+ + +----+-P | + +---+ + +This is a standard RCU-list deletion, which leaves the deleted object's +pointers intact, so a concurrent list walker that is currently looking at +object 2 will correctly continue to object 3 when it is time to traverse the +next object. + +However, when inserting object 2 onto a new list, we end up with this: + + 1 3 + +---+ +---+ +hlist-->| N-+-------->| N-+-> +head <--+-P |<--------+-P | + +---+ +---+ + 2 + +---+ + | N-+----> + <----+-P | + +---+ + +Because we didn't wait for a grace period, there may be a concurrent lookup +still at 2. Now when it follows 2's 'next' pointer, it will walk off into +another list without ever having checked object 3. + +A related, but distinctly different, issue is that of rename atomicity versus +lookup operations. If a file is renamed from 'A' to 'B', a lookup must only +find either 'A' or 'B'. So if a lookup of 'A' returns NULL, a subsequent lookup +of 'B' must succeed (note the reverse is not true). + +Between deleting the dentry from the old hash list, and inserting it on the new +hash list, a lookup may find neither 'A' nor 'B' matching the dentry. The same +rename seqlock is also used to cover this race in much the same way, by +retrying a negative lookup result if a rename was in progress. + +Seqcount based lookups +---------------------- +In refcount based dcache lookups, d_lock is used to serialise access to +the dentry, stabilising it while comparing its name and parent and then +taking a reference count (the reference count then gives a stable place to +start the next part of the path walk from). + +As explained above, we would like to do path walking without taking locks or +reference counts on intermediate dentries along the path. To do this, a per +dentry seqlock (d_seq) is used to take a "coherent snapshot" of what the dentry +looks like (its name, parent, and inode). That snapshot is then used to start +the next part of the path walk. When loading the coherent snapshot under d_seq, +care must be taken to load the members up-front, and use those pointers rather +than reloading from the dentry later on (otherwise we'd have interesting things +like d_inode going NULL underneath us, if the name was unlinked). + +Also important is to avoid performing any destructive operations (pretty much: +no non-atomic stores to shared data), and to recheck the seqcount when we are +"done" with the operation. Retry or abort if the seqcount does not match. +Avoiding destructive or changing operations means we can easily unwind from +failure. + +What this means is that a caller, provided they are holding RCU lock to +protect the dentry object from disappearing, can perform a seqcount based +lookup which does not increment the refcount on the dentry or write to +it in any way. This returned dentry can be used for subsequent operations, +provided that d_seq is rechecked after that operation is complete. + +Inodes are also rcu freed, so the seqcount lookup dentry's inode may also be +queried for permissions. + +With this two parts of the puzzle, we can do path lookups without taking +locks or refcounts on dentry elements. + +RCU-walk path walking design +============================ + +Path walking code now has two distinct modes, ref-walk and rcu-walk. ref-walk +is the traditional[*] way of performing dcache lookups using d_lock to +serialise concurrent modifications to the dentry and take a reference count on +it. ref-walk is simple and obvious, and may sleep, take locks, etc while path +walking is operating on each dentry. rcu-walk uses seqcount based dentry +lookups, and can perform lookup of intermediate elements without any stores to +shared data in the dentry or inode. rcu-walk can not be applied to all cases, +eg. if the filesystem must sleep or perform non trivial operations, rcu-walk +must be switched to ref-walk mode. + +[*] RCU is still used for the dentry hash lookup in ref-walk, but not the full + path walk. + +Where ref-walk uses a stable, refcounted ``parent'' to walk the remaining +path string, rcu-walk uses a d_seq protected snapshot. When looking up a +child of this parent snapshot, we open d_seq critical section on the child +before closing d_seq critical section on the parent. This gives an interlocking +ladder of snapshots to walk down. + + + proc 101 + /----------------\ + / comm: "vi" \ + / fs.root: dentry0 \ + \ fs.cwd: dentry2 / + \ / + \----------------/ + +So when vi wants to open("/home/npiggin/test.c", O_RDWR), then it will +start from current->fs->root, which is a pinned dentry. Alternatively, +"./test.c" would start from cwd; both names refer to the same path in +the context of proc101. + + dentry 0 + +---------------------+ rcu-walk begins here, we note d_seq, check the + | name: "/" | inode's permission, and then look up the next + | inode: 10 | path element which is "home"... + | children:"home", ...| + +---------------------+ + | + dentry 1 V + +---------------------+ ... which brings us here. We find dentry1 via + | name: "home" | hash lookup, then note d_seq and compare name + | inode: 678 | string and parent pointer. When we have a match, + | children:"npiggin" | we now recheck the d_seq of dentry0. Then we + +---------------------+ check inode and look up the next element. + | + dentry2 V + +---------------------+ Note: if dentry0 is now modified, lookup is + | name: "npiggin" | not necessarily invalid, so we need only keep a + | inode: 543 | parent for d_seq verification, and grandparents + | children:"a.c", ... | can be forgotten. + +---------------------+ + | + dentry3 V + +---------------------+ At this point we have our destination dentry. + | name: "a.c" | We now take its d_lock, verify d_seq of this + | inode: 14221 | dentry. If that checks out, we can increment + | children:NULL | its refcount because we're holding d_lock. + +---------------------+ + +Taking a refcount on a dentry from rcu-walk mode, by taking its d_lock, +re-checking its d_seq, and then incrementing its refcount is called +"dropping rcu" or dropping from rcu-walk into ref-walk mode. + +It is, in some sense, a bit of a house of cards. If the seqcount check of the +parent snapshot fails, the house comes down, because we had closed the d_seq +section on the grandparent, so we have nothing left to stand on. In that case, +the path walk must be fully restarted (which we do in ref-walk mode, to avoid +live locks). It is costly to have a full restart, but fortunately they are +quite rare. + +When we reach a point where sleeping is required, or a filesystem callout +requires ref-walk, then instead of restarting the walk, we attempt to drop rcu +at the last known good dentry we have. Avoiding a full restart in ref-walk in +these cases is fundamental for performance and scalability because blocking +operations such as creates and unlinks are not uncommon. + +The detailed design for rcu-walk is like this: +* LOOKUP_RCU is set in nd->flags, which distinguishes rcu-walk from ref-walk. +* Take the RCU lock for the entire path walk, starting with the acquiring + of the starting path (eg. root/cwd/fd-path). So now dentry refcounts are + not required for dentry persistence. +* synchronize_rcu is called when unregistering a filesystem, so we can + access d_ops and i_ops during rcu-walk. +* Similarly take the vfsmount lock for the entire path walk. So now mnt + refcounts are not required for persistence. Also we are free to perform mount + lookups, and to assume dentry mount points and mount roots are stable up and + down the path. +* Have a per-dentry seqlock to protect the dentry name, parent, and inode, + so we can load this tuple atomically, and also check whether any of its + members have changed. +* Dentry lookups (based on parent, candidate string tuple) recheck the parent + sequence after the child is found in case anything changed in the parent + during the path walk. +* inode is also RCU protected so we can load d_inode and use the inode for + limited things. +* i_mode, i_uid, i_gid can be tested for exec permissions during path walk. +* i_op can be loaded. +* When the destination dentry is reached, drop rcu there (ie. take d_lock, + verify d_seq, increment refcount). +* If seqlock verification fails anywhere along the path, do a full restart + of the path lookup in ref-walk mode. -ECHILD tends to be used (for want of + a better errno) to signal an rcu-walk failure. + +The cases where rcu-walk cannot continue are: +* NULL dentry (ie. any uncached path element) +* Following links + +It may be possible eventually to make following links rcu-walk aware. + +Uncached path elements will always require dropping to ref-walk mode, at the +very least because i_mutex needs to be grabbed, and objects allocated. + +Final note: +"store-free" path walking is not strictly store free. We take vfsmount lock +and refcounts (both of which can be made per-cpu), and we also store to the +stack (which is essentially CPU-local), and we also have to take locks and +refcount on final dentry. + +The point is that shared data, where practically possible, is not locked +or stored into. The result is massive improvements in performance and +scalability of path resolution. + + +Interesting statistics +====================== + +The following table gives rcu lookup statistics for a few simple workloads +(2s12c24t Westmere, debian non-graphical system). Ungraceful are attempts to +drop rcu that fail due to d_seq failure and requiring the entire path lookup +again. Other cases are successful rcu-drops that are required before the final +element, nodentry for missing dentry, revalidate for filesystem revalidate +routine requiring rcu drop, permission for permission check requiring drop, +and link for symlink traversal requiring drop. + + rcu-lookups restart nodentry link revalidate permission +bootup 47121 0 4624 1010 10283 7852 +dbench 25386793 0 6778659(26.7%) 55 549 1156 +kbuild 2696672 10 64442(2.3%) 108764(4.0%) 1 1590 +git diff 39605 0 28 2 0 106 +vfstest 24185492 4945 708725(2.9%) 1076136(4.4%) 0 2651 + +What this shows is that failed rcu-walk lookups, ie. ones that are restarted +entirely with ref-walk, are quite rare. Even the "vfstest" case which +specifically has concurrent renames/mkdir/rmdir/ creat/unlink/etc to excercise +such races is not showing a huge amount of restarts. + +Dropping from rcu-walk to ref-walk mean that we have encountered a dentry where +the reference count needs to be taken for some reason. This is either because +we have reached the target of the path walk, or because we have encountered a +condition that can't be resolved in rcu-walk mode. Ideally, we drop rcu-walk +only when we have reached the target dentry, so the other statistics show where +this does not happen. + +Note that a graceful drop from rcu-walk mode due to something such as the +dentry not existing (which can be common) is not necessarily a failure of +rcu-walk scheme, because some elements of the path may have been walked in +rcu-walk mode. The further we get from common path elements (such as cwd or +root), the less contended the dentry is likely to be. The closer we are to +common path elements, the more likely they will exist in dentry cache. + + +Papers and other documentation on dcache locking +================================================ + +1. Scaling dcache with RCU (http://linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=7124). + +2. http://lse.sourceforge.net/locking/dcache/dcache.html + + diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/porting b/Documentation/filesystems/porting index b12c89538680..07a32b42cf9c 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/porting +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/porting @@ -216,7 +216,6 @@ had ->revalidate()) add calls in ->follow_link()/->readlink(). ->d_parent changes are not protected by BKL anymore. Read access is safe if at least one of the following is true: * filesystem has no cross-directory rename() - * dcache_lock is held * we know that parent had been locked (e.g. we are looking at ->d_parent of ->lookup() argument). * we are called from ->rename(). @@ -318,3 +317,71 @@ if it's zero is not *and* *never* *had* *been* enough. Final unlink() and iput( may happen while the inode is in the middle of ->write_inode(); e.g. if you blindly free the on-disk inode, you may end up doing that while ->write_inode() is writing to it. + +--- +[mandatory] + + .d_delete() now only advises the dcache as to whether or not to cache +unreferenced dentries, and is now only called when the dentry refcount goes to +0. Even on 0 refcount transition, it must be able to tolerate being called 0, +1, or more times (eg. constant, idempotent). + +--- +[mandatory] + + .d_compare() calling convention and locking rules are significantly +changed. Read updated documentation in Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt (and +look at examples of other filesystems) for guidance. + +--- +[mandatory] + + .d_hash() calling convention and locking rules are significantly +changed. Read updated documentation in Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt (and +look at examples of other filesystems) for guidance. + +--- +[mandatory] + dcache_lock is gone, replaced by fine grained locks. See fs/dcache.c +for details of what locks to replace dcache_lock with in order to protect +particular things. Most of the time, a filesystem only needs ->d_lock, which +protects *all* the dcache state of a given dentry. + +-- +[mandatory] + + Filesystems must RCU-free their inodes, if they can have been accessed +via rcu-walk path walk (basically, if the file can have had a path name in the +vfs namespace). + + i_dentry and i_rcu share storage in a union, and the vfs expects +i_dentry to be reinitialized before it is freed, so an: + + INIT_LIST_HEAD(&inode->i_dentry); + +must be done in the RCU callback. + +-- +[recommended] + vfs now tries to do path walking in "rcu-walk mode", which avoids +atomic operations and scalability hazards on dentries and inodes (see +Documentation/filesystems/path-walk.txt). d_hash and d_compare changes (above) +are examples of the changes required to support this. For more complex +filesystem callbacks, the vfs drops out of rcu-walk mode before the fs call, so +no changes are required to the filesystem. However, this is costly and loses +the benefits of rcu-walk mode. We will begin to add filesystem callbacks that +are rcu-walk aware, shown below. Filesystems should take advantage of this +where possible. + +-- +[mandatory] + d_revalidate is a callback that is made on every path element (if +the filesystem provides it), which requires dropping out of rcu-walk mode. This +may now be called in rcu-walk mode (nd->flags & LOOKUP_RCU). -ECHILD should be +returned if the filesystem cannot handle rcu-walk. See +Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt for more details. + + permission and check_acl are inode permission checks that are called +on many or all directory inodes on the way down a path walk (to check for +exec permission). These must now be rcu-walk aware (flags & IPERM_RCU). See +Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt for more details. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index e73df2722ff3..9471225212c4 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt @@ -1181,6 +1181,30 @@ Table 1-12: Files in /proc/fs/ext4/<devname> mb_groups details of multiblock allocator buddy cache of free blocks .............................................................................. +2.0 /proc/consoles +------------------ +Shows registered system console lines. + +To see which character device lines are currently used for the system console +/dev/console, you may simply look into the file /proc/consoles: + + > cat /proc/consoles + tty0 -WU (ECp) 4:7 + ttyS0 -W- (Ep) 4:64 + +The columns are: + + device name of the device + operations R = can do read operations + W = can do write operations + U = can do unblank + flags E = it is enabled + C = it is prefered console + B = it is primary boot console + p = it is used for printk buffer + b = it is not a TTY but a Braille device + a = it is safe to use when cpu is offline + major:minor major and minor number of the device separated by a colon ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Summary diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/smbfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/smbfs.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 194fb0decd2c..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/smbfs.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8 +0,0 @@ -Smbfs is a filesystem that implements the SMB protocol, which is the -protocol used by Windows for Workgroups, Windows 95 and Windows NT. -Smbfs was inspired by Samba, the program written by Andrew Tridgell -that turns any Unix host into a file server for DOS or Windows clients. - -Smbfs is a SMB client, but uses parts of samba for its operation. For -more info on samba, including documentation, please go to -http://www.samba.org/ and then on to your nearest mirror. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt index ed7e5efc06d8..fbb324e2bd43 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt @@ -325,7 +325,8 @@ struct inode_operations { void * (*follow_link) (struct dentry *, struct nameidata *); void (*put_link) (struct dentry *, struct nameidata *, void *); void (*truncate) (struct inode *); - int (*permission) (struct inode *, int, struct nameidata *); + int (*permission) (struct inode *, int, unsigned int); + int (*check_acl)(struct inode *, int, unsigned int); int (*setattr) (struct dentry *, struct iattr *); int (*getattr) (struct vfsmount *mnt, struct dentry *, struct kstat *); int (*setxattr) (struct dentry *, const char *,const void *,size_t,int); @@ -414,6 +415,13 @@ otherwise noted. permission: called by the VFS to check for access rights on a POSIX-like filesystem. + May be called in rcu-walk mode (flags & IPERM_RCU). If in rcu-walk + mode, the filesystem must check the permission without blocking or + storing to the inode. + + If a situation is encountered that rcu-walk cannot handle, return + -ECHILD and it will be called again in ref-walk mode. + setattr: called by the VFS to set attributes for a file. This method is called by chmod(2) and related system calls. @@ -534,6 +542,7 @@ struct address_space_operations { sector_t (*bmap)(struct address_space *, sector_t); int (*invalidatepage) (struct page *, unsigned long); int (*releasepage) (struct page *, int); + void (*freepage)(struct page *); ssize_t (*direct_IO)(int, struct kiocb *, const struct iovec *iov, loff_t offset, unsigned long nr_segs); struct page* (*get_xip_page)(struct address_space *, sector_t, @@ -660,11 +669,10 @@ struct address_space_operations { releasepage: releasepage is called on PagePrivate pages to indicate that the page should be freed if possible. ->releasepage should remove any private data from the page and clear the - PagePrivate flag. It may also remove the page from the - address_space. If this fails for some reason, it may indicate - failure with a 0 return value. - This is used in two distinct though related cases. The first - is when the VM finds a clean page with no active users and + PagePrivate flag. If releasepage() fails for some reason, it must + indicate failure with a 0 return value. + releasepage() is used in two distinct though related cases. The + first is when the VM finds a clean page with no active users and wants to make it a free page. If ->releasepage succeeds, the page will be removed from the address_space and become free. @@ -679,6 +687,12 @@ struct address_space_operations { need to ensure this. Possibly it can clear the PageUptodate bit if it cannot free private data yet. + freepage: freepage is called once the page is no longer visible in + the page cache in order to allow the cleanup of any private + data. Since it may be called by the memory reclaimer, it + should not assume that the original address_space mapping still + exists, and it should not block. + direct_IO: called by the generic read/write routines to perform direct_IO - that is IO requests which bypass the page cache and transfer data directly between the storage and the @@ -841,9 +855,12 @@ defined: struct dentry_operations { int (*d_revalidate)(struct dentry *, struct nameidata *); - int (*d_hash) (struct dentry *, struct qstr *); - int (*d_compare) (struct dentry *, struct qstr *, struct qstr *); - int (*d_delete)(struct dentry *); + int (*d_hash)(const struct dentry *, const struct inode *, + struct qstr *); + int (*d_compare)(const struct dentry *, const struct inode *, + const struct dentry *, const struct inode *, + unsigned int, const char *, const struct qstr *); + int (*d_delete)(const struct dentry *); void (*d_release)(struct dentry *); void (*d_iput)(struct dentry *, struct inode *); char *(*d_dname)(struct dentry *, char *, int); @@ -854,13 +871,45 @@ struct dentry_operations { dcache. Most filesystems leave this as NULL, because all their dentries in the dcache are valid - d_hash: called when the VFS adds a dentry to the hash table + d_revalidate may be called in rcu-walk mode (nd->flags & LOOKUP_RCU). + If in rcu-walk mode, the filesystem must revalidate the dentry without + blocking or storing to the dentry, d_parent and d_inode should not be + used without care (because they can go NULL), instead nd->inode should + be used. + + If a situation is encountered that rcu-walk cannot handle, return + -ECHILD and it will be called again in ref-walk mode. + + d_hash: called when the VFS adds a dentry to the hash table. The first + dentry passed to d_hash is the parent directory that the name is + to be hashed into. The inode is the dentry's inode. + + Same locking and synchronisation rules as d_compare regarding + what is safe to dereference etc. + + d_compare: called to compare a dentry name with a given name. The first + dentry is the parent of the dentry to be compared, the second is + the parent's inode, then the dentry and inode (may be NULL) of the + child dentry. len and name string are properties of the dentry to be + compared. qstr is the name to compare it with. + + Must be constant and idempotent, and should not take locks if + possible, and should not or store into the dentry or inodes. + Should not dereference pointers outside the dentry or inodes without + lots of care (eg. d_parent, d_inode, d_name should not be used). + + However, our vfsmount is pinned, and RCU held, so the dentries and + inodes won't disappear, neither will our sb or filesystem module. + ->i_sb and ->d_sb may be used. - d_compare: called when a dentry should be compared with another + It is a tricky calling convention because it needs to be called under + "rcu-walk", ie. without any locks or references on things. - d_delete: called when the last reference to a dentry is - deleted. This means no-one is using the dentry, however it is - still valid and in the dcache + d_delete: called when the last reference to a dentry is dropped and the + dcache is deciding whether or not to cache it. Return 1 to delete + immediately, or 0 to cache the dentry. Default is NULL which means to + always cache a reachable dentry. d_delete must be constant and + idempotent. d_release: called when a dentry is really deallocated @@ -904,14 +953,11 @@ manipulate dentries: the usage count) dput: close a handle for a dentry (decrements the usage count). If - the usage count drops to 0, the "d_delete" method is called - and the dentry is placed on the unused list if the dentry is - still in its parents hash list. Putting the dentry on the - unused list just means that if the system needs some RAM, it - goes through the unused list of dentries and deallocates them. - If the dentry has already been unhashed and the usage count - drops to 0, in this case the dentry is deallocated after the - "d_delete" method is called + the usage count drops to 0, and the dentry is still in its + parent's hash, the "d_delete" method is called to check whether + it should be cached. If it should not be cached, or if the dentry + is not hashed, it is deleted. Otherwise cached dentries are put + into an LRU list to be reclaimed on memory shortage. d_drop: this unhashes a dentry from its parents hash list. A subsequent call to dput() will deallocate the dentry if its diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-delayed-logging-design.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-delayed-logging-design.txt index 96d0df28bed3..7445bf335dae 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-delayed-logging-design.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-delayed-logging-design.txt @@ -794,17 +794,6 @@ designed. Roadmap: -2.6.37 Remove experimental tag from mount option - => should be roughly 6 months after initial merge - => enough time to: - => gain confidence and fix problems reported by early - adopters (a.k.a. guinea pigs) - => address worst performance regressions and undesired - behaviours - => start tuning/optimising code for parallelism - => start tuning/optimising algorithms consuming - excessive CPU time - 2.6.39 Switch default mount option to use delayed logging => should be roughly 12 months after initial merge => enough time to shake out remaining problems before next round of diff --git a/Documentation/gpio.txt b/Documentation/gpio.txt index 9633da01ff46..a492d92bb098 100644 --- a/Documentation/gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/gpio.txt @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ setting up a platform_device using the GPIO, is mark its direction: int gpio_direction_input(unsigned gpio); int gpio_direction_output(unsigned gpio, int value); -The return value is zero for success, else a negative errno. It should +The return value is zero for success, else a negative errno. It must be checked, since the get/set calls don't have error returns and since misconfiguration is possible. You should normally issue these calls from a task context. However, for spinlock-safe GPIOs it's OK to use them @@ -617,6 +617,16 @@ and have the following read/write attributes: is configured as an output, this value may be written; any nonzero value is treated as high. + If the pin can be configured as interrupt-generating interrupt + and if it has been configured to generate interrupts (see the + description of "edge"), you can poll(2) on that file and + poll(2) will return whenever the interrupt was triggered. If + you use poll(2), set the events POLLPRI and POLLERR. If you + use select(2), set the file descriptor in exceptfds. After + poll(2) returns, either lseek(2) to the beginning of the sysfs + file and read the new value or close the file and re-open it + to read the value. + "edge" ... reads as either "none", "rising", "falling", or "both". Write these strings to select the signal edge(s) that will make poll(2) on the "value" file return. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adm9240 b/Documentation/hwmon/adm9240 index 2c6f1fed4618..36e8ec6aa868 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/adm9240 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adm9240 @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ connected to a normally open switch. The ADM9240 provides an internal open drain on this line, and may output a 20 ms active low pulse to reset an external Chassis Intrusion latch. -Clear the CI latch by writing value 1 to the sysfs chassis_clear file. +Clear the CI latch by writing value 0 to the sysfs intrusion0_alarm file. Alarm flags reported as 16-bit word diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ads7828 b/Documentation/hwmon/ads7828 index 75bc4beaf447..2bbebe6f771f 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/ads7828 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ads7828 @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Supported chips: http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ads7828.pdf Authors: - Steve Hardy <steve@linuxrealtime.co.uk> + Steve Hardy <shardy@redhat.com> Module Parameters ----------------- diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737 b/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737 index fc5df7654d63..4d2935145a1c 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737 @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ Description This driver implements support for the hardware monitoring capabilities of the SMSC DME1737 and Asus A8000 (which are the same), SMSC SCH5027, SCH311x, and SCH5127 Super-I/O chips. These chips feature monitoring of 3 temp sensors -temp[1-3] (2 remote diodes and 1 internal), 7 voltages in[0-6] (6 external and +temp[1-3] (2 remote diodes and 1 internal), 8 voltages in[0-7] (7 external and 1 internal) and up to 6 fan speeds fan[1-6]. Additionally, the chips implement up to 5 PWM outputs pwm[1-3,5-6] for controlling fan speeds both manually and automatically. @@ -105,6 +105,7 @@ SCH5127: in4: V1_IN 0V - 1.5V in5: VTR (+3.3V standby) 0V - 4.38V in6: Vbat (+3.0V) 0V - 4.38V + in7: Vtrip (+1.5V) 0V - 1.99V Each voltage input has associated min and max limits which trigger an alarm when crossed. @@ -217,10 +218,10 @@ cpu0_vid RO CPU core reference voltage in vrm RW Voltage regulator module version number. -in[0-6]_input RO Measured voltage in millivolts. -in[0-6]_min RW Low limit for voltage input. -in[0-6]_max RW High limit for voltage input. -in[0-6]_alarm RO Voltage input alarm. Returns 1 if +in[0-7]_input RO Measured voltage in millivolts. +in[0-7]_min RW Low limit for voltage input. +in[0-7]_max RW High limit for voltage input. +in[0-7]_alarm RO Voltage input alarm. Returns 1 if voltage input is or went outside the associated min-max range, 0 otherwise. @@ -324,3 +325,4 @@ fan5 opt opt pwm5 opt opt fan6 opt opt pwm6 opt opt +in7 yes diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ds620 b/Documentation/hwmon/ds620 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1fbe3cd916cc --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ds620 @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +Kernel driver ds620 +=================== + +Supported chips: + * Dallas Semiconductor DS620 + Prefix: 'ds620' + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Dallas Semiconductor website + http://www.dalsemi.com/ + +Authors: + Roland Stigge <stigge@antcom.de> + based on ds1621.c by + Christian W. Zuckschwerdt <zany@triq.net> + +Description +----------- + +The DS620 is a (one instance) digital thermometer and thermostat. It has both +high and low temperature limits which can be user defined (i.e. programmed +into non-volatile on-chip registers). Temperature range is -55 degree Celsius +to +125. Between 0 and 70 degree Celsius, accuracy is 0.5 Kelvin. The value +returned via sysfs displays post decimal positions. + +The thermostat function works as follows: When configured via platform_data +(struct ds620_platform_data) .pomode == 0 (default), the thermostat output pin +PO is always low. If .pomode == 1, the thermostat is in PO_LOW mode. I.e., the +output pin PO becomes active when the temperature falls below temp1_min and +stays active until the temperature goes above temp1_max. + +Likewise, with .pomode == 2, the thermostat is in PO_HIGH mode. I.e., the PO +output pin becomes active when the temperature goes above temp1_max and stays +active until the temperature falls below temp1_min. + +The PO output pin of the DS620 operates active-low. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/it87 b/Documentation/hwmon/it87 index 8d08bf0d38ed..38425f0f2645 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/it87 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/it87 @@ -22,6 +22,10 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'it8720' Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports) Datasheet: Not publicly available + * IT8721F/IT8758E + Prefix: 'it8721' + Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports) + Datasheet: Not publicly available * SiS950 [clone of IT8705F] Prefix: 'it87' Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports) @@ -67,7 +71,7 @@ Description ----------- This driver implements support for the IT8705F, IT8712F, IT8716F, -IT8718F, IT8720F, IT8726F and SiS950 chips. +IT8718F, IT8720F, IT8721F, IT8726F, IT8758E and SiS950 chips. These chips are 'Super I/O chips', supporting floppy disks, infrared ports, joysticks and other miscellaneous stuff. For hardware monitoring, they @@ -86,14 +90,15 @@ the driver won't notice and report changes in the VID value. The two upper VID bits share their pins with voltage inputs (in5 and in6) so you can't have both on a given board. -The IT8716F, IT8718F, IT8720F and later IT8712F revisions have support for -2 additional fans. The additional fans are supported by the driver. +The IT8716F, IT8718F, IT8720F, IT8721F/IT8758E and later IT8712F revisions +have support for 2 additional fans. The additional fans are supported by the +driver. -The IT8716F, IT8718F and IT8720F, and late IT8712F and IT8705F also have -optional 16-bit tachometer counters for fans 1 to 3. This is better (no more -fan clock divider mess) but not compatible with the older chips and -revisions. The 16-bit tachometer mode is enabled by the driver when one -of the above chips is detected. +The IT8716F, IT8718F, IT8720F and IT8721F/IT8758E, and late IT8712F and +IT8705F also have optional 16-bit tachometer counters for fans 1 to 3. This +is better (no more fan clock divider mess) but not compatible with the older +chips and revisions. The 16-bit tachometer mode is enabled by the driver when +one of the above chips is detected. The IT8726F is just bit enhanced IT8716F with additional hardware for AMD power sequencing. Therefore the chip will appear as IT8716F @@ -115,7 +120,12 @@ alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable minimum or maximum limit. Note that minimum in this case always means 'closest to zero'; this is important for negative voltage measurements. All voltage inputs can measure voltages between 0 and 4.08 volts, with a resolution of -0.016 volt. The battery voltage in8 does not have limit registers. +0.016 volt (except IT8721F/IT8758E: 0.012 volt.) The battery voltage in8 does +not have limit registers. + +On the IT8721F/IT8758E, some voltage inputs are internal and scaled inside +the chip (in7, in8 and optionally in3). The driver handles this transparently +so user-space doesn't have to care. The VID lines (IT8712F/IT8716F/IT8718F/IT8720F) encode the core voltage value: the voltage level your processor should work with. This is hardcoded by diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 index b98e0e0d1910..239258a63c81 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 @@ -14,6 +14,10 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'adt7463' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e Datasheet: http://www.onsemi.com/PowerSolutions/product.do?id=ADT7463 + * Analog Devices ADT7468 + Prefix: 'adt7468' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e + Datasheet: http://www.onsemi.com/PowerSolutions/product.do?id=ADT7468 * SMSC EMC6D100, SMSC EMC6D101 Prefix: 'emc6d100' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e @@ -34,7 +38,7 @@ Description ----------- This driver implements support for the National Semiconductor LM85 and -compatible chips including the Analog Devices ADM1027, ADT7463 and +compatible chips including the Analog Devices ADM1027, ADT7463, ADT7468 and SMSC EMC6D10x chips family. The LM85 uses the 2-wire interface compatible with the SMBUS 2.0 @@ -87,14 +91,22 @@ To smooth the response of fans to changes in temperature, the LM85 has an optional filter for smoothing temperatures. The ADM1027 has the same config option but uses it to rate limit the changes to fan speed instead. -The ADM1027 and ADT7463 have a 10-bit ADC and can therefore measure -temperatures with 0.25 degC resolution. They also provide an offset to the -temperature readings that is automatically applied during measurement. -This offset can be used to zero out any errors due to traces and placement. -The documentation says that the offset is in 0.25 degC steps, but in -initial testing of the ADM1027 it was 1.00 degC steps. Analog Devices has -confirmed this "bug". The ADT7463 is reported to work as described in the -documentation. The current lm85 driver does not show the offset register. +The ADM1027, ADT7463 and ADT7468 have a 10-bit ADC and can therefore +measure temperatures with 0.25 degC resolution. They also provide an offset +to the temperature readings that is automatically applied during +measurement. This offset can be used to zero out any errors due to traces +and placement. The documentation says that the offset is in 0.25 degC +steps, but in initial testing of the ADM1027 it was 1.00 degC steps. Analog +Devices has confirmed this "bug". The ADT7463 is reported to work as +described in the documentation. The current lm85 driver does not show the +offset register. + +The ADT7468 has a high-frequency PWM mode, where all PWM outputs are +driven by a 22.5 kHz clock. This is a global mode, not per-PWM output, +which means that setting any PWM frequency above 11.3 kHz will switch +all 3 PWM outputs to a 22.5 kHz frequency. Conversely, setting any PWM +frequency below 11.3 kHz will switch all 3 PWM outputs to a frequency +between 10 and 100 Hz, which can then be tuned separately. See the vendor datasheets for more information. There is application note from National (AN-1260) with some additional information about the LM85. @@ -125,17 +137,17 @@ datasheet for a complete description of the differences. Other than identifying the chip, the driver behaves no differently with regard to these two chips. The LM85B is recommended for new designs. -The ADM1027 and ADT7463 chips have an optional SMBALERT output that can be -used to signal the chipset in case a limit is exceeded or the temperature -sensors fail. Individual sensor interrupts can be masked so they won't -trigger SMBALERT. The SMBALERT output if configured replaces one of the other -functions (PWM2 or IN0). This functionality is not implemented in current -driver. +The ADM1027, ADT7463 and ADT7468 chips have an optional SMBALERT output +that can be used to signal the chipset in case a limit is exceeded or the +temperature sensors fail. Individual sensor interrupts can be masked so +they won't trigger SMBALERT. The SMBALERT output if configured replaces one +of the other functions (PWM2 or IN0). This functionality is not implemented +in current driver. -The ADT7463 also has an optional THERM output/input which can be connected -to the processor PROC_HOT output. If available, the autofan control -dynamic Tmin feature can be enabled to keep the system temperature within -spec (just?!) with the least possible fan noise. +The ADT7463 and ADT7468 also have an optional THERM output/input which can +be connected to the processor PROC_HOT output. If available, the autofan +control dynamic Tmin feature can be enabled to keep the system temperature +within spec (just?!) with the least possible fan noise. Configuration Notes ------------------- @@ -201,8 +213,8 @@ the temperatures to compensate for systemic errors in the measurements. These features are not currently supported by the lm85 driver. -In addition to the ADM1027 features, the ADT7463 also has Tmin control -and THERM asserted counts. Automatic Tmin control acts to adjust the -Tmin value to maintain the measured temperature sensor at a specified -temperature. There isn't much documentation on this feature in the -ADT7463 data sheet. This is not supported by current driver. +In addition to the ADM1027 features, the ADT7463 and ADT7468 also have +Tmin control and THERM asserted counts. Automatic Tmin control acts to +adjust the Tmin value to maintain the measured temperature sensor at a +specified temperature. There isn't much documentation on this feature in +the ADT7463 data sheet. This is not supported by current driver. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 index 6a03dd4bcc94..fa475c0a48a3 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 @@ -63,8 +63,8 @@ Supported chips: Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/2578 * Maxim MAX6659 - Prefix: 'max6657' - Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c, 0x4d (unsupported 0x4e) + Prefix: 'max6659' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c, 0x4d, 0x4e Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/2578 * Maxim MAX6680 @@ -84,6 +84,21 @@ Supported chips: Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/3500 + * Maxim MAX6695 + Prefix: 'max6695' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website + http://www.maxim-ic.com/datasheet/index.mvp/id/4199 + * Maxim MAX6696 + Prefix: 'max6695' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18, 0x19, 0x1a, 0x29, 0x2a, 0x2b, + 0x4c, 0x4d and 0x4e + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website + http://www.maxim-ic.com/datasheet/index.mvp/id/4199 + * Winbond/Nuvoton W83L771W/G + Prefix: 'w83l771' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c + Datasheet: No longer available * Winbond/Nuvoton W83L771AWG/ASG Prefix: 'w83l771' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c @@ -101,10 +116,11 @@ well as the temperature of up to one external diode. It is compatible with many other devices, many of which are supported by this driver. Note that there is no easy way to differentiate between the MAX6657, -MAX6658 and MAX6659 variants. The extra address and features of the -MAX6659 are not supported by this driver. The MAX6680 and MAX6681 only -differ in their pinout, therefore they obviously can't (and don't need to) -be distinguished. +MAX6658 and MAX6659 variants. The extra features of the MAX6659 are only +supported by this driver if the chip is located at address 0x4d or 0x4e, +or if the chip type is explicitly selected as max6659. +The MAX6680 and MAX6681 only differ in their pinout, therefore they obviously +can't (and don't need to) be distinguished. The specificity of this family of chipsets over the ADM1021/LM84 family is that it features critical limits with hysteresis, and an @@ -151,11 +167,21 @@ MAX6680 and MAX6681: * Selectable address * Remote sensor type selection +MAX6695 and MAX6696: + * Better local resolution + * Selectable address (max6696) + * Second critical temperature limit + * Two remote sensors + +W83L771W/G + * The G variant is lead-free, otherwise similar to the W. + * Filter and alert configuration register at 0xBF + * Moving average (depending on conversion rate) + W83L771AWG/ASG + * Successor of the W83L771W/G, same features. * The AWG and ASG variants only differ in package format. - * Filter and alert configuration register at 0xBF * Diode ideality factor configuration (remote sensor) at 0xE3 - * Moving average (depending on conversion rate) All temperature values are given in degrees Celsius. Resolution is 1.0 degree for the local temperature, 0.125 degree for the remote diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm93 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm93 index ac711f357faf..7a10616d0b44 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm93 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm93 @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ Authors: Mark M. Hoffman <mhoffman@lightlink.com> Ported to 2.6 by Eric J. Bowersox <ericb@aspsys.com> Adapted to 2.6.20 by Carsten Emde <ce@osadl.org> - Modified for mainline integration by Hans J. Koch <hjk@linutronix.de> + Modified for mainline integration by Hans J. Koch <hjk@hansjkoch.de> Module Parameters ----------------- diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max6650 b/Documentation/hwmon/max6650 index 8be7beb9e3e8..c565650fcfc6 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/max6650 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max6650 @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ Supported chips: Datasheet: http://pdfserv.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX6650-MAX6651.pdf Authors: - Hans J. Koch <hjk@linutronix.de> + Hans J. Koch <hjk@hansjkoch.de> John Morris <john.morris@spirentcom.com> Claus Gindhart <claus.gindhart@kontron.com> diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/pcf8591 b/Documentation/hwmon/pcf8591 index e76a7892f68e..ac020b3bb7b3 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/pcf8591 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/pcf8591 @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ Kernel driver pcf8591 Supported chips: * Philips/NXP PCF8591 Prefix: 'pcf8591' - Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f + Addresses scanned: none Datasheet: Publicly available at the NXP website http://www.nxp.com/pip/PCF8591_6.html @@ -58,18 +58,16 @@ Module parameters Accessing PCF8591 via /sys interface ------------------------------------- -! Be careful ! -The PCF8591 is plainly impossible to detect! Stupid chip. -So every chip with address in the interval [0x48..0x4f] is -detected as PCF8591. If you have other chips in this address -range, the workaround is to load this module after the one -for your others chips. +The PCF8591 is plainly impossible to detect! Thus the driver won't even +try. You have to explicitly instantiate the device at the relevant +address (in the interval [0x48..0x4f]) either through platform data, or +using the sysfs interface. See Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices +for details. -On detection (i.e. insmod, modprobe et al.), directories are being -created for each detected PCF8591: +Directories are being created for each instantiated PCF8591: /sys/bus/i2c/devices/<0>-<1>/ -where <0> is the bus the chip was detected on (e. g. i2c-0) +where <0> is the bus the chip is connected to (e. g. i2c-0) and <1> the chip address ([48..4f]) Inside these directories, there are such files: diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/sht21 b/Documentation/hwmon/sht21 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..db17fda45c3e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/sht21 @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +Kernel driver sht21 +=================== + +Supported chips: + * Sensirion SHT21 + Prefix: 'sht21' + Addresses scanned: none + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Sensirion website + http://www.sensirion.com/en/pdf/product_information/Datasheet-humidity-sensor-SHT21.pdf + + * Sensirion SHT25 + Prefix: 'sht21' + Addresses scanned: none + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Sensirion website + http://www.sensirion.com/en/pdf/product_information/Datasheet-humidity-sensor-SHT25.pdf + +Author: + Urs Fleisch <urs.fleisch@sensirion.com> + +Description +----------- + +The SHT21 and SHT25 are humidity and temperature sensors in a DFN package of +only 3 x 3 mm footprint and 1.1 mm height. The difference between the two +devices is the higher level of precision of the SHT25 (1.8% relative humidity, +0.2 degree Celsius) compared with the SHT21 (2.0% relative humidity, +0.3 degree Celsius). + +The devices communicate with the I2C protocol. All sensors are set to the same +I2C address 0x40, so an entry with I2C_BOARD_INFO("sht21", 0x40) can be used +in the board setup code. + +sysfs-Interface +--------------- + +temp1_input - temperature input +humidity1_input - humidity input + +Notes +----- + +The driver uses the default resolution settings of 12 bit for humidity and 14 +bit for temperature, which results in typical measurement times of 22 ms for +humidity and 66 ms for temperature. To keep self heating below 0.1 degree +Celsius, the device should not be active for more than 10% of the time, +e.g. maximum two measurements per second at the given resolution. + +Different resolutions, the on-chip heater, using the CRC checksum and reading +the serial number are not supported yet. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface index 48ceabedf55d..c6559f153589 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface @@ -309,6 +309,20 @@ temp[1-*]_crit_hyst from the critical value. RW +temp[1-*]_emergency + Temperature emergency max value, for chips supporting more than + two upper temperature limits. Must be equal or greater than + corresponding temp_crit values. + Unit: millidegree Celsius + RW + +temp[1-*]_emergency_hyst + Temperature hysteresis value for emergency limit. + Unit: millidegree Celsius + Must be reported as an absolute temperature, NOT a delta + from the emergency value. + RW + temp[1-*]_lcrit Temperature critical min value, typically lower than corresponding temp_min values. Unit: millidegree Celsius @@ -370,10 +384,20 @@ curr[1-*]_min Current min value. Unit: milliampere RW +curr[1-*]_lcrit Current critical low value + Unit: milliampere + RW + +curr[1-*]_crit Current critical high value. + Unit: milliampere + RW + curr[1-*]_input Current input value Unit: milliampere RO +Also see the Alarms section for status flags associated with currents. + ********* * Power * ********* @@ -436,13 +460,6 @@ power[1-*]_accuracy Accuracy of the power meter. Unit: Percent RO -power[1-*]_alarm 1 if the system is drawing more power than the - cap allows; 0 otherwise. A poll notification is - sent to this file when the power use exceeds the - cap. This file only appears if the cap is known - to be enforced by hardware. - RO - power[1-*]_cap If power use rises above this limit, the system should take action to reduce power use. A poll notification is sent to this file if the @@ -465,6 +482,20 @@ power[1-*]_cap_min Minimum cap that can be set. Unit: microWatt RO +power[1-*]_max Maximum power. + Unit: microWatt + RW + +power[1-*]_crit Critical maximum power. + If power rises to or above this limit, the + system is expected take drastic action to reduce + power consumption, such as a system shutdown or + a forced powerdown of some devices. + Unit: microWatt + RW + +Also see the Alarms section for status flags associated with power readings. + ********** * Energy * ********** @@ -474,6 +505,15 @@ energy[1-*]_input Cumulative energy use RO +************ +* Humidity * +************ + +humidity[1-*]_input Humidity + Unit: milli-percent (per cent mille, pcm) + RO + + ********** * Alarms * ********** @@ -487,6 +527,7 @@ implementation. in[0-*]_alarm curr[1-*]_alarm +power[1-*]_alarm fan[1-*]_alarm temp[1-*]_alarm Channel alarm @@ -498,13 +539,22 @@ OR in[0-*]_min_alarm in[0-*]_max_alarm +in[0-*]_lcrit_alarm +in[0-*]_crit_alarm curr[1-*]_min_alarm curr[1-*]_max_alarm +curr[1-*]_lcrit_alarm +curr[1-*]_crit_alarm +power[1-*]_cap_alarm +power[1-*]_max_alarm +power[1-*]_crit_alarm fan[1-*]_min_alarm fan[1-*]_max_alarm temp[1-*]_min_alarm temp[1-*]_max_alarm +temp[1-*]_lcrit_alarm temp[1-*]_crit_alarm +temp[1-*]_emergency_alarm Limit alarm 0: no alarm 1: alarm diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf b/Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf index fb145e5e722a..8432e1118173 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf @@ -91,3 +91,25 @@ isaset -y -f 0x2e 0xaa The above sequence assumes a Super-I/O config space at 0x2e/0x2f, but 0x4e/0x4f is also possible. + +Voltage pin mapping +------------------- + +Here is a summary of the voltage pin mapping for the W83627THF. This +can be useful to convert data provided by board manufacturers into +working libsensors configuration statements. + + W83627THF | + Pin | Name | Register | Sysfs attribute +----------------------------------------------------- + 100 | CPUVCORE | 20h | in0 + 99 | VIN0 | 21h | in1 + 98 | VIN1 | 22h | in2 + 97 | VIN2 | 24h | in4 + 114 | AVCC | 23h | in3 + 61 | 5VSB | 50h (bank 5) | in7 + 74 | VBAT | 51h (bank 5) | in8 + +For other supported devices, you'll have to take the hard path and +look up the information in the datasheet yourself (and then add it +to this document please.) diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83793 b/Documentation/hwmon/w83793 index 51171a83165b..6cc5f639b721 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83793 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83793 @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ This driver implements support for Winbond W83793G/W83793R chips. * Chassis If the case open alarm triggers, it will stay in this state unless cleared - by any write to the sysfs file "chassis". + by writing 0 to the sysfs file "intrusion0_alarm". * VID and VRM The VRM version is detected automatically, don't modify the it unless you diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 index e307914a3eda..93fe76e56522 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 +++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 @@ -15,10 +15,14 @@ Supported adapters: * Intel 82801I (ICH9) * Intel EP80579 (Tolapai) * Intel 82801JI (ICH10) - * Intel 3400/5 Series (PCH) + * Intel 5/3400 Series (PCH) * Intel Cougar Point (PCH) + * Intel Patsburg (PCH) Datasheets: Publicly available at the Intel website +On Intel Patsburg and later chipsets, both the normal host SMBus controller +and the additional 'Integrated Device Function' controllers are supported. + Authors: Mark Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com> Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/muxes/gpio-i2cmux b/Documentation/i2c/muxes/gpio-i2cmux new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..811cd78d4cdc --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/muxes/gpio-i2cmux @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ +Kernel driver gpio-i2cmux + +Author: Peter Korsgaard <peter.korsgaard@barco.com> + +Description +----------- + +gpio-i2cmux is an i2c mux driver providing access to I2C bus segments +from a master I2C bus and a hardware MUX controlled through GPIO pins. + +E.G.: + + ---------- ---------- Bus segment 1 - - - - - + | | SCL/SDA | |-------------- | | + | |------------| | + | | | | Bus segment 2 | | + | Linux | GPIO 1..N | MUX |--------------- Devices + | |------------| | | | + | | | | Bus segment M + | | | |---------------| | + ---------- ---------- - - - - - + +SCL/SDA of the master I2C bus is multiplexed to bus segment 1..M +according to the settings of the GPIO pins 1..N. + +Usage +----- + +gpio-i2cmux uses the platform bus, so you need to provide a struct +platform_device with the platform_data pointing to a struct +gpio_i2cmux_platform_data with the I2C adapter number of the master +bus, the number of bus segments to create and the GPIO pins used +to control it. See include/linux/gpio-i2cmux.h for details. + +E.G. something like this for a MUX providing 4 bus segments +controlled through 3 GPIO pins: + +#include <linux/gpio-i2cmux.h> +#include <linux/platform_device.h> + +static const unsigned myboard_gpiomux_gpios[] = { + AT91_PIN_PC26, AT91_PIN_PC25, AT91_PIN_PC24 +}; + +static const unsigned myboard_gpiomux_values[] = { + 0, 1, 2, 3 +}; + +static struct gpio_i2cmux_platform_data myboard_i2cmux_data = { + .parent = 1, + .base_nr = 2, /* optional */ + .values = myboard_gpiomux_values, + .n_values = ARRAY_SIZE(myboard_gpiomux_values), + .gpios = myboard_gpiomux_gpios, + .n_gpios = ARRAY_SIZE(myboard_gpiomux_gpios), + .idle = 4, /* optional */ +}; + +static struct platform_device myboard_i2cmux = { + .name = "gpio-i2cmux", + .id = 0, + .dev = { + .platform_data = &myboard_i2cmux_data, + }, +}; diff --git a/Documentation/input/cma3000_d0x.txt b/Documentation/input/cma3000_d0x.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..29d088db4afd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/input/cma3000_d0x.txt @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ +Kernel driver for CMA3000-D0x +============================ + +Supported chips: +* VTI CMA3000-D0x +Datasheet: + CMA3000-D0X Product Family Specification 8281000A.02.pdf + <http://www.vti.fi/en/> + +Author: Hemanth V <hemanthv@ti.com> + + +Description +----------- +CMA3000 Tri-axis accelerometer supports Motion detect, Measurement and +Free fall modes. + +Motion Detect Mode: Its the low power mode where interrupts are generated only +when motion exceeds the defined thresholds. + +Measurement Mode: This mode is used to read the acceleration data on X,Y,Z +axis and supports 400, 100, 40 Hz sample frequency. + +Free fall Mode: This mode is intended to save system resources. + +Threshold values: Chip supports defining threshold values for above modes +which includes time and g value. Refer product specifications for more details. + +CMA3000 chip supports mutually exclusive I2C and SPI interfaces for +communication, currently the driver supports I2C based communication only. +Initial configuration for bus mode is set in non volatile memory and can later +be modified through bus interface command. + +Driver reports acceleration data through input subsystem. It generates ABS_MISC +event with value 1 when free fall is detected. + +Platform data need to be configured for initial default values. + +Platform Data +------------- +fuzz_x: Noise on X Axis + +fuzz_y: Noise on Y Axis + +fuzz_z: Noise on Z Axis + +g_range: G range in milli g i.e 2000 or 8000 + +mode: Default Operating mode + +mdthr: Motion detect g range threshold value + +mdfftmr: Motion detect and free fall time threshold value + +ffthr: Free fall g range threshold value + +Input Interface +-------------- +Input driver version is 1.0.0 +Input device ID: bus 0x18 vendor 0x0 product 0x0 version 0x0 +Input device name: "cma3000-accelerometer" +Supported events: + Event type 0 (Sync) + Event type 3 (Absolute) + Event code 0 (X) + Value 47 + Min -8000 + Max 8000 + Fuzz 200 + Event code 1 (Y) + Value -28 + Min -8000 + Max 8000 + Fuzz 200 + Event code 2 (Z) + Value 905 + Min -8000 + Max 8000 + Fuzz 200 + Event code 40 (Misc) + Value 0 + Min 0 + Max 1 + Event type 4 (Misc) + + +Register/Platform parameters Description +---------------------------------------- + +mode: + 0: power down mode + 1: 100 Hz Measurement mode + 2: 400 Hz Measurement mode + 3: 40 Hz Measurement mode + 4: Motion Detect mode (default) + 5: 100 Hz Free fall mode + 6: 40 Hz Free fall mode + 7: Power off mode + +grange: + 2000: 2000 mg or 2G Range + 8000: 8000 mg or 8G Range + +mdthr: + X: X * 71mg (8G Range) + X: X * 18mg (2G Range) + +mdfftmr: + X: (X & 0x70) * 100 ms (MDTMR) + (X & 0x0F) * 2.5 ms (FFTMR 400 Hz) + (X & 0x0F) * 10 ms (FFTMR 100 Hz) + +ffthr: + X: (X >> 2) * 18mg (2G Range) + X: (X & 0x0F) * 71 mg (8G Range) diff --git a/Documentation/input/ff.txt b/Documentation/input/ff.txt index ded4d5f53109..b3867bf49f8f 100644 --- a/Documentation/input/ff.txt +++ b/Documentation/input/ff.txt @@ -49,7 +49,9 @@ This information is subject to change. #include <linux/input.h> #include <sys/ioctl.h> -unsigned long features[1 + FF_MAX/sizeof(unsigned long)]; +#define BITS_TO_LONGS(x) \ + (((x) + 8 * sizeof (unsigned long) - 1) / (8 * sizeof (unsigned long))) +unsigned long features[BITS_TO_LONGS(FF_CNT)]; int ioctl(int file_descriptor, int request, unsigned long *features); "request" must be EVIOCGBIT(EV_FF, size of features array in bytes ) diff --git a/Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.txt b/Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.txt index bdcba154b83e..71536e78406f 100644 --- a/Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.txt +++ b/Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.txt @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Multi-touch (MT) Protocol ------------------------- - Copyright (C) 2009 Henrik Rydberg <rydberg@euromail.se> + Copyright (C) 2009-2010 Henrik Rydberg <rydberg@euromail.se> Introduction @@ -161,19 +161,24 @@ against the glass. The inner region will increase, and in general, the ratio ABS_MT_TOUCH_MAJOR / ABS_MT_WIDTH_MAJOR, which is always smaller than unity, is related to the contact pressure. For pressure-based devices, ABS_MT_PRESSURE may be used to provide the pressure on the contact area -instead. +instead. Devices capable of contact hovering can use ABS_MT_DISTANCE to +indicate the distance between the contact and the surface. In addition to the MAJOR parameters, the oval shape of the contact can be described by adding the MINOR parameters, such that MAJOR and MINOR are the major and minor axis of an ellipse. Finally, the orientation of the oval shape can be describe with the ORIENTATION parameter. +For type A devices, further specification of the touch shape is possible +via ABS_MT_BLOB_ID. + The ABS_MT_TOOL_TYPE may be used to specify whether the touching tool is a -contact or a pen or something else. Devices with more granular information -may specify general shapes as blobs, i.e., as a sequence of rectangular -shapes grouped together by an ABS_MT_BLOB_ID. Finally, for the few devices -that currently support it, the ABS_MT_TRACKING_ID event may be used to -report contact tracking from hardware [5]. +finger or a pen or something else. Finally, the ABS_MT_TRACKING_ID event +may be used to track identified contacts over time [5]. + +In the type B protocol, ABS_MT_TOOL_TYPE and ABS_MT_TRACKING_ID are +implicitly handled by input core; drivers should instead call +input_mt_report_slot_state(). Event Semantics @@ -213,6 +218,12 @@ The pressure, in arbitrary units, on the contact area. May be used instead of TOUCH and WIDTH for pressure-based devices or any device with a spatial signal intensity distribution. +ABS_MT_DISTANCE + +The distance, in surface units, between the contact and the surface. Zero +distance means the contact is touching the surface. A positive number means +the contact is hovering above the surface. + ABS_MT_ORIENTATION The orientation of the ellipse. The value should describe a signed quarter @@ -240,21 +251,24 @@ ABS_MT_TOOL_TYPE The type of approaching tool. A lot of kernel drivers cannot distinguish between different tool types, such as a finger or a pen. In such cases, the event should be omitted. The protocol currently supports MT_TOOL_FINGER and -MT_TOOL_PEN [2]. +MT_TOOL_PEN [2]. For type B devices, this event is handled by input core; +drivers should instead use input_mt_report_slot_state(). ABS_MT_BLOB_ID The BLOB_ID groups several packets together into one arbitrarily shaped -contact. This is a low-level anonymous grouping for type A devices, and +contact. The sequence of points forms a polygon which defines the shape of +the contact. This is a low-level anonymous grouping for type A devices, and should not be confused with the high-level trackingID [5]. Most type A devices do not have blob capability, so drivers can safely omit this event. ABS_MT_TRACKING_ID The TRACKING_ID identifies an initiated contact throughout its life cycle -[5]. This event is mandatory for type B devices. The value range of the -TRACKING_ID should be large enough to ensure unique identification of a -contact maintained over an extended period of time. +[5]. The value range of the TRACKING_ID should be large enough to ensure +unique identification of a contact maintained over an extended period of +time. For type B devices, this event is handled by input core; drivers +should instead use input_mt_report_slot_state(). Event Computation @@ -301,18 +315,19 @@ and with ORIENTATION, one can detect twisting of fingers. Notes ----- -In order to stay compatible with existing applications, the data -reported in a finger packet must not be recognized as single-touch -events. In addition, all finger data must bypass input filtering, -since subsequent events of the same type refer to different fingers. +In order to stay compatible with existing applications, the data reported +in a finger packet must not be recognized as single-touch events. + +For type A devices, all finger data bypasses input filtering, since +subsequent events of the same type refer to different fingers. -The first kernel driver to utilize the MT protocol is the bcm5974 driver, -where examples can be found. +For example usage of the type A protocol, see the bcm5974 driver. For +example usage of the type B protocol, see the hid-egalax driver. [1] With the extension ABS_MT_APPROACH_X and ABS_MT_APPROACH_Y, the difference between the contact position and the approaching tool position could be used to derive tilt. [2] The list can of course be extended. -[3] Multitouch X driver project: http://bitmath.org/code/multitouch/. +[3] The mtdev project: http://bitmath.org/code/mtdev/. [4] See the section on event computation. [5] See the section on finger tracking. diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt index 33223ff121d8..ac293e955308 100644 --- a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt +++ b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt @@ -155,7 +155,6 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments 'Q' all linux/soundcard.h 'R' 00-1F linux/random.h conflict! 'R' 01 linux/rfkill.h conflict! -'R' 01-0F media/rds.h conflict! 'R' C0-DF net/bluetooth/rfcomm.h 'S' all linux/cdrom.h conflict! 'S' 80-81 scsi/scsi_ioctl.h conflict! @@ -194,7 +193,6 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments <http://lrcwww.epfl.ch/> 'b' 00-FF conflict! bit3 vme host bridge <mailto:natalia@nikhefk.nikhef.nl> -'b' 00-0F media/bt819.h conflict! 'c' all linux/cm4000_cs.h conflict! 'c' 00-7F linux/comstats.h conflict! 'c' 00-7F linux/coda.h conflict! @@ -249,7 +247,7 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments 'p' 40-7F linux/nvram.h 'p' 80-9F linux/ppdev.h user-space parport <mailto:tim@cyberelk.net> -'p' A1-A4 linux/pps.h LinuxPPS +'p' A1-A5 linux/pps.h LinuxPPS <mailto:giometti@linux.it> 'q' 00-1F linux/serio.h 'q' 80-FF linux/telephony.h Internet PhoneJACK, Internet LineJACK @@ -259,15 +257,12 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments 't' 00-7F linux/if_ppp.h 't' 80-8F linux/isdn_ppp.h 't' 90 linux/toshiba.h -'u' 00-1F linux/smb_fs.h -'v' all linux/videodev.h conflict! +'u' 00-1F linux/smb_fs.h gone 'v' 00-1F linux/ext2_fs.h conflict! 'v' 00-1F linux/fs.h conflict! 'v' 00-0F linux/sonypi.h conflict! -'v' C0-CF drivers/media/video/ov511.h conflict! 'v' C0-DF media/pwc-ioctl.h conflict! 'v' C0-FF linux/meye.h conflict! -'v' C0-CF drivers/media/video/zoran/zoran.h conflict! 'v' D0-DF drivers/media/video/cpia2/cpia2dev.h conflict! 'w' all CERN SCI driver 'y' 00-1F packet based user level communications @@ -278,8 +273,6 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments <mailto:oe@port.de> 'z' 10-4F drivers/s390/crypto/zcrypt_api.h conflict! 0x80 00-1F linux/fb.h -0x81 00-1F linux/videotext.h -0x88 00-3F media/ovcamchip.h 0x89 00-06 arch/x86/include/asm/sockios.h 0x89 0B-DF linux/sockios.h 0x89 E0-EF linux/sockios.h SIOCPROTOPRIVATE range diff --git a/Documentation/iostats.txt b/Documentation/iostats.txt index 59a69ec67c40..f6dece5b7014 100644 --- a/Documentation/iostats.txt +++ b/Documentation/iostats.txt @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Field 9 -- # of I/Os currently in progress The only field that should go to zero. Incremented as requests are given to appropriate struct request_queue and decremented as they finish. Field 10 -- # of milliseconds spent doing I/Os - This field is increases so long as field 9 is nonzero. + This field increases so long as field 9 is nonzero. Field 11 -- weighted # of milliseconds spent doing I/Os This field is incremented at each I/O start, I/O completion, I/O merge, or read of these stats by the number of I/Os in progress diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt index 1e5165aa9e4e..4a990317b84a 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt @@ -73,6 +73,14 @@ Specify the output directory when building the kernel. The output directory can also be specified using "O=...". Setting "O=..." takes precedence over KBUILD_OUTPUT. +KBUILD_DEBARCH +-------------------------------------------------- +For the deb-pkg target, allows overriding the normal heuristics deployed by +deb-pkg. Normally deb-pkg attempts to guess the right architecture based on +the UTS_MACHINE variable, and on some architectures also the kernel config. +The value of KBUILD_DEBARCH is assumed (not checked) to be a valid Debian +architecture. + ARCH -------------------------------------------------- Set ARCH to the architecture to be built. diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt index b472e4e0ba67..b507d61fd41c 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt @@ -112,7 +112,6 @@ applicable everywhere (see syntax). (no prompts anywhere) and for symbols with no dependencies. That will limit the usefulness but on the other hand avoid the illegal configurations all over. - kconfig should one day warn about such things. - numerical ranges: "range" <symbol> <symbol> ["if" <expr>] This allows to limit the range of possible input values for int @@ -268,7 +267,7 @@ separate list of options. choices: - "choice" + "choice" [symbol] <choice options> <choice block> "endchoice" @@ -282,6 +281,10 @@ single driver can be compiled/loaded into the kernel, but all drivers can be compiled as modules. A choice accepts another option "optional", which allows to set the choice to 'n' and no entry needs to be selected. +If no [symbol] is associated with a choice, then you can not have multiple +definitions of that choice. If a [symbol] is associated to the choice, +then you may define the same choice (ie. with the same entries) in another +place. comment: @@ -322,7 +325,8 @@ mainmenu: "mainmenu" <prompt> This sets the config program's title bar if the config program chooses -to use it. +to use it. It should be placed at the top of the configuration, before any +other statement. Kconfig hints diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt index c787ae512120..86e3cd0d26a0 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt @@ -776,6 +776,13 @@ This will delete the directory debian, including all subdirectories. Kbuild will assume the directories to be in the same relative path as the Makefile if no absolute path is specified (path does not start with '/'). +To exclude certain files from make clean, use the $(no-clean-files) variable. +This is only a special case used in the top level Kbuild file: + + Example: + #Kbuild + no-clean-files := $(bounds-file) $(offsets-file) + Usually kbuild descends down in subdirectories due to "obj-* := dir/", but in the architecture makefiles where the kbuild infrastructure is not sufficient this sometimes needs to be explicit. @@ -1129,6 +1136,21 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly): resulting in the target file being recompiled for no obvious reason. + dtc + Create flattend device tree blob object suitable for linking + into vmlinux. Device tree blobs linked into vmlinux are placed + in an init section in the image. Platform code *must* copy the + blob to non-init memory prior to calling unflatten_device_tree(). + + Example: + #arch/x86/platform/ce4100/Makefile + clean-files := *dtb.S + + DTC_FLAGS := -p 1024 + obj-y += foo.dtb.o + + $(obj)/%.dtb: $(src)/%.dts + $(call cmd,dtc) --- 6.7 Custom kbuild commands diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt index 0767cf69c69e..3fb39e0116b4 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt @@ -1,215 +1,185 @@ +Building External Modules -In this document you will find information about: -- how to build external modules -- how to make your module use the kbuild infrastructure -- how kbuild will install a kernel -- how to install modules in a non-standard location +This document describes how to build an out-of-tree kernel module. === Table of Contents === 1 Introduction - === 2 How to build external modules - --- 2.1 Building external modules - --- 2.2 Available targets - --- 2.3 Available options - --- 2.4 Preparing the kernel tree for module build - --- 2.5 Building separate files for a module - === 3. Example commands - === 4. Creating a kbuild file for an external module - === 5. Include files - --- 5.1 How to include files from the kernel include dir - --- 5.2 External modules using an include/ dir - --- 5.3 External modules using several directories - === 6. Module installation - --- 6.1 INSTALL_MOD_PATH - --- 6.2 INSTALL_MOD_DIR - === 7. Module versioning & Module.symvers - --- 7.1 Symbols from the kernel (vmlinux + modules) - --- 7.2 Symbols and external modules - --- 7.3 Symbols from another external module - === 8. Tips & Tricks - --- 8.1 Testing for CONFIG_FOO_BAR + === 2 How to Build External Modules + --- 2.1 Command Syntax + --- 2.2 Options + --- 2.3 Targets + --- 2.4 Building Separate Files + === 3. Creating a Kbuild File for an External Module + --- 3.1 Shared Makefile + --- 3.2 Separate Kbuild file and Makefile + --- 3.3 Binary Blobs + --- 3.4 Building Multiple Modules + === 4. Include Files + --- 4.1 Kernel Includes + --- 4.2 Single Subdirectory + --- 4.3 Several Subdirectories + === 5. Module Installation + --- 5.1 INSTALL_MOD_PATH + --- 5.2 INSTALL_MOD_DIR + === 6. Module Versioning + --- 6.1 Symbols From the Kernel (vmlinux + modules) + --- 6.2 Symbols and External Modules + --- 6.3 Symbols From Another External Module + === 7. Tips & Tricks + --- 7.1 Testing for CONFIG_FOO_BAR === 1. Introduction -kbuild includes functionality for building modules both -within the kernel source tree and outside the kernel source tree. -The latter is usually referred to as external or "out-of-tree" -modules and is used both during development and for modules that -are not planned to be included in the kernel tree. +"kbuild" is the build system used by the Linux kernel. Modules must use +kbuild to stay compatible with changes in the build infrastructure and +to pick up the right flags to "gcc." Functionality for building modules +both in-tree and out-of-tree is provided. The method for building +either is similar, and all modules are initially developed and built +out-of-tree. -What is covered within this file is mainly information to authors -of modules. The author of an external module should supply -a makefile that hides most of the complexity, so one only has to type -'make' to build the module. A complete example will be presented in -chapter 4, "Creating a kbuild file for an external module". +Covered in this document is information aimed at developers interested +in building out-of-tree (or "external") modules. The author of an +external module should supply a makefile that hides most of the +complexity, so one only has to type "make" to build the module. This is +easily accomplished, and a complete example will be presented in +section 3. -=== 2. How to build external modules +=== 2. How to Build External Modules -kbuild offers functionality to build external modules, with the -prerequisite that there is a pre-built kernel available with full source. -A subset of the targets available when building the kernel is available -when building an external module. +To build external modules, you must have a prebuilt kernel available +that contains the configuration and header files used in the build. +Also, the kernel must have been built with modules enabled. If you are +using a distribution kernel, there will be a package for the kernel you +are running provided by your distribution. ---- 2.1 Building external modules +An alternative is to use the "make" target "modules_prepare." This will +make sure the kernel contains the information required. The target +exists solely as a simple way to prepare a kernel source tree for +building external modules. - Use the following command to build an external module: +NOTE: "modules_prepare" will not build Module.symvers even if +CONFIG_MODVERSIONS is set; therefore, a full kernel build needs to be +executed to make module versioning work. - make -C <path-to-kernel> M=`pwd` +--- 2.1 Command Syntax - For the running kernel use: + The command to build an external module is: - make -C /lib/modules/`uname -r`/build M=`pwd` + $ make -C <path_to_kernel_src> M=$PWD - For the above command to succeed, the kernel must have been - built with modules enabled. + The kbuild system knows that an external module is being built + due to the "M=<dir>" option given in the command. - To install the modules that were just built: + To build against the running kernel use: - make -C <path-to-kernel> M=`pwd` modules_install + $ make -C /lib/modules/`uname -r`/build M=$PWD - More complex examples will be shown later, the above should - be enough to get you started. + Then to install the module(s) just built, add the target + "modules_install" to the command: ---- 2.2 Available targets + $ make -C /lib/modules/`uname -r`/build M=$PWD modules_install - $KDIR refers to the path to the kernel source top-level directory +--- 2.2 Options - make -C $KDIR M=`pwd` - Will build the module(s) located in current directory. - All output files will be located in the same directory - as the module source. - No attempts are made to update the kernel source, and it is - a precondition that a successful make has been executed - for the kernel. + ($KDIR refers to the path of the kernel source directory.) - make -C $KDIR M=`pwd` modules - The modules target is implied when no target is given. - Same functionality as if no target was specified. - See description above. + make -C $KDIR M=$PWD - make -C $KDIR M=`pwd` modules_install - Install the external module(s). - Installation default is in /lib/modules/<kernel-version>/extra, - but may be prefixed with INSTALL_MOD_PATH - see separate - chapter. + -C $KDIR + The directory where the kernel source is located. + "make" will actually change to the specified directory + when executing and will change back when finished. - make -C $KDIR M=`pwd` clean - Remove all generated files for the module - the kernel - source directory is not modified. + M=$PWD + Informs kbuild that an external module is being built. + The value given to "M" is the absolute path of the + directory where the external module (kbuild file) is + located. - make -C $KDIR M=`pwd` help - help will list the available target when building external - modules. +--- 2.3 Targets ---- 2.3 Available options: + When building an external module, only a subset of the "make" + targets are available. - $KDIR refers to the path to the kernel source top-level directory + make -C $KDIR M=$PWD [target] - make -C $KDIR - Used to specify where to find the kernel source. - '$KDIR' represent the directory where the kernel source is. - Make will actually change directory to the specified directory - when executed but change back when finished. + The default will build the module(s) located in the current + directory, so a target does not need to be specified. All + output files will also be generated in this directory. No + attempts are made to update the kernel source, and it is a + precondition that a successful "make" has been executed for the + kernel. - make -C $KDIR M=`pwd` - M= is used to tell kbuild that an external module is - being built. - The option given to M= is the directory where the external - module (kbuild file) is located. - When an external module is being built only a subset of the - usual targets are available. + modules + The default target for external modules. It has the + same functionality as if no target was specified. See + description above. - make -C $KDIR SUBDIRS=`pwd` - Same as M=. The SUBDIRS= syntax is kept for backwards - compatibility. + modules_install + Install the external module(s). The default location is + /lib/modules/<kernel_release>/extra/, but a prefix may + be added with INSTALL_MOD_PATH (discussed in section 5). ---- 2.4 Preparing the kernel tree for module build + clean + Remove all generated files in the module directory only. - To make sure the kernel contains the information required to - build external modules the target 'modules_prepare' must be used. - 'modules_prepare' exists solely as a simple way to prepare - a kernel source tree for building external modules. - Note: modules_prepare will not build Module.symvers even if - CONFIG_MODVERSIONS is set. Therefore a full kernel build - needs to be executed to make module versioning work. + help + List the available targets for external modules. ---- 2.5 Building separate files for a module - It is possible to build single files which are part of a module. - This works equally well for the kernel, a module and even for - external modules. - Examples (module foo.ko, consist of bar.o, baz.o): - make -C $KDIR M=`pwd` bar.lst - make -C $KDIR M=`pwd` bar.o - make -C $KDIR M=`pwd` foo.ko - make -C $KDIR M=`pwd` / - - -=== 3. Example commands - -This example shows the actual commands to be executed when building -an external module for the currently running kernel. -In the example below, the distribution is supposed to use the -facility to locate output files for a kernel compile in a different -directory than the kernel source - but the examples will also work -when the source and the output files are mixed in the same directory. +--- 2.4 Building Separate Files -# Kernel source -/lib/modules/<kernel-version>/source -> /usr/src/linux-<version> - -# Output from kernel compile -/lib/modules/<kernel-version>/build -> /usr/src/linux-<version>-up - -Change to the directory where the kbuild file is located and execute -the following commands to build the module: + It is possible to build single files that are part of a module. + This works equally well for the kernel, a module, and even for + external modules. - cd /home/user/src/module - make -C /usr/src/`uname -r`/source \ - O=/lib/modules/`uname-r`/build \ - M=`pwd` + Example (The module foo.ko, consist of bar.o and baz.o): + make -C $KDIR M=$PWD bar.lst + make -C $KDIR M=$PWD baz.o + make -C $KDIR M=$PWD foo.ko + make -C $KDIR M=$PWD / -Then, to install the module use the following command: - make -C /usr/src/`uname -r`/source \ - O=/lib/modules/`uname-r`/build \ - M=`pwd` \ - modules_install +=== 3. Creating a Kbuild File for an External Module -If you look closely you will see that this is the same command as -listed before - with the directories spelled out. +In the last section we saw the command to build a module for the +running kernel. The module is not actually built, however, because a +build file is required. Contained in this file will be the name of +the module(s) being built, along with the list of requisite source +files. The file may be as simple as a single line: -The above are rather long commands, and the following chapter -lists a few tricks to make it all easier. + obj-m := <module_name>.o +The kbuild system will build <module_name>.o from <module_name>.c, +and, after linking, will result in the kernel module <module_name>.ko. +The above line can be put in either a "Kbuild" file or a "Makefile." +When the module is built from multiple sources, an additional line is +needed listing the files: -=== 4. Creating a kbuild file for an external module + <module_name>-y := <src1>.o <src2>.o ... -kbuild is the build system for the kernel, and external modules -must use kbuild to stay compatible with changes in the build system -and to pick up the right flags to gcc etc. +NOTE: Further documentation describing the syntax used by kbuild is +located in Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt. -The kbuild file used as input shall follow the syntax described -in Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt. This chapter will introduce a few -more tricks to be used when dealing with external modules. +The examples below demonstrate how to create a build file for the +module 8123.ko, which is built from the following files: -In the following a Makefile will be created for a module with the -following files: 8123_if.c 8123_if.h 8123_pci.c 8123_bin.o_shipped <= Binary blob ---- 4.1 Shared Makefile for module and kernel +--- 3.1 Shared Makefile - An external module always includes a wrapper Makefile supporting - building the module using 'make' with no arguments. - The Makefile provided will most likely include additional - functionality such as test targets etc. and this part shall - be filtered away from kbuild since it may impact kbuild if - name clashes occurs. + An external module always includes a wrapper makefile that + supports building the module using "make" with no arguments. + This target is not used by kbuild; it is only for convenience. + Additional functionality, such as test targets, can be included + but should be filtered out from kbuild due to possible name + clashes. Example 1: --> filename: Makefile @@ -219,11 +189,11 @@ following files: 8123-y := 8123_if.o 8123_pci.o 8123_bin.o else - # Normal Makefile + # normal makefile + KDIR ?= /lib/modules/`uname -r`/build - KERNELDIR := /lib/modules/`uname -r`/build - all:: - $(MAKE) -C $(KERNELDIR) M=`pwd` $@ + default: + $(MAKE) -C $(KDIR) M=$$PWD # Module specific targets genbin: @@ -231,15 +201,20 @@ following files: endif - In example 1, the check for KERNELRELEASE is used to separate - the two parts of the Makefile. kbuild will only see the two - assignments whereas make will see everything except the two - kbuild assignments. + The check for KERNELRELEASE is used to separate the two parts + of the makefile. In the example, kbuild will only see the two + assignments, whereas "make" will see everything except these + two assignments. This is due to two passes made on the file: + the first pass is by the "make" instance run on the command + line; the second pass is by the kbuild system, which is + initiated by the parameterized "make" in the default target. + +--- 3.2 Separate Kbuild File and Makefile - In recent versions of the kernel, kbuild will look for a file named - Kbuild and as second option look for a file named Makefile. - Utilising the Kbuild file makes us split up the Makefile in example 1 - into two files as shown in example 2: + In newer versions of the kernel, kbuild will first look for a + file named "Kbuild," and only if that is not found, will it + then look for a makefile. Utilizing a "Kbuild" file allows us + to split up the makefile from example 1 into two files: Example 2: --> filename: Kbuild @@ -247,20 +222,21 @@ following files: 8123-y := 8123_if.o 8123_pci.o 8123_bin.o --> filename: Makefile - KERNELDIR := /lib/modules/`uname -r`/build - all:: - $(MAKE) -C $(KERNELDIR) M=`pwd` $@ + KDIR ?= /lib/modules/`uname -r`/build + + default: + $(MAKE) -C $(KDIR) M=$$PWD # Module specific targets genbin: echo "X" > 8123_bin.o_shipped + The split in example 2 is questionable due to the simplicity of + each file; however, some external modules use makefiles + consisting of several hundred lines, and here it really pays + off to separate the kbuild part from the rest. - In example 2, we are down to two fairly simple files and for simple - files as used in this example the split is questionable. But some - external modules use Makefiles of several hundred lines and here it - really pays off to separate the kbuild part from the rest. - Example 3 shows a backward compatible version. + The next example shows a backward compatible version. Example 3: --> filename: Kbuild @@ -269,13 +245,15 @@ following files: --> filename: Makefile ifneq ($(KERNELRELEASE),) + # kbuild part of makefile include Kbuild + else - # Normal Makefile + # normal makefile + KDIR ?= /lib/modules/`uname -r`/build - KERNELDIR := /lib/modules/`uname -r`/build - all:: - $(MAKE) -C $(KERNELDIR) M=`pwd` $@ + default: + $(MAKE) -C $(KDIR) M=$$PWD # Module specific targets genbin: @@ -283,260 +261,271 @@ following files: endif - The trick here is to include the Kbuild file from Makefile, so - if an older version of kbuild picks up the Makefile, the Kbuild - file will be included. + Here the "Kbuild" file is included from the makefile. This + allows an older version of kbuild, which only knows of + makefiles, to be used when the "make" and kbuild parts are + split into separate files. ---- 4.2 Binary blobs included in a module +--- 3.3 Binary Blobs - Some external modules needs to include a .o as a blob. kbuild - has support for this, but requires the blob file to be named - <filename>_shipped. In our example the blob is named - 8123_bin.o_shipped and when the kbuild rules kick in the file - 8123_bin.o is created as a simple copy off the 8213_bin.o_shipped file - with the _shipped part stripped of the filename. - This allows the 8123_bin.o filename to be used in the assignment to - the module. + Some external modules need to include an object file as a blob. + kbuild has support for this, but requires the blob file to be + named <filename>_shipped. When the kbuild rules kick in, a copy + of <filename>_shipped is created with _shipped stripped off, + giving us <filename>. This shortened filename can be used in + the assignment to the module. + + Throughout this section, 8123_bin.o_shipped has been used to + build the kernel module 8123.ko; it has been included as + 8123_bin.o. - Example 4: - obj-m := 8123.o 8123-y := 8123_if.o 8123_pci.o 8123_bin.o - In example 4, there is no distinction between the ordinary .c/.h files - and the binary file. But kbuild will pick up different rules to create - the .o file. + Although there is no distinction between the ordinary source + files and the binary file, kbuild will pick up different rules + when creating the object file for the module. + +--- 3.4 Building Multiple Modules + kbuild supports building multiple modules with a single build + file. For example, if you wanted to build two modules, foo.ko + and bar.ko, the kbuild lines would be: -=== 5. Include files + obj-m := foo.o bar.o + foo-y := <foo_srcs> + bar-y := <bar_srcs> -Include files are a necessity when a .c file uses something from other .c -files (not strictly in the sense of C, but if good programming practice is -used). Any module that consists of more than one .c file will have a .h file -for one of the .c files. + It is that simple! -- If the .h file only describes a module internal interface, then the .h file - shall be placed in the same directory as the .c files. -- If the .h files describe an interface used by other parts of the kernel - located in different directories, the .h files shall be located in - include/linux/ or other include/ directories as appropriate. -One exception for this rule is larger subsystems that have their own directory -under include/ such as include/scsi. Another exception is arch-specific -.h files which are located under include/asm-$(ARCH)/*. +=== 4. Include Files -External modules have a tendency to locate include files in a separate include/ -directory and therefore need to deal with this in their kbuild file. +Within the kernel, header files are kept in standard locations +according to the following rule: ---- 5.1 How to include files from the kernel include dir + * If the header file only describes the internal interface of a + module, then the file is placed in the same directory as the + source files. + * If the header file describes an interface used by other parts + of the kernel that are located in different directories, then + the file is placed in include/linux/. - When a module needs to include a file from include/linux/, then one - just uses: + NOTE: There are two notable exceptions to this rule: larger + subsystems have their own directory under include/, such as + include/scsi; and architecture specific headers are located + under arch/$(ARCH)/include/. - #include <linux/modules.h> +--- 4.1 Kernel Includes - kbuild will make sure to add options to gcc so the relevant - directories are searched. - Likewise for .h files placed in the same directory as the .c file. + To include a header file located under include/linux/, simply + use: - #include "8123_if.h" + #include <linux/module.h> - will do the job. + kbuild will add options to "gcc" so the relevant directories + are searched. ---- 5.2 External modules using an include/ dir +--- 4.2 Single Subdirectory - External modules often locate their .h files in a separate include/ - directory although this is not usual kernel style. When an external - module uses an include/ dir then kbuild needs to be told so. - The trick here is to use either EXTRA_CFLAGS (take effect for all .c - files) or CFLAGS_$F.o (take effect only for a single file). + External modules tend to place header files in a separate + include/ directory where their source is located, although this + is not the usual kernel style. To inform kbuild of the + directory, use either ccflags-y or CFLAGS_<filename>.o. - In our example, if we move 8123_if.h to a subdirectory named include/ - the resulting Kbuild file would look like: + Using the example from section 3, if we moved 8123_if.h to a + subdirectory named include, the resulting kbuild file would + look like: --> filename: Kbuild - obj-m := 8123.o + obj-m := 8123.o - EXTRA_CFLAGS := -Iinclude + ccflags-y := -Iinclude 8123-y := 8123_if.o 8123_pci.o 8123_bin.o - Note that in the assignment there is no space between -I and the path. - This is a kbuild limitation: there must be no space present. + Note that in the assignment there is no space between -I and + the path. This is a limitation of kbuild: there must be no + space present. ---- 5.3 External modules using several directories - - If an external module does not follow the usual kernel style, but - decides to spread files over several directories, then kbuild can - handle this too. +--- 4.3 Several Subdirectories + kbuild can handle files that are spread over several directories. Consider the following example: - | - +- src/complex_main.c - | +- hal/hardwareif.c - | +- hal/include/hardwareif.h - +- include/complex.h - - To build a single module named complex.ko, we then need the following + . + |__ src + | |__ complex_main.c + | |__ hal + | |__ hardwareif.c + | |__ include + | |__ hardwareif.h + |__ include + |__ complex.h + + To build the module complex.ko, we then need the following kbuild file: - Kbuild: + --> filename: Kbuild obj-m := complex.o complex-y := src/complex_main.o complex-y += src/hal/hardwareif.o - EXTRA_CFLAGS := -I$(src)/include - EXTRA_CFLAGS += -I$(src)src/hal/include + ccflags-y := -I$(src)/include + ccflags-y += -I$(src)/src/hal/include + As you can see, kbuild knows how to handle object files located + in other directories. The trick is to specify the directory + relative to the kbuild file's location. That being said, this + is NOT recommended practice. - kbuild knows how to handle .o files located in another directory - - although this is NOT recommended practice. The syntax is to specify - the directory relative to the directory where the Kbuild file is - located. + For the header files, kbuild must be explicitly told where to + look. When kbuild executes, the current directory is always the + root of the kernel tree (the argument to "-C") and therefore an + absolute path is needed. $(src) provides the absolute path by + pointing to the directory where the currently executing kbuild + file is located. - To find the .h files, we have to explicitly tell kbuild where to look - for the .h files. When kbuild executes, the current directory is always - the root of the kernel tree (argument to -C) and therefore we have to - tell kbuild how to find the .h files using absolute paths. - $(src) will specify the absolute path to the directory where the - Kbuild file are located when being build as an external module. - Therefore -I$(src)/ is used to point out the directory of the Kbuild - file and any additional path are just appended. -=== 6. Module installation +=== 5. Module Installation -Modules which are included in the kernel are installed in the directory: +Modules which are included in the kernel are installed in the +directory: - /lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)/kernel + /lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)/kernel/ -External modules are installed in the directory: +And external modules are installed in: - /lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)/extra + /lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)/extra/ ---- 6.1 INSTALL_MOD_PATH +--- 5.1 INSTALL_MOD_PATH - Above are the default directories, but as always, some level of - customization is possible. One can prefix the path using the variable - INSTALL_MOD_PATH: + Above are the default directories but as always some level of + customization is possible. A prefix can be added to the + installation path using the variable INSTALL_MOD_PATH: $ make INSTALL_MOD_PATH=/frodo modules_install - => Install dir: /frodo/lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)/kernel - - INSTALL_MOD_PATH may be set as an ordinary shell variable or as in the - example above, can be specified on the command line when calling make. - INSTALL_MOD_PATH has effect both when installing modules included in - the kernel as well as when installing external modules. + => Install dir: /frodo/lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)/kernel/ ---- 6.2 INSTALL_MOD_DIR + INSTALL_MOD_PATH may be set as an ordinary shell variable or, + as shown above, can be specified on the command line when + calling "make." This has effect when installing both in-tree + and out-of-tree modules. - When installing external modules they are by default installed to a - directory under /lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)/extra, but one may wish - to locate modules for a specific functionality in a separate - directory. For this purpose, one can use INSTALL_MOD_DIR to specify an - alternative name to 'extra'. +--- 5.2 INSTALL_MOD_DIR - $ make INSTALL_MOD_DIR=gandalf -C KERNELDIR \ - M=`pwd` modules_install - => Install dir: /lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)/gandalf + External modules are by default installed to a directory under + /lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)/extra/, but you may wish to + locate modules for a specific functionality in a separate + directory. For this purpose, use INSTALL_MOD_DIR to specify an + alternative name to "extra." + $ make INSTALL_MOD_DIR=gandalf -C $KDIR \ + M=$PWD modules_install + => Install dir: /lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)/gandalf/ -=== 7. Module versioning & Module.symvers -Module versioning is enabled by the CONFIG_MODVERSIONS tag. +=== 6. Module Versioning -Module versioning is used as a simple ABI consistency check. The Module -versioning creates a CRC value of the full prototype for an exported symbol and -when a module is loaded/used then the CRC values contained in the kernel are -compared with similar values in the module. If they are not equal, then the -kernel refuses to load the module. +Module versioning is enabled by the CONFIG_MODVERSIONS tag, and is used +as a simple ABI consistency check. A CRC value of the full prototype +for an exported symbol is created. When a module is loaded/used, the +CRC values contained in the kernel are compared with similar values in +the module; if they are not equal, the kernel refuses to load the +module. -Module.symvers contains a list of all exported symbols from a kernel build. +Module.symvers contains a list of all exported symbols from a kernel +build. ---- 7.1 Symbols from the kernel (vmlinux + modules) +--- 6.1 Symbols From the Kernel (vmlinux + modules) - During a kernel build, a file named Module.symvers will be generated. - Module.symvers contains all exported symbols from the kernel and - compiled modules. For each symbols, the corresponding CRC value - is stored too. + During a kernel build, a file named Module.symvers will be + generated. Module.symvers contains all exported symbols from + the kernel and compiled modules. For each symbol, the + corresponding CRC value is also stored. The syntax of the Module.symvers file is: - <CRC> <Symbol> <module> - Sample: + <CRC> <Symbol> <module> + 0x2d036834 scsi_remove_host drivers/scsi/scsi_mod - For a kernel build without CONFIG_MODVERSIONS enabled, the crc - would read: 0x00000000 + For a kernel build without CONFIG_MODVERSIONS enabled, the CRC + would read 0x00000000. Module.symvers serves two purposes: - 1) It lists all exported symbols both from vmlinux and all modules - 2) It lists the CRC if CONFIG_MODVERSIONS is enabled - ---- 7.2 Symbols and external modules - - When building an external module, the build system needs access to - the symbols from the kernel to check if all external symbols are - defined. This is done in the MODPOST step and to obtain all - symbols, modpost reads Module.symvers from the kernel. - If a Module.symvers file is present in the directory where - the external module is being built, this file will be read too. - During the MODPOST step, a new Module.symvers file will be written - containing all exported symbols that were not defined in the kernel. - ---- 7.3 Symbols from another external module - - Sometimes, an external module uses exported symbols from another - external module. Kbuild needs to have full knowledge on all symbols - to avoid spitting out warnings about undefined symbols. - Three solutions exist to let kbuild know all symbols of more than - one external module. - The method with a top-level kbuild file is recommended but may be - impractical in certain situations. - - Use a top-level Kbuild file - If you have two modules: 'foo' and 'bar', and 'foo' needs - symbols from 'bar', then one can use a common top-level kbuild - file so both modules are compiled in same build. - - Consider following directory layout: - ./foo/ <= contains the foo module - ./bar/ <= contains the bar module - The top-level Kbuild file would then look like: - - #./Kbuild: (this file may also be named Makefile) + 1) It lists all exported symbols from vmlinux and all modules. + 2) It lists the CRC if CONFIG_MODVERSIONS is enabled. + +--- 6.2 Symbols and External Modules + + When building an external module, the build system needs access + to the symbols from the kernel to check if all external symbols + are defined. This is done in the MODPOST step. modpost obtains + the symbols by reading Module.symvers from the kernel source + tree. If a Module.symvers file is present in the directory + where the external module is being built, this file will be + read too. During the MODPOST step, a new Module.symvers file + will be written containing all exported symbols that were not + defined in the kernel. + +--- 6.3 Symbols From Another External Module + + Sometimes, an external module uses exported symbols from + another external module. kbuild needs to have full knowledge of + all symbols to avoid spitting out warnings about undefined + symbols. Three solutions exist for this situation. + + NOTE: The method with a top-level kbuild file is recommended + but may be impractical in certain situations. + + Use a top-level kbuild file + If you have two modules, foo.ko and bar.ko, where + foo.ko needs symbols from bar.ko, you can use a + common top-level kbuild file so both modules are + compiled in the same build. Consider the following + directory layout: + + ./foo/ <= contains foo.ko + ./bar/ <= contains bar.ko + + The top-level kbuild file would then look like: + + #./Kbuild (or ./Makefile): obj-y := foo/ bar/ - Executing: - make -C $KDIR M=`pwd` + And executing + + $ make -C $KDIR M=$PWD - will then do the expected and compile both modules with full - knowledge on symbols from both modules. + will then do the expected and compile both modules with + full knowledge of symbols from either module. Use an extra Module.symvers file - When an external module is built, a Module.symvers file is - generated containing all exported symbols which are not - defined in the kernel. - To get access to symbols from module 'bar', one can copy the - Module.symvers file from the compilation of the 'bar' module - to the directory where the 'foo' module is built. - During the module build, kbuild will read the Module.symvers - file in the directory of the external module and when the - build is finished, a new Module.symvers file is created - containing the sum of all symbols defined and not part of the - kernel. - - Use make variable KBUILD_EXTRA_SYMBOLS in the Makefile - If it is impractical to copy Module.symvers from another - module, you can assign a space separated list of files to - KBUILD_EXTRA_SYMBOLS in your Makfile. These files will be - loaded by modpost during the initialisation of its symbol - tables. - -=== 8. Tips & Tricks - ---- 8.1 Testing for CONFIG_FOO_BAR - - Modules often need to check for certain CONFIG_ options to decide if - a specific feature shall be included in the module. When kbuild is used - this is done by referencing the CONFIG_ variable directly. + When an external module is built, a Module.symvers file + is generated containing all exported symbols which are + not defined in the kernel. To get access to symbols + from bar.ko, copy the Module.symvers file from the + compilation of bar.ko to the directory where foo.ko is + built. During the module build, kbuild will read the + Module.symvers file in the directory of the external + module, and when the build is finished, a new + Module.symvers file is created containing the sum of + all symbols defined and not part of the kernel. + + Use "make" variable KBUILD_EXTRA_SYMBOLS + If it is impractical to copy Module.symvers from + another module, you can assign a space separated list + of files to KBUILD_EXTRA_SYMBOLS in your build file. + These files will be loaded by modpost during the + initialization of its symbol tables. + + +=== 7. Tips & Tricks + +--- 7.1 Testing for CONFIG_FOO_BAR + + Modules often need to check for certain CONFIG_ options to + decide if a specific feature is included in the module. In + kbuild this is done by referencing the CONFIG_ variable + directly. #fs/ext2/Makefile obj-$(CONFIG_EXT2_FS) += ext2.o @@ -544,9 +533,9 @@ Module.symvers contains a list of all exported symbols from a kernel build. ext2-y := balloc.o bitmap.o dir.o ext2-$(CONFIG_EXT2_FS_XATTR) += xattr.o - External modules have traditionally used grep to check for specific - CONFIG_ settings directly in .config. This usage is broken. - As introduced before, external modules shall use kbuild when building - and therefore can use the same methods as in-kernel modules when - testing for CONFIG_ definitions. + External modules have traditionally used "grep" to check for + specific CONFIG_ settings directly in .config. This usage is + broken. As introduced before, external modules should use + kbuild for building and can therefore use the same methods as + in-tree modules when testing for CONFIG_ definitions. diff --git a/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt b/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt index cab61d842259..7a9e0b4b2903 100644 --- a/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt +++ b/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt @@ -65,18 +65,21 @@ Install kexec-tools 2) Download the kexec-tools user-space package from the following URL: -http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/horms/kexec-tools/kexec-tools.tar.gz +http://kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/kexec/kexec-tools.tar.gz This is a symlink to the latest version. The latest kexec-tools git tree is available at: -git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/horms/kexec-tools.git -or -http://www.kernel.org/git/?p=linux/kernel/git/horms/kexec-tools.git +git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/utils/kernel/kexec/kexec-tools.git +and +http://www.kernel.org/pub/scm/utils/kernel/kexec/kexec-tools.git + +There is also a gitweb interface available at +http://www.kernel.org/git/?p=utils/kernel/kexec/kexec-tools.git More information about kexec-tools can be found at -http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/horms/kexec-tools/README.html +http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/kexec/README.html 3) Unpack the tarball with the tar command, as follows: @@ -439,6 +442,6 @@ To Do Contact ======= -Vivek Goyal (vgoyal@in.ibm.com) +Vivek Goyal (vgoyal@redhat.com) Maneesh Soni (maneesh@in.ibm.com) diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-docs.txt b/Documentation/kernel-docs.txt index 715eaaf1519d..9a8674629a07 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-docs.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-docs.txt @@ -537,7 +537,7 @@ Notes: Further information in http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/linuxdrive2/ - * Title: "Linux Device Drivers, 3nd Edition" + * Title: "Linux Device Drivers, 3rd Edition" Authors: Jonathan Corbet, Alessandro Rubini, and Greg Kroah-Hartman Publisher: O'Reilly & Associates. Date: 2005. @@ -592,14 +592,6 @@ Pages: 600. ISBN: 0-13-101908-2 - * Title: "The Design and Implementation of the 4.4 BSD UNIX - Operating System" - Author: Marshall Kirk McKusick, Keith Bostic, Michael J. Karels, - John S. Quarterman. - Publisher: Addison-Wesley. - Date: 1996. - ISBN: 0-201-54979-4 - * Title: "Programming for the real world - POSIX.4" Author: Bill O. Gallmeister. Publisher: O'Reilly & Associates, Inc.. @@ -610,28 +602,13 @@ POSIX. Good reference. * Title: "UNIX Systems for Modern Architectures: Symmetric - Multiprocesssing and Caching for Kernel Programmers" + Multiprocessing and Caching for Kernel Programmers" Author: Curt Schimmel. Publisher: Addison Wesley. Date: June, 1994. Pages: 432. ISBN: 0-201-63338-8 - * Title: "The Design and Implementation of the 4.3 BSD UNIX - Operating System" - Author: Samuel J. Leffler, Marshall Kirk McKusick, Michael J. - Karels, John S. Quarterman. - Publisher: Addison-Wesley. - Date: 1989 (reprinted with corrections on October, 1990). - ISBN: 0-201-06196-1 - - * Title: "The Design of the UNIX Operating System" - Author: Maurice J. Bach. - Publisher: Prentice Hall. - Date: 1986. - Pages: 471. - ISBN: 0-13-201757-1 - MISCELLANEOUS: * Name: linux/Documentation diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 4bc2f3c3da5b..55fe7599bc8e 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -403,6 +403,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file bttv.pll= See Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Insmod-options bttv.tuner= and Documentation/video4linux/bttv/CARDLIST + bulk_remove=off [PPC] This parameter disables the use of the pSeries + firmware feature for flushing multiple hpte entries + at a time. + c101= [NET] Moxa C101 synchronous serial card cachesize= [BUGS=X86-32] Override level 2 CPU cache size detection. @@ -655,11 +659,6 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file dscc4.setup= [NET] - dynamic_printk Enables pr_debug()/dev_dbg() calls if - CONFIG_DYNAMIC_PRINTK_DEBUG has been enabled. - These can also be switched on/off via - <debugfs>/dynamic_printk/modules - earlycon= [KNL] Output early console device and options. uart[8250],io,<addr>[,options] uart[8250],mmio,<addr>[,options] @@ -706,7 +705,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file arch/x86/kernel/cpu/cpufreq/elanfreq.c. elevator= [IOSCHED] - Format: {"anticipatory" | "cfq" | "deadline" | "noop"} + Format: {"cfq" | "deadline" | "noop"} See Documentation/block/as-iosched.txt and Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt for details. @@ -884,6 +883,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file controller i8042.nopnp [HW] Don't use ACPIPnP / PnPBIOS to discover KBD/AUX controllers + i8042.notimeout [HW] Ignore timeout condition signalled by conroller i8042.reset [HW] Reset the controller during init and cleanup i8042.unlock [HW] Unlock (ignore) the keylock @@ -1490,6 +1490,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file mtdparts= [MTD] See drivers/mtd/cmdlinepart.c. + multitce=off [PPC] This parameter disables the use of the pSeries + firmware feature for updating multiple TCE entries + at a time. + onenand.bdry= [HW,MTD] Flex-OneNAND Boundary Configuration Format: [die0_boundary][,die0_lock][,die1_boundary][,die1_lock] @@ -1579,20 +1583,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file nmi_watchdog= [KNL,BUGS=X86] Debugging features for SMP kernels Format: [panic,][num] - Valid num: 0,1,2 + Valid num: 0 0 - turn nmi_watchdog off - 1 - use the IO-APIC timer for the NMI watchdog - 2 - use the local APIC for the NMI watchdog using - a performance counter. Note: This will use one - performance counter and the local APIC's performance - vector. When panic is specified, panic when an NMI watchdog timeout occurs. This is useful when you use a panic=... timeout and need the box quickly up again. - Instead of 1 and 2 it is possible to use the following - symbolic names: lapic and ioapic - Example: nmi_watchdog=2 or nmi_watchdog=panic,lapic netpoll.carrier_timeout= [NET] Specifies amount of time (in seconds) that @@ -1622,6 +1618,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file noapic [SMP,APIC] Tells the kernel to not make use of any IOAPICs that may be present in the system. + noautogroup Disable scheduler automatic task group creation. + nobats [PPC] Do not use BATs for mapping kernel lowmem on "Classic" PPC cores. @@ -1707,6 +1705,9 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file no-kvmclock [X86,KVM] Disable paravirtualized KVM clock driver + no-kvmapf [X86,KVM] Disable paravirtualized asynchronous page + fault handling. + nolapic [X86-32,APIC] Do not enable or use the local APIC. nolapic_timer [X86-32,APIC] Do not use the local APIC timer. @@ -1759,7 +1760,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file nousb [USB] Disable the USB subsystem - nowatchdog [KNL] Disable the lockup detector. + nowatchdog [KNL] Disable the lockup detector (NMI watchdog). nowb [ARM] @@ -2380,6 +2381,11 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file improve throughput, but will also increase the amount of memory reserved for use by the client. + swapaccount[=0|1] + [KNL] Enable accounting of swap in memory resource + controller if no parameter or 1 is given or disable + it if 0 is given (See Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt) + swiotlb= [IA-64] Number of I/O TLB slabs switches= [HW,M68k] @@ -2462,12 +2468,13 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file to facilitate early boot debugging. See also Documentation/trace/events.txt - tsc= Disable clocksource-must-verify flag for TSC. + tsc= Disable clocksource stability checks for TSC. Format: <string> [x86] reliable: mark tsc clocksource as reliable, this - disables clocksource verification at runtime. - Used to enable high-resolution timer mode on older - hardware, and in virtualized environment. + disables clocksource verification at runtime, as well + as the stability checks done at bootup. Used to enable + high-resolution timer mode on older hardware, and in + virtualized environment. [x86] noirqtime: Do not use TSC to do irq accounting. Used to run time disable IRQ_TIME_ACCOUNTING on any platforms where RDTSC is slow and this accounting diff --git a/Documentation/keys-trusted-encrypted.txt b/Documentation/keys-trusted-encrypted.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8fb79bc1ac4b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/keys-trusted-encrypted.txt @@ -0,0 +1,145 @@ + Trusted and Encrypted Keys + +Trusted and Encrypted Keys are two new key types added to the existing kernel +key ring service. Both of these new types are variable length symmetic keys, +and in both cases all keys are created in the kernel, and user space sees, +stores, and loads only encrypted blobs. Trusted Keys require the availability +of a Trusted Platform Module (TPM) chip for greater security, while Encrypted +Keys can be used on any system. All user level blobs, are displayed and loaded +in hex ascii for convenience, and are integrity verified. + +Trusted Keys use a TPM both to generate and to seal the keys. Keys are sealed +under a 2048 bit RSA key in the TPM, and optionally sealed to specified PCR +(integrity measurement) values, and only unsealed by the TPM, if PCRs and blob +integrity verifications match. A loaded Trusted Key can be updated with new +(future) PCR values, so keys are easily migrated to new pcr values, such as +when the kernel and initramfs are updated. The same key can have many saved +blobs under different PCR values, so multiple boots are easily supported. + +By default, trusted keys are sealed under the SRK, which has the default +authorization value (20 zeros). This can be set at takeownership time with the +trouser's utility: "tpm_takeownership -u -z". + +Usage: + keyctl add trusted name "new keylen [options]" ring + keyctl add trusted name "load hex_blob [pcrlock=pcrnum]" ring + keyctl update key "update [options]" + keyctl print keyid + + options: + keyhandle= ascii hex value of sealing key default 0x40000000 (SRK) + keyauth= ascii hex auth for sealing key default 0x00...i + (40 ascii zeros) + blobauth= ascii hex auth for sealed data default 0x00... + (40 ascii zeros) + blobauth= ascii hex auth for sealed data default 0x00... + (40 ascii zeros) + pcrinfo= ascii hex of PCR_INFO or PCR_INFO_LONG (no default) + pcrlock= pcr number to be extended to "lock" blob + migratable= 0|1 indicating permission to reseal to new PCR values, + default 1 (resealing allowed) + +"keyctl print" returns an ascii hex copy of the sealed key, which is in standard +TPM_STORED_DATA format. The key length for new keys are always in bytes. +Trusted Keys can be 32 - 128 bytes (256 - 1024 bits), the upper limit is to fit +within the 2048 bit SRK (RSA) keylength, with all necessary structure/padding. + +Encrypted keys do not depend on a TPM, and are faster, as they use AES for +encryption/decryption. New keys are created from kernel generated random +numbers, and are encrypted/decrypted using a specified 'master' key. The +'master' key can either be a trusted-key or user-key type. The main +disadvantage of encrypted keys is that if they are not rooted in a trusted key, +they are only as secure as the user key encrypting them. The master user key +should therefore be loaded in as secure a way as possible, preferably early in +boot. + +Usage: + keyctl add encrypted name "new key-type:master-key-name keylen" ring + keyctl add encrypted name "load hex_blob" ring + keyctl update keyid "update key-type:master-key-name" + +where 'key-type' is either 'trusted' or 'user'. + +Examples of trusted and encrypted key usage: + +Create and save a trusted key named "kmk" of length 32 bytes: + + $ keyctl add trusted kmk "new 32" @u + 440502848 + + $ keyctl show + Session Keyring + -3 --alswrv 500 500 keyring: _ses + 97833714 --alswrv 500 -1 \_ keyring: _uid.500 + 440502848 --alswrv 500 500 \_ trusted: kmk + + $ keyctl print 440502848 + 0101000000000000000001005d01b7e3f4a6be5709930f3b70a743cbb42e0cc95e18e915 + 3f60da455bbf1144ad12e4f92b452f966929f6105fd29ca28e4d4d5a031d068478bacb0b + 27351119f822911b0a11ba3d3498ba6a32e50dac7f32894dd890eb9ad578e4e292c83722 + a52e56a097e6a68b3f56f7a52ece0cdccba1eb62cad7d817f6dc58898b3ac15f36026fec + d568bd4a706cb60bb37be6d8f1240661199d640b66fb0fe3b079f97f450b9ef9c22c6d5d + dd379f0facd1cd020281dfa3c70ba21a3fa6fc2471dc6d13ecf8298b946f65345faa5ef0 + f1f8fff03ad0acb083725535636addb08d73dedb9832da198081e5deae84bfaf0409c22b + e4a8aea2b607ec96931e6f4d4fe563ba + + $ keyctl pipe 440502848 > kmk.blob + +Load a trusted key from the saved blob: + + $ keyctl add trusted kmk "load `cat kmk.blob`" @u + 268728824 + + $ keyctl print 268728824 + 0101000000000000000001005d01b7e3f4a6be5709930f3b70a743cbb42e0cc95e18e915 + 3f60da455bbf1144ad12e4f92b452f966929f6105fd29ca28e4d4d5a031d068478bacb0b + 27351119f822911b0a11ba3d3498ba6a32e50dac7f32894dd890eb9ad578e4e292c83722 + a52e56a097e6a68b3f56f7a52ece0cdccba1eb62cad7d817f6dc58898b3ac15f36026fec + d568bd4a706cb60bb37be6d8f1240661199d640b66fb0fe3b079f97f450b9ef9c22c6d5d + dd379f0facd1cd020281dfa3c70ba21a3fa6fc2471dc6d13ecf8298b946f65345faa5ef0 + f1f8fff03ad0acb083725535636addb08d73dedb9832da198081e5deae84bfaf0409c22b + e4a8aea2b607ec96931e6f4d4fe563ba + +Reseal a trusted key under new pcr values: + + $ keyctl update 268728824 "update pcrinfo=`cat pcr.blob`" + $ keyctl print 268728824 + 010100000000002c0002800093c35a09b70fff26e7a98ae786c641e678ec6ffb6b46d805 + 77c8a6377aed9d3219c6dfec4b23ffe3000001005d37d472ac8a44023fbb3d18583a4f73 + d3a076c0858f6f1dcaa39ea0f119911ff03f5406df4f7f27f41da8d7194f45c9f4e00f2e + df449f266253aa3f52e55c53de147773e00f0f9aca86c64d94c95382265968c354c5eab4 + 9638c5ae99c89de1e0997242edfb0b501744e11ff9762dfd951cffd93227cc513384e7e6 + e782c29435c7ec2edafaa2f4c1fe6e7a781b59549ff5296371b42133777dcc5b8b971610 + 94bc67ede19e43ddb9dc2baacad374a36feaf0314d700af0a65c164b7082401740e489c9 + 7ef6a24defe4846104209bf0c3eced7fa1a672ed5b125fc9d8cd88b476a658a4434644ef + df8ae9a178e9f83ba9f08d10fa47e4226b98b0702f06b3b8 + +Create and save an encrypted key "evm" using the above trusted key "kmk": + + $ keyctl add encrypted evm "new trusted:kmk 32" @u + 159771175 + + $ keyctl print 159771175 + trusted:kmk 32 2375725ad57798846a9bbd240de8906f006e66c03af53b1b382dbbc55 + be2a44616e4959430436dc4f2a7a9659aa60bb4652aeb2120f149ed197c564e024717c64 + 5972dcb82ab2dde83376d82b2e3c09ffc + + $ keyctl pipe 159771175 > evm.blob + +Load an encrypted key "evm" from saved blob: + + $ keyctl add encrypted evm "load `cat evm.blob`" @u + 831684262 + + $ keyctl print 831684262 + trusted:kmk 32 2375725ad57798846a9bbd240de8906f006e66c03af53b1b382dbbc55 + be2a44616e4959430436dc4f2a7a9659aa60bb4652aeb2120f149ed197c564e024717c64 + 5972dcb82ab2dde83376d82b2e3c09ffc + + +The initial consumer of trusted keys is EVM, which at boot time needs a high +quality symmetric key for HMAC protection of file metadata. The use of a +trusted key provides strong guarantees that the EVM key has not been +compromised by a user level problem, and when sealed to specific boot PCR +values, protects against boot and offline attacks. Other uses for trusted and +encrypted keys, such as for disk and file encryption are anticipated. diff --git a/Documentation/ko_KR/HOWTO b/Documentation/ko_KR/HOWTO index e3a55b6091e9..ab5189ae3428 100644 --- a/Documentation/ko_KR/HOWTO +++ b/Documentation/ko_KR/HOWTO @@ -391,8 +391,8 @@ bugme-new 메일링 리스트나(새로운 버그 리포트들만이 이곳에 bugme-janitor 메일링 리스트(bugzilla에 모든 변화들이 여기서 메일로 전해진다) 에 등록하면 된다. - http://lists.osdl.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-new - http://lists.osdl.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-janitors + https://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-new + https://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-janitors diff --git a/Documentation/kprobes.txt b/Documentation/kprobes.txt index 741fe66d6eca..0cfb00fd86ff 100644 --- a/Documentation/kprobes.txt +++ b/Documentation/kprobes.txt @@ -598,7 +598,7 @@ a 5-byte jump instruction. So there are several limitations. a) The instructions in DCR must be relocatable. b) The instructions in DCR must not include a call instruction. c) JTPR must not be targeted by any jump or call instruction. -d) DCR must not straddle the border betweeen functions. +d) DCR must not straddle the border between functions. Anyway, these limitations are checked by the in-kernel instruction decoder, so you don't need to worry about that. diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/api.txt b/Documentation/kvm/api.txt index b336266bea5e..ad85797c1cf0 100644 --- a/Documentation/kvm/api.txt +++ b/Documentation/kvm/api.txt @@ -874,7 +874,7 @@ Possible values are: - KVM_MP_STATE_HALTED: the vcpu has executed a HLT instruction and is waiting for an interrupt - KVM_MP_STATE_SIPI_RECEIVED: the vcpu has just received a SIPI (vector - accesible via KVM_GET_VCPU_EVENTS) + accessible via KVM_GET_VCPU_EVENTS) This ioctl is only useful after KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP. Without an in-kernel irqchip, the multiprocessing state must be maintained by userspace. @@ -1085,6 +1085,184 @@ of 4 instructions that make up a hypercall. If any additional field gets added to this structure later on, a bit for that additional piece of information will be set in the flags bitmap. +4.47 KVM_ASSIGN_PCI_DEVICE + +Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_ASSIGNMENT +Architectures: x86 ia64 +Type: vm ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_assigned_pci_dev (in) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Assigns a host PCI device to the VM. + +struct kvm_assigned_pci_dev { + __u32 assigned_dev_id; + __u32 busnr; + __u32 devfn; + __u32 flags; + __u32 segnr; + union { + __u32 reserved[11]; + }; +}; + +The PCI device is specified by the triple segnr, busnr, and devfn. +Identification in succeeding service requests is done via assigned_dev_id. The +following flags are specified: + +/* Depends on KVM_CAP_IOMMU */ +#define KVM_DEV_ASSIGN_ENABLE_IOMMU (1 << 0) + +4.48 KVM_DEASSIGN_PCI_DEVICE + +Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_DEASSIGNMENT +Architectures: x86 ia64 +Type: vm ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_assigned_pci_dev (in) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Ends PCI device assignment, releasing all associated resources. + +See KVM_CAP_DEVICE_ASSIGNMENT for the data structure. Only assigned_dev_id is +used in kvm_assigned_pci_dev to identify the device. + +4.49 KVM_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ + +Capability: KVM_CAP_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ +Architectures: x86 ia64 +Type: vm ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_assigned_irq (in) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Assigns an IRQ to a passed-through device. + +struct kvm_assigned_irq { + __u32 assigned_dev_id; + __u32 host_irq; + __u32 guest_irq; + __u32 flags; + union { + struct { + __u32 addr_lo; + __u32 addr_hi; + __u32 data; + } guest_msi; + __u32 reserved[12]; + }; +}; + +The following flags are defined: + +#define KVM_DEV_IRQ_HOST_INTX (1 << 0) +#define KVM_DEV_IRQ_HOST_MSI (1 << 1) +#define KVM_DEV_IRQ_HOST_MSIX (1 << 2) + +#define KVM_DEV_IRQ_GUEST_INTX (1 << 8) +#define KVM_DEV_IRQ_GUEST_MSI (1 << 9) +#define KVM_DEV_IRQ_GUEST_MSIX (1 << 10) + +It is not valid to specify multiple types per host or guest IRQ. However, the +IRQ type of host and guest can differ or can even be null. + +4.50 KVM_DEASSIGN_DEV_IRQ + +Capability: KVM_CAP_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ +Architectures: x86 ia64 +Type: vm ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_assigned_irq (in) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Ends an IRQ assignment to a passed-through device. + +See KVM_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ for the data structure. The target device is specified +by assigned_dev_id, flags must correspond to the IRQ type specified on +KVM_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ. Partial deassignment of host or guest IRQ is allowed. + +4.51 KVM_SET_GSI_ROUTING + +Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQ_ROUTING +Architectures: x86 ia64 +Type: vm ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_irq_routing (in) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Sets the GSI routing table entries, overwriting any previously set entries. + +struct kvm_irq_routing { + __u32 nr; + __u32 flags; + struct kvm_irq_routing_entry entries[0]; +}; + +No flags are specified so far, the corresponding field must be set to zero. + +struct kvm_irq_routing_entry { + __u32 gsi; + __u32 type; + __u32 flags; + __u32 pad; + union { + struct kvm_irq_routing_irqchip irqchip; + struct kvm_irq_routing_msi msi; + __u32 pad[8]; + } u; +}; + +/* gsi routing entry types */ +#define KVM_IRQ_ROUTING_IRQCHIP 1 +#define KVM_IRQ_ROUTING_MSI 2 + +No flags are specified so far, the corresponding field must be set to zero. + +struct kvm_irq_routing_irqchip { + __u32 irqchip; + __u32 pin; +}; + +struct kvm_irq_routing_msi { + __u32 address_lo; + __u32 address_hi; + __u32 data; + __u32 pad; +}; + +4.52 KVM_ASSIGN_SET_MSIX_NR + +Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_MSIX +Architectures: x86 ia64 +Type: vm ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_assigned_msix_nr (in) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Set the number of MSI-X interrupts for an assigned device. This service can +only be called once in the lifetime of an assigned device. + +struct kvm_assigned_msix_nr { + __u32 assigned_dev_id; + __u16 entry_nr; + __u16 padding; +}; + +#define KVM_MAX_MSIX_PER_DEV 256 + +4.53 KVM_ASSIGN_SET_MSIX_ENTRY + +Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_MSIX +Architectures: x86 ia64 +Type: vm ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_assigned_msix_entry (in) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Specifies the routing of an MSI-X assigned device interrupt to a GSI. Setting +the GSI vector to zero means disabling the interrupt. + +struct kvm_assigned_msix_entry { + __u32 assigned_dev_id; + __u32 gsi; + __u16 entry; /* The index of entry in the MSI-X table */ + __u16 padding[3]; +}; + 5. The kvm_run structure Application code obtains a pointer to the kvm_run structure by diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/cpuid.txt b/Documentation/kvm/cpuid.txt index 14a12ea92b7f..882068538c9c 100644 --- a/Documentation/kvm/cpuid.txt +++ b/Documentation/kvm/cpuid.txt @@ -36,6 +36,9 @@ KVM_FEATURE_MMU_OP || 2 || deprecated. KVM_FEATURE_CLOCKSOURCE2 || 3 || kvmclock available at msrs || || 0x4b564d00 and 0x4b564d01 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +KVM_FEATURE_ASYNC_PF || 4 || async pf can be enabled by + || || writing to msr 0x4b564d02 +------------------------------------------------------------------------------ KVM_FEATURE_CLOCKSOURCE_STABLE_BIT || 24 || host will warn if no guest-side || || per-cpu warps are expected in || || kvmclock. diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/msr.txt b/Documentation/kvm/msr.txt index 8ddcfe84c09a..d079aed27e03 100644 --- a/Documentation/kvm/msr.txt +++ b/Documentation/kvm/msr.txt @@ -3,7 +3,6 @@ Glauber Costa <glommer@redhat.com>, Red Hat Inc, 2010 ===================================================== KVM makes use of some custom MSRs to service some requests. -At present, this facility is only used by kvmclock. Custom MSRs have a range reserved for them, that goes from 0x4b564d00 to 0x4b564dff. There are MSRs outside this area, @@ -151,3 +150,38 @@ MSR_KVM_SYSTEM_TIME: 0x12 return PRESENT; } else return NON_PRESENT; + +MSR_KVM_ASYNC_PF_EN: 0x4b564d02 + data: Bits 63-6 hold 64-byte aligned physical address of a + 64 byte memory area which must be in guest RAM and must be + zeroed. Bits 5-2 are reserved and should be zero. Bit 0 is 1 + when asynchronous page faults are enabled on the vcpu 0 when + disabled. Bit 2 is 1 if asynchronous page faults can be injected + when vcpu is in cpl == 0. + + First 4 byte of 64 byte memory location will be written to by + the hypervisor at the time of asynchronous page fault (APF) + injection to indicate type of asynchronous page fault. Value + of 1 means that the page referred to by the page fault is not + present. Value 2 means that the page is now available. Disabling + interrupt inhibits APFs. Guest must not enable interrupt + before the reason is read, or it may be overwritten by another + APF. Since APF uses the same exception vector as regular page + fault guest must reset the reason to 0 before it does + something that can generate normal page fault. If during page + fault APF reason is 0 it means that this is regular page + fault. + + During delivery of type 1 APF cr2 contains a token that will + be used to notify a guest when missing page becomes + available. When page becomes available type 2 APF is sent with + cr2 set to the token associated with the page. There is special + kind of token 0xffffffff which tells vcpu that it should wake + up all processes waiting for APFs and no individual type 2 APFs + will be sent. + + If APF is disabled while there are outstanding APFs, they will + not be delivered. + + Currently type 2 APF will be always delivered on the same vcpu as + type 1 was, but guest should not rely on that. diff --git a/Documentation/leds-class.txt b/Documentation/leds-class.txt index 8fd5ca2ae32d..58b266bd1846 100644 --- a/Documentation/leds-class.txt +++ b/Documentation/leds-class.txt @@ -60,15 +60,18 @@ Hardware accelerated blink of LEDs Some LEDs can be programmed to blink without any CPU interaction. To support this feature, a LED driver can optionally implement the -blink_set() function (see <linux/leds.h>). If implemented, triggers can -attempt to use it before falling back to software timers. The blink_set() -function should return 0 if the blink setting is supported, or -EINVAL -otherwise, which means that LED blinking will be handled by software. - -The blink_set() function should choose a user friendly blinking -value if it is called with *delay_on==0 && *delay_off==0 parameters. In -this case the driver should give back the chosen value through delay_on -and delay_off parameters to the leds subsystem. +blink_set() function (see <linux/leds.h>). To set an LED to blinking, +however, it is better to use use the API function led_blink_set(), +as it will check and implement software fallback if necessary. + +To turn off blinking again, use the API function led_brightness_set() +as that will not just set the LED brightness but also stop any software +timers that may have been required for blinking. + +The blink_set() function should choose a user friendly blinking value +if it is called with *delay_on==0 && *delay_off==0 parameters. In this +case the driver should give back the chosen value through delay_on and +delay_off parameters to the leds subsystem. Setting the brightness to zero with brightness_set() callback function should completely turn off the LED and cancel the previously programmed diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5521.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5521.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c4d8d151e0fe --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5521.txt @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ +Kernel driver for lp5521 +======================== + +* National Semiconductor LP5521 led driver chip +* Datasheet: http://www.national.com/pf/LP/LP5521.html + +Authors: Mathias Nyman, Yuri Zaporozhets, Samu Onkalo +Contact: Samu Onkalo (samu.p.onkalo-at-nokia.com) + +Description +----------- + +LP5521 can drive up to 3 channels. Leds can be controlled directly via +the led class control interface. Channels have generic names: +lp5521:channelx, where x is 0 .. 2 + +All three channels can be also controlled using the engine micro programs. +More details of the instructions can be found from the public data sheet. + +Control interface for the engines: +x is 1 .. 3 +enginex_mode : disabled, load, run +enginex_load : store program (visible only in engine load mode) + +Example (start to blink the channel 2 led): +cd /sys/class/leds/lp5521:channel2/device +echo "load" > engine3_mode +echo "037f4d0003ff6000" > engine3_load +echo "run" > engine3_mode + +stop the engine: +echo "disabled" > engine3_mode + +sysfs contains a selftest entry. +The test communicates with the chip and checks that +the clock mode is automatically set to the requested one. + +Each channel has its own led current settings. +/sys/class/leds/lp5521:channel0/led_current - RW +/sys/class/leds/lp5521:channel0/max_current - RO +Format: 10x mA i.e 10 means 1.0 mA + +example platform data: + +Note: chan_nr can have values between 0 and 2. + +static struct lp5521_led_config lp5521_led_config[] = { + { + .chan_nr = 0, + .led_current = 50, + .max_current = 130, + }, { + .chan_nr = 1, + .led_current = 0, + .max_current = 130, + }, { + .chan_nr = 2, + .led_current = 0, + .max_current = 130, + } +}; + +static int lp5521_setup(void) +{ + /* setup HW resources */ +} + +static void lp5521_release(void) +{ + /* Release HW resources */ +} + +static void lp5521_enable(bool state) +{ + /* Control of chip enable signal */ +} + +static struct lp5521_platform_data lp5521_platform_data = { + .led_config = lp5521_led_config, + .num_channels = ARRAY_SIZE(lp5521_led_config), + .clock_mode = LP5521_CLOCK_EXT, + .setup_resources = lp5521_setup, + .release_resources = lp5521_release, + .enable = lp5521_enable, +}; + +If the current is set to 0 in the platform data, that channel is +disabled and it is not visible in the sysfs. diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5523.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5523.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..fad2feb8b7ce --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5523.txt @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ +Kernel driver for lp5523 +======================== + +* National Semiconductor LP5523 led driver chip +* Datasheet: http://www.national.com/pf/LP/LP5523.html + +Authors: Mathias Nyman, Yuri Zaporozhets, Samu Onkalo +Contact: Samu Onkalo (samu.p.onkalo-at-nokia.com) + +Description +----------- +LP5523 can drive up to 9 channels. Leds can be controlled directly via +the led class control interface. Channels have generic names: +lp5523:channelx where x is 0...8 + +The chip provides 3 engines. Each engine can control channels without +interaction from the main CPU. Details of the micro engine code can be found +from the public data sheet. Leds can be muxed to different channels. + +Control interface for the engines: +x is 1 .. 3 +enginex_mode : disabled, load, run +enginex_load : microcode load (visible only in load mode) +enginex_leds : led mux control (visible only in load mode) + +cd /sys/class/leds/lp5523:channel2/device +echo "load" > engine3_mode +echo "9d80400004ff05ff437f0000" > engine3_load +echo "111111111" > engine3_leds +echo "run" > engine3_mode + +sysfs contains a selftest entry. It measures each channel +voltage level and checks if it looks reasonable. If the level is too high, +the led is missing; if the level is too low, there is a short circuit. + +Selftest uses always the current from the platform data. + +Each channel contains led current settings. +/sys/class/leds/lp5523:channel2/led_current - RW +/sys/class/leds/lp5523:channel2/max_current - RO +Format: 10x mA i.e 10 means 1.0 mA + +Example platform data: + +Note - chan_nr can have values between 0 and 8. + +static struct lp5523_led_config lp5523_led_config[] = { + { + .chan_nr = 0, + .led_current = 50, + .max_current = 130, + }, +... + }, { + .chan_nr = 8, + .led_current = 50, + .max_current = 130, + } +}; + +static int lp5523_setup(void) +{ + /* Setup HW resources */ +} + +static void lp5523_release(void) +{ + /* Release HW resources */ +} + +static void lp5523_enable(bool state) +{ + /* Control chip enable signal */ +} + +static struct lp5523_platform_data lp5523_platform_data = { + .led_config = lp5523_led_config, + .num_channels = ARRAY_SIZE(lp5523_led_config), + .clock_mode = LP5523_CLOCK_EXT, + .setup_resources = lp5523_setup, + .release_resources = lp5523_release, + .enable = lp5523_enable, +}; diff --git a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.txt b/Documentation/lguest/lguest.txt index efb3a6a045a2..6ccaf8e1a00e 100644 --- a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.txt +++ b/Documentation/lguest/lguest.txt @@ -111,8 +111,11 @@ Running Lguest: Then use --tunnet=bridge:lg0 when launching the guest. - See http://linux-net.osdl.org/index.php/Bridge for general information - on how to get bridging working. + See: + + http://www.linuxfoundation.org/collaborate/workgroups/networking/bridge + + for general information on how to get bridging to work. There is a helpful mailing list at http://ozlabs.org/mailman/listinfo/lguest diff --git a/Documentation/make/headers_install.txt b/Documentation/make/headers_install.txt index f2481cabffcb..951eb9f1e040 100644 --- a/Documentation/make/headers_install.txt +++ b/Documentation/make/headers_install.txt @@ -39,8 +39,9 @@ INSTALL_HDR_PATH indicates where to install the headers. It defaults to The command "make headers_install_all" exports headers for all architectures simultaneously. (This is mostly of interest to distribution maintainers, who create an architecture-independent tarball from the resulting include -directory.) Remember to provide the appropriate linux/asm directory via "mv" -or "ln -s" before building a C library with headers exported this way. +directory.) You also can use HDR_ARCH_LIST to specify list of architectures. +Remember to provide the appropriate linux/asm directory via "mv" or "ln -s" +before building a C library with headers exported this way. The kernel header export infrastructure is maintained by David Woodhouse <dwmw2@infradead.org>. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlcnic b/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlcnic new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..29ad4b106420 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlcnic @@ -0,0 +1,327 @@ +Copyright (c) 2009-2010 QLogic Corporation +QLogic Linux qlcnic NIC Driver + +This program includes a device driver for Linux 2.6 that may be +distributed with QLogic hardware specific firmware binary file. +You may modify and redistribute the device driver code under the +GNU General Public License (a copy of which is attached hereto as +Exhibit A) published by the Free Software Foundation (version 2). + +You may redistribute the hardware specific firmware binary file +under the following terms: + + 1. Redistribution of source code (only if applicable), + must retain the above copyright notice, this list of + conditions and the following disclaimer. + + 2. Redistribution in binary form must reproduce the above + copyright notice, this list of conditions and the + following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other + materials provided with the distribution. + + 3. The name of QLogic Corporation may not be used to + endorse or promote products derived from this software + without specific prior written permission + +REGARDLESS OF WHAT LICENSING MECHANISM IS USED OR APPLICABLE, +THIS PROGRAM IS PROVIDED BY QLOGIC CORPORATION "AS IS'' AND ANY +EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE +IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR +BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, +EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED +TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, +DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON +ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, +OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY +OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. + +USER ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT USE OF THIS PROGRAM WILL NOT +CREATE OR GIVE GROUNDS FOR A LICENSE BY IMPLICATION, ESTOPPEL, OR +OTHERWISE IN ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (PATENT, COPYRIGHT, +TRADE SECRET, MASK WORK, OR OTHER PROPRIETARY RIGHT) EMBODIED IN +ANY OTHER QLOGIC HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE EITHER SOLELY OR IN +COMBINATION WITH THIS PROGRAM. + + +EXHIBIT A + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 2, June 1991 + + Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies + of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + + Preamble + + The licenses for most software are designed to take away your +freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public +License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free +software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This +General Public License applies to most of the Free Software +Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to +using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by +the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to +your programs, too. + + When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not +price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you +have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for +this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it +if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it +in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. + + To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid +anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. +These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you +distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. + + For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether +gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that +you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the +source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their +rights. + + We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and +(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, +distribute and/or modify the software. + + Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain +that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free +software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we +want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so +that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original +authors' reputations. + + Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software +patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free +program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the +program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any +patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. + + The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and +modification follow. + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION + + 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains +a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed +under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, +refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" +means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: +that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, +either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another +language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in +the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". + +Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not +covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of +running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program +is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the +Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). +Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. + + 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's +source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you +conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate +copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the +notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; +and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License +along with the Program. + +You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and +you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. + + 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion +of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and +distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 +above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices + stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. + + b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in + whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any + part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third + parties under the terms of this License. + + c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively + when run, you must cause it, when started running for such + interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an + announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a + notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide + a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under + these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this + License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but + does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on + the Program is not required to print an announcement.) + +These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If +identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, +and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in +themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those +sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you +distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based +on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of +this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the +entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. + +Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest +your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to +exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or +collective works based on the Program. + +In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program +with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of +a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under +the scope of this License. + + 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, +under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of +Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: + + a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable + source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections + 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, + + b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three + years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your + cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete + machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be + distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium + customarily used for software interchange; or, + + c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer + to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is + allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you + received the program in object code or executable form with such + an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) + +The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for +making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source +code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any +associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to +control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a +special exception, the source code distributed need not include +anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary +form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the +operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component +itself accompanies the executable. + +If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering +access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent +access to copy the source code from the same place counts as +distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not +compelled to copy the source along with the object code. + + 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program +except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt +otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is +void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. +However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under +this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such +parties remain in full compliance. + + 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not +signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or +distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are +prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by +modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the +Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and +all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying +the Program or works based on it. + + 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the +Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the +original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to +these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further +restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. +You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to +this License. + + 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent +infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), +conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or +otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not +excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot +distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this +License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you +may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent +license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by +all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then +the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to +refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. + +If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under +any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to +apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other +circumstances. + +It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any +patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any +such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the +integrity of the free software distribution system, which is +implemented by public license practices. Many people have made +generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed +through that system in reliance on consistent application of that +system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing +to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot +impose that choice. + +This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to +be a consequence of the rest of this License. + + 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in +certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the +original copyright holder who places the Program under this License +may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding +those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among +countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates +the limitation as if written in the body of this License. + + 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions +of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will +be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to +address new problems or concerns. + +Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program +specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any +later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions +either of that version or of any later version published by the Free +Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of +this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software +Foundation. + + 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free +programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author +to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free +Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes +make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals +of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and +of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. + + NO WARRANTY + + 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY +FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN +OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES +PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED +OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF +MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS +TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE +PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, +REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + + 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING +WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR +REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, +INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING +OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED +TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY +YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER +PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt b/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..77f0cdd5b0dd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt @@ -0,0 +1,240 @@ +[state: 21-11-2010] + +BATMAN-ADV +---------- + +Batman advanced is a new approach to wireless networking which +does no longer operate on the IP basis. Unlike the batman daemon, +which exchanges information using UDP packets and sets routing +tables, batman-advanced operates on ISO/OSI Layer 2 only and uses +and routes (or better: bridges) Ethernet Frames. It emulates a +virtual network switch of all nodes participating. Therefore all +nodes appear to be link local, thus all higher operating proto- +cols won't be affected by any changes within the network. You can +run almost any protocol above batman advanced, prominent examples +are: IPv4, IPv6, DHCP, IPX. + +Batman advanced was implemented as a Linux kernel driver to re- +duce the overhead to a minimum. It does not depend on any (other) +network driver, and can be used on wifi as well as ethernet lan, +vpn, etc ... (anything with ethernet-style layer 2). + +CONFIGURATION +------------- + +Load the batman-adv module into your kernel: + +# insmod batman-adv.ko + +The module is now waiting for activation. You must add some in- +terfaces on which batman can operate. After loading the module +batman advanced will scan your systems interfaces to search for +compatible interfaces. Once found, it will create subfolders in +the /sys directories of each supported interface, e.g. + +# ls /sys/class/net/eth0/batman_adv/ +# iface_status mesh_iface + +If an interface does not have the "batman_adv" subfolder it prob- +ably is not supported. Not supported interfaces are: loopback, +non-ethernet and batman's own interfaces. + +Note: After the module was loaded it will continuously watch for +new interfaces to verify the compatibility. There is no need to +reload the module if you plug your USB wifi adapter into your ma- +chine after batman advanced was initially loaded. + +To activate a given interface simply write "bat0" into its +"mesh_iface" file inside the batman_adv subfolder: + +# echo bat0 > /sys/class/net/eth0/batman_adv/mesh_iface + +Repeat this step for all interfaces you wish to add. Now batman +starts using/broadcasting on this/these interface(s). + +By reading the "iface_status" file you can check its status: + +# cat /sys/class/net/eth0/batman_adv/iface_status +# active + +To deactivate an interface you have to write "none" into its +"mesh_iface" file: + +# echo none > /sys/class/net/eth0/batman_adv/mesh_iface + + +All mesh wide settings can be found in batman's own interface +folder: + +# ls /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/ +# aggregated_ogms bonding fragmentation orig_interval +# vis_mode + + +There is a special folder for debugging informations: + +# ls /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/ +# originators socket transtable_global transtable_local +# vis_data + + +Some of the files contain all sort of status information regard- +ing the mesh network. For example, you can view the table of +originators (mesh participants) with: + +# cat /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/originators + +Other files allow to change batman's behaviour to better fit your +requirements. For instance, you can check the current originator +interval (value in milliseconds which determines how often batman +sends its broadcast packets): + +# cat /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/orig_interval +# 1000 + +and also change its value: + +# echo 3000 > /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/orig_interval + +In very mobile scenarios, you might want to adjust the originator +interval to a lower value. This will make the mesh more respon- +sive to topology changes, but will also increase the overhead. + + +USAGE +----- + +To make use of your newly created mesh, batman advanced provides +a new interface "bat0" which you should use from this point on. +All interfaces added to batman advanced are not relevant any +longer because batman handles them for you. Basically, one "hands +over" the data by using the batman interface and batman will make +sure it reaches its destination. + +The "bat0" interface can be used like any other regular inter- +face. It needs an IP address which can be either statically con- +figured or dynamically (by using DHCP or similar services): + +# NodeA: ifconfig bat0 192.168.0.1 +# NodeB: ifconfig bat0 192.168.0.2 +# NodeB: ping 192.168.0.1 + +Note: In order to avoid problems remove all IP addresses previ- +ously assigned to interfaces now used by batman advanced, e.g. + +# ifconfig eth0 0.0.0.0 + + +VISUALIZATION +------------- + +If you want topology visualization, at least one mesh node must +be configured as VIS-server: + +# echo "server" > /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/vis_mode + +Each node is either configured as "server" or as "client" (de- +fault: "client"). Clients send their topology data to the server +next to them, and server synchronize with other servers. If there +is no server configured (default) within the mesh, no topology +information will be transmitted. With these "synchronizing +servers", there can be 1 or more vis servers sharing the same (or +at least very similar) data. + +When configured as server, you can get a topology snapshot of +your mesh: + +# cat /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/vis_data + +This raw output is intended to be easily parsable and convertable +with other tools. Have a look at the batctl README if you want a +vis output in dot or json format for instance and how those out- +puts could then be visualised in an image. + +The raw format consists of comma separated values per entry where +each entry is giving information about a certain source inter- +face. Each entry can/has to have the following values: +-> "mac" - mac address of an originator's source interface + (each line begins with it) +-> "TQ mac value" - src mac's link quality towards mac address + of a neighbor originator's interface which + is being used for routing +-> "HNA mac" - HNA announced by source mac +-> "PRIMARY" - this is a primary interface +-> "SEC mac" - secondary mac address of source + (requires preceding PRIMARY) + +The TQ value has a range from 4 to 255 with 255 being the best. +The HNA entries are showing which hosts are connected to the mesh +via bat0 or being bridged into the mesh network. The PRIMARY/SEC +values are only applied on primary interfaces + + +LOGGING/DEBUGGING +----------------- + +All error messages, warnings and information messages are sent to +the kernel log. Depending on your operating system distribution +this can be read in one of a number of ways. Try using the com- +mands: dmesg, logread, or looking in the files /var/log/kern.log +or /var/log/syslog. All batman-adv messages are prefixed with +"batman-adv:" So to see just these messages try + +# dmesg | grep batman-adv + +When investigating problems with your mesh network it is some- +times necessary to see more detail debug messages. This must be +enabled when compiling the batman-adv module. When building bat- +man-adv as part of kernel, use "make menuconfig" and enable the +option "B.A.T.M.A.N. debugging". + +Those additional debug messages can be accessed using a special +file in debugfs + +# cat /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/log + +The additional debug output is by default disabled. It can be en- +abled during run time. Following log_levels are defined: + +0 - All debug output disabled +1 - Enable messages related to routing / flooding / broadcasting +2 - Enable route or hna added / changed / deleted +3 - Enable all messages + +The debug output can be changed at runtime using the file +/sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/log_level. e.g. + +# echo 2 > /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/log_level + +will enable debug messages for when routes or HNAs change. + + +BATCTL +------ + +As batman advanced operates on layer 2 all hosts participating in +the virtual switch are completely transparent for all protocols +above layer 2. Therefore the common diagnosis tools do not work +as expected. To overcome these problems batctl was created. At +the moment the batctl contains ping, traceroute, tcpdump and +interfaces to the kernel module settings. + +For more information, please see the manpage (man batctl). + +batctl is available on http://www.open-mesh.org/ + + +CONTACT +------- + +Please send us comments, experiences, questions, anything :) + +IRC: #batman on irc.freenode.org +Mailing-list: b.a.t.m.a.n@b.a.t.m.a.n@lists.open-mesh.org + (optional subscription at + https://lists.open-mesh.org/mm/listinfo/b.a.t.m.a.n) + +You can also contact the Authors: + +Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de> diff --git a/Documentation/networking/bridge.txt b/Documentation/networking/bridge.txt index bec69a8a1697..a7ba5e4e2c91 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/bridge.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/bridge.txt @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ In order to use the Ethernet bridging functionality, you'll need the userspace tools. These programs and documentation are available -at http://www.linux-foundation.org/en/Net:Bridge. The download page is +at http://www.linuxfoundation.org/en/Net:Bridge. The download page is http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/bridge. If you still have questions, don't hesitate to post to the mailing list -(more info http://lists.osdl.org/mailman/listinfo/bridge). +(more info https://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bridge). diff --git a/Documentation/networking/caif/spi_porting.txt b/Documentation/networking/caif/spi_porting.txt index 61d7c9247453..0cb8cb9098f4 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/caif/spi_porting.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/caif/spi_porting.txt @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ the physical hardware, both with regard to SPI and to GPIOs. This function is called by the CAIF SPI interface to give you a chance to set up your hardware to be ready to receive a stream of data from the master. The xfer structure contains - both physical and logical adresses, as well as the total length + both physical and logical addresses, as well as the total length of the transfer in both directions.The dev parameter can be used to map to different CAIF SPI slave devices. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt index 271d524a4c8d..d718bc2ff1cf 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt @@ -38,15 +38,35 @@ The Linux DCCP implementation does not currently support all the features that a specified in RFCs 4340...42. The known bugs are at: - http://linux-net.osdl.org/index.php/TODO#DCCP + http://www.linuxfoundation.org/collaborate/workgroups/networking/todo#DCCP For more up-to-date versions of the DCCP implementation, please consider using the experimental DCCP test tree; instructions for checking this out are on: -http://linux-net.osdl.org/index.php/DCCP_Testing#Experimental_DCCP_source_tree +http://www.linuxfoundation.org/collaborate/workgroups/networking/dccp_testing#Experimental_DCCP_source_tree Socket options ============== +DCCP_SOCKOPT_QPOLICY_ID sets the dequeuing policy for outgoing packets. It takes +a policy ID as argument and can only be set before the connection (i.e. changes +during an established connection are not supported). Currently, two policies are +defined: the "simple" policy (DCCPQ_POLICY_SIMPLE), which does nothing special, +and a priority-based variant (DCCPQ_POLICY_PRIO). The latter allows to pass an +u32 priority value as ancillary data to sendmsg(), where higher numbers indicate +a higher packet priority (similar to SO_PRIORITY). This ancillary data needs to +be formatted using a cmsg(3) message header filled in as follows: + cmsg->cmsg_level = SOL_DCCP; + cmsg->cmsg_type = DCCP_SCM_PRIORITY; + cmsg->cmsg_len = CMSG_LEN(sizeof(uint32_t)); /* or CMSG_LEN(4) */ + +DCCP_SOCKOPT_QPOLICY_TXQLEN sets the maximum length of the output queue. A zero +value is always interpreted as unbounded queue length. If different from zero, +the interpretation of this parameter depends on the current dequeuing policy +(see above): the "simple" policy will enforce a fixed queue size by returning +EAGAIN, whereas the "prio" policy enforces a fixed queue length by dropping the +lowest-priority packet first. The default value for this parameter is +initialised from /proc/sys/net/dccp/default/tx_qlen. + DCCP_SOCKOPT_SERVICE sets the service. The specification mandates use of service codes (RFC 4340, sec. 8.1.2); if this socket option is not set, the socket will fall back to 0 (which means that no meaningful service code @@ -147,6 +167,7 @@ rx_ccid = 2 seq_window = 100 The initial sequence window (sec. 7.5.2) of the sender. This influences the local ackno validity and the remote seqno validity windows (7.5.1). + Values in the range Wmin = 32 (RFC 4340, 7.5.2) up to 2^32-1 can be set. tx_qlen = 5 The size of the transmit buffer in packets. A value of 0 corresponds diff --git a/Documentation/networking/e100.txt b/Documentation/networking/e100.txt index 944aa55e79f8..162f323a7a1f 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/e100.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/e100.txt @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Tx Descriptors: Number of transmit descriptors. A transmit descriptor is a data ethtool -G eth? tx n, where n is the number of desired tx descriptors. Speed/Duplex: The driver auto-negotiates the link speed and duplex settings by - default. Ethtool can be used as follows to force speed/duplex. + default. The ethtool utility can be used as follows to force speed/duplex. ethtool -s eth? autoneg off speed {10|100} duplex {full|half} @@ -126,30 +126,21 @@ Additional Configurations ------- The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and - diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. Ethtool + diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The ethtool version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality. The latest release of ethtool can be found from - http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel. - - NOTE: Ethtool 1.6 only supports a limited set of ethtool options. Support - for a more complete ethtool feature set can be enabled by upgrading - ethtool to ethtool-1.8.1. - + http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL) --------------------------- - WoL is provided through the Ethtool* utility. Ethtool is included with Red - Hat* 8.0. For other Linux distributions, download and install Ethtool from - the following website: http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel. - - For instructions on enabling WoL with Ethtool, refer to the Ethtool man page. + WoL is provided through the ethtool* utility. For instructions on enabling + WoL with ethtool, refer to the ethtool man page. WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. For this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the e100 driver must be loaded when shutting down or rebooting the system. - NAPI ---- diff --git a/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt b/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt index d9271e74e488..71ca95855671 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ InterruptThrottleRate --------------------- (not supported on Intel(R) 82542, 82543 or 82544-based adapters) Valid Range: 0,1,3,4,100-100000 (0=off, 1=dynamic, 3=dynamic conservative, - 4=simplified balancing) + 4=simplified balancing) Default Value: 3 The driver can limit the amount of interrupts per second that the adapter @@ -124,8 +124,8 @@ InterruptThrottleRate is set to mode 1. In this mode, which operates the same as mode 3, the InterruptThrottleRate will be increased stepwise to 70000 for traffic in class "Lowest latency". -In simplified mode the interrupt rate is based on the ratio of Tx and -Rx traffic. If the bytes per second rate is approximately equal, the +In simplified mode the interrupt rate is based on the ratio of TX and +RX traffic. If the bytes per second rate is approximately equal, the interrupt rate will drop as low as 2000 interrupts per second. If the traffic is mostly transmit or mostly receive, the interrupt rate could be as high as 8000. @@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ NOTE: Depending on the available system resources, the request for a TxDescriptorStep ---------------- Valid Range: 1 (use every Tx Descriptor) - 4 (use every 4th Tx Descriptor) + 4 (use every 4th Tx Descriptor) Default Value: 1 (use every Tx Descriptor) @@ -312,7 +312,7 @@ Valid Range: 0-xxxxxxx (0=off) Default Value: 256 Usage: insmod e1000.ko copybreak=128 -Driver copies all packets below or equaling this size to a fresh Rx +Driver copies all packets below or equaling this size to a fresh RX buffer before handing it up the stack. This parameter is different than other parameters, in that it is a @@ -431,15 +431,15 @@ Additional Configurations Ethtool ------- The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and - diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. Ethtool + diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The ethtool version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality. The latest release of ethtool can be found from - http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel. + http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL) --------------------------- - WoL is configured through the Ethtool* utility. + WoL is configured through the ethtool* utility. WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. For this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the e1000 driver must be diff --git a/Documentation/networking/e1000e.txt b/Documentation/networking/e1000e.txt index 6aa048badf32..97b5ba942ebf 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/e1000e.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/e1000e.txt @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Linux* Driver for Intel(R) Network Connection -=============================================================== +============================================= Intel Gigabit Linux driver. Copyright(c) 1999 - 2010 Intel Corporation. @@ -61,6 +61,12 @@ per second, even if more packets have come in. This reduces interrupt load on the system and can lower CPU utilization under heavy load, but will increase latency as packets are not processed as quickly. +The default behaviour of the driver previously assumed a static +InterruptThrottleRate value of 8000, providing a good fallback value for +all traffic types, but lacking in small packet performance and latency. +The hardware can handle many more small packets per second however, and +for this reason an adaptive interrupt moderation algorithm was implemented. + The driver has two adaptive modes (setting 1 or 3) in which it dynamically adjusts the InterruptThrottleRate value based on the traffic that it receives. After determining the type of incoming traffic in the last @@ -86,8 +92,8 @@ InterruptThrottleRate is set to mode 1. In this mode, which operates the same as mode 3, the InterruptThrottleRate will be increased stepwise to 70000 for traffic in class "Lowest latency". -In simplified mode the interrupt rate is based on the ratio of Tx and -Rx traffic. If the bytes per second rate is approximately equal the +In simplified mode the interrupt rate is based on the ratio of TX and +RX traffic. If the bytes per second rate is approximately equal, the interrupt rate will drop as low as 2000 interrupts per second. If the traffic is mostly transmit or mostly receive, the interrupt rate could be as high as 8000. @@ -177,7 +183,7 @@ Copybreak Valid Range: 0-xxxxxxx (0=off) Default Value: 256 -Driver copies all packets below or equaling this size to a fresh Rx +Driver copies all packets below or equaling this size to a fresh RX buffer before handing it up the stack. This parameter is different than other parameters, in that it is a @@ -223,17 +229,17 @@ loading or enabling the driver, try disabling this feature. WriteProtectNVM --------------- -Valid Range: 0-1 -Default Value: 1 (enabled) - -Set the hardware to ignore all write/erase cycles to the GbE region in the -ICHx NVM (non-volatile memory). This feature can be disabled by the -WriteProtectNVM module parameter (enabled by default) only after a hardware -reset, but the machine must be power cycled before trying to enable writes. - -Note: the kernel boot option iomem=relaxed may need to be set if the kernel -config option CONFIG_STRICT_DEVMEM=y, if the root user wants to write the -NVM from user space via ethtool. +Valid Range: 0,1 +Default Value: 1 + +If set to 1, configure the hardware to ignore all write/erase cycles to the +GbE region in the ICHx NVM (in order to prevent accidental corruption of the +NVM). This feature can be disabled by setting the parameter to 0 during initial +driver load. +NOTE: The machine must be power cycled (full off/on) when enabling NVM writes +via setting the parameter to zero. Once the NVM has been locked (via the +parameter at 1 when the driver loads) it cannot be unlocked except via power +cycle. Additional Configurations ========================= @@ -259,32 +265,30 @@ Additional Configurations - Some adapters limit Jumbo Frames sized packets to a maximum of 4096 bytes and some adapters do not support Jumbo Frames. - Ethtool ------- The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. We - strongly recommend downloading the latest version of Ethtool at: + strongly recommend downloading the latest version of ethtool at: - http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel. + http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ Speed and Duplex ---------------- - Speed and Duplex are configured through the Ethtool* utility. For - instructions, refer to the Ethtool man page. + Speed and Duplex are configured through the ethtool* utility. For + instructions, refer to the ethtool man page. Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL) --------------------------- - WoL is configured through the Ethtool* utility. For instructions on - enabling WoL with Ethtool, refer to the Ethtool man page. + WoL is configured through the ethtool* utility. For instructions on + enabling WoL with ethtool, refer to the ethtool man page. WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. For this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the e1000e driver must be loaded when shutting down or rebooting the system. In most cases Wake On LAN is only supported on port A for multiple port - adapters. To verify if a port supports Wake on LAN run ethtool eth<X>. - + adapters. To verify if a port supports Wake on Lan run ethtool eth<X>. Support ======= diff --git a/Documentation/networking/generic_netlink.txt b/Documentation/networking/generic_netlink.txt index d4f8b8b9b53c..3e071115ca90 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/generic_netlink.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/generic_netlink.txt @@ -1,3 +1,3 @@ A wiki document on how to use Generic Netlink can be found here: - * http://linux-net.osdl.org/index.php/Generic_Netlink_HOWTO + * http://www.linuxfoundation.org/collaborate/workgroups/networking/generic_netlink_howto diff --git a/Documentation/networking/igb.txt b/Documentation/networking/igb.txt index ab2d71831892..98953c0d5342 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/igb.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/igb.txt @@ -36,6 +36,7 @@ Default Value: 0 This parameter adds support for SR-IOV. It causes the driver to spawn up to max_vfs worth of virtual function. + Additional Configurations ========================= @@ -60,15 +61,16 @@ Additional Configurations Ethtool ------- The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and - diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. + diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest + version of ethtool can be found at: - http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel. + http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL) --------------------------- - WoL is configured through the Ethtool* utility. + WoL is configured through the ethtool* utility. - For instructions on enabling WoL with Ethtool, refer to the Ethtool man page. + For instructions on enabling WoL with ethtool, refer to the ethtool man page. WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. For this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the igb driver must be @@ -91,31 +93,6 @@ Additional Configurations REQUIREMENTS: MSI-X support is required for Multiqueue. If MSI-X is not found, the system will fallback to MSI or to Legacy interrupts. - LRO - --- - Large Receive Offload (LRO) is a technique for increasing inbound throughput - of high-bandwidth network connections by reducing CPU overhead. It works by - aggregating multiple incoming packets from a single stream into a larger - buffer before they are passed higher up the networking stack, thus reducing - the number of packets that have to be processed. LRO combines multiple - Ethernet frames into a single receive in the stack, thereby potentially - decreasing CPU utilization for receives. - - NOTE: You need to have inet_lro enabled via either the CONFIG_INET_LRO or - CONFIG_INET_LRO_MODULE kernel config option. Additionally, if - CONFIG_INET_LRO_MODULE is used, the inet_lro module needs to be loaded - before the igb driver. - - You can verify that the driver is using LRO by looking at these counters in - Ethtool: - - lro_aggregated - count of total packets that were combined - lro_flushed - counts the number of packets flushed out of LRO - lro_no_desc - counts the number of times an LRO descriptor was not available - for the LRO packet - - NOTE: IPv6 and UDP are not supported by LRO. - Support ======= diff --git a/Documentation/networking/igbvf.txt b/Documentation/networking/igbvf.txt index 056028138d9c..cbfe4ee65533 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/igbvf.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/igbvf.txt @@ -58,9 +58,11 @@ Additional Configurations Ethtool ------- The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and - diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. + diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The ethtool + version 3.0 or later is required for this functionality, although we + strongly recommend downloading the latest version at: - http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel. + http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ Support ======= diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt index c7165f4cb792..d99940dcfc44 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt @@ -11,7 +11,9 @@ ip_forward - BOOLEAN for routers) ip_default_ttl - INTEGER - default 64 + Default value of TTL field (Time To Live) for outgoing (but not + forwarded) IP packets. Should be between 1 and 255 inclusive. + Default: 64 (as recommended by RFC1700) ip_no_pmtu_disc - BOOLEAN Disable Path MTU Discovery. @@ -20,6 +22,15 @@ ip_no_pmtu_disc - BOOLEAN min_pmtu - INTEGER default 562 - minimum discovered Path MTU +route/max_size - INTEGER + Maximum number of routes allowed in the kernel. Increase + this when using large numbers of interfaces and/or routes. + +neigh/default/gc_thresh3 - INTEGER + Maximum number of neighbor entries allowed. Increase this + when using large numbers of interfaces and when communicating + with large numbers of directly-connected peers. + mtu_expires - INTEGER Time, in seconds, that cached PMTU information is kept. @@ -135,6 +146,7 @@ tcp_adv_win_scale - INTEGER Count buffering overhead as bytes/2^tcp_adv_win_scale (if tcp_adv_win_scale > 0) or bytes-bytes/2^(-tcp_adv_win_scale), if it is <= 0. + Possible values are [-31, 31], inclusive. Default: 2 tcp_allowed_congestion_control - STRING @@ -698,10 +710,28 @@ igmp_max_memberships - INTEGER Change the maximum number of multicast groups we can subscribe to. Default: 20 -conf/interface/* changes special settings per interface (where "interface" is - the name of your network interface) -conf/all/* is special, changes the settings for all interfaces + Theoretical maximum value is bounded by having to send a membership + report in a single datagram (i.e. the report can't span multiple + datagrams, or risk confusing the switch and leaving groups you don't + intend to). + + The number of supported groups 'M' is bounded by the number of group + report entries you can fit into a single datagram of 65535 bytes. + + M = 65536-sizeof (ip header)/(sizeof(Group record)) + + Group records are variable length, with a minimum of 12 bytes. + So net.ipv4.igmp_max_memberships should not be set higher than: + + (65536-24) / 12 = 5459 + + The value 5459 assumes no IP header options, so in practice + this number may be lower. + + conf/interface/* changes special settings per interface (where + "interface" is the name of your network interface) + conf/all/* is special, changes the settings for all interfaces log_martians - BOOLEAN Log packets with impossible addresses to kernel log. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ixgb.txt b/Documentation/networking/ixgb.txt index a0d0ffb5e584..e196f16df313 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ixgb.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ixgb.txt @@ -309,15 +309,15 @@ Additional Configurations Ethtool ------- The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and - diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. Ethtool + diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The ethtool version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality. The latest release of ethtool can be found from - http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel + http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ - NOTE: Ethtool 1.6 only supports a limited set of ethtool options. Support - for a more complete ethtool feature set can be enabled by upgrading - to the latest version. + NOTE: The ethtool version 1.6 only supports a limited set of ethtool options. + Support for a more complete ethtool feature set can be enabled by + upgrading to the latest version. NAPI diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ixgbe.txt b/Documentation/networking/ixgbe.txt index eeb68685c788..af77ed3c4172 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ixgbe.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ixgbe.txt @@ -1,107 +1,126 @@ Linux Base Driver for 10 Gigabit PCI Express Intel(R) Network Connection ======================================================================== -March 10, 2009 - +Intel Gigabit Linux driver. +Copyright(c) 1999 - 2010 Intel Corporation. Contents ======== -- In This Release - Identifying Your Adapter -- Building and Installation - Additional Configurations +- Performance Tuning +- Known Issues - Support +Identifying Your Adapter +======================== +The driver in this release is compatible with 82598 and 82599-based Intel +Network Connections. -In This Release -=============== +For more information on how to identify your adapter, go to the Adapter & +Driver ID Guide at: -This file describes the ixgbe Linux Base Driver for the 10 Gigabit PCI -Express Intel(R) Network Connection. This driver includes support for -Itanium(R)2-based systems. + http://support.intel.com/support/network/sb/CS-012904.htm -For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation -supplied with your 10 Gigabit adapter. All hardware requirements listed apply -to use with Linux. +SFP+ Devices with Pluggable Optics +---------------------------------- -The following features are available in this kernel: - - Native VLANs - - Channel Bonding (teaming) - - SNMP - - Generic Receive Offload - - Data Center Bridging +82599-BASED ADAPTERS -Channel Bonding documentation can be found in the Linux kernel source: -/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt +NOTES: If your 82599-based Intel(R) Network Adapter came with Intel optics, or +is an Intel(R) Ethernet Server Adapter X520-2, then it only supports Intel +optics and/or the direct attach cables listed below. -Ethtool, lspci, and ifconfig can be used to display device and driver -specific information. +When 82599-based SFP+ devices are connected back to back, they should be set to +the same Speed setting via ethtool. Results may vary if you mix speed settings. +82598-based adapters support all passive direct attach cables that comply +with SFF-8431 v4.1 and SFF-8472 v10.4 specifications. Active direct attach +cables are not supported. +Supplier Type Part Numbers -Identifying Your Adapter -======================== +SR Modules +Intel DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (bailed) FTLX8571D3BCV-IT +Intel DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (bailed) AFBR-703SDDZ-IN1 +Intel DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (bailed) AFBR-703SDZ-IN2 +LR Modules +Intel DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (bailed) FTLX1471D3BCV-IT +Intel DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (bailed) AFCT-701SDDZ-IN1 +Intel DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (bailed) AFCT-701SDZ-IN2 -This driver supports devices based on the 82598 controller and the 82599 -controller. +The following is a list of 3rd party SFP+ modules and direct attach cables that +have received some testing. Not all modules are applicable to all devices. -For specific information on identifying which adapter you have, please visit: +Supplier Type Part Numbers - http://support.intel.com/support/network/sb/CS-008441.htm +Finisar SFP+ SR bailed, 10g single rate FTLX8571D3BCL +Avago SFP+ SR bailed, 10g single rate AFBR-700SDZ +Finisar SFP+ LR bailed, 10g single rate FTLX1471D3BCL +Finisar DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (No Bail) FTLX8571D3QCV-IT +Avago DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (No Bail) AFBR-703SDZ-IN1 +Finisar DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (No Bail) FTLX1471D3QCV-IT +Avago DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (No Bail) AFCT-701SDZ-IN1 +Finistar 1000BASE-T SFP FCLF8522P2BTL +Avago 1000BASE-T SFP ABCU-5710RZ -Building and Installation -========================= +82599-based adapters support all passive and active limiting direct attach +cables that comply with SFF-8431 v4.1 and SFF-8472 v10.4 specifications. -select m for "Intel(R) 10GbE PCI Express adapters support" located at: - Location: - -> Device Drivers - -> Network device support (NETDEVICES [=y]) - -> Ethernet (10000 Mbit) (NETDEV_10000 [=y]) +Laser turns off for SFP+ when ifconfig down +------------------------------------------- +"ifconfig down" turns off the laser for 82599-based SFP+ fiber adapters. +"ifconfig up" turns on the later. -1. make modules & make modules_install -2. Load the module: +82598-BASED ADAPTERS -# modprobe ixgbe +NOTES for 82598-Based Adapters: +- Intel(R) Network Adapters that support removable optical modules only support + their original module type (i.e., the Intel(R) 10 Gigabit SR Dual Port + Express Module only supports SR optical modules). If you plug in a different + type of module, the driver will not load. +- Hot Swapping/hot plugging optical modules is not supported. +- Only single speed, 10 gigabit modules are supported. +- LAN on Motherboard (LOMs) may support DA, SR, or LR modules. Other module + types are not supported. Please see your system documentation for details. - The insmod command can be used if the full - path to the driver module is specified. For example: +The following is a list of 3rd party SFP+ modules and direct attach cables that +have received some testing. Not all modules are applicable to all devices. - insmod /lib/modules/<KERNEL VERSION>/kernel/drivers/net/ixgbe/ixgbe.ko +Supplier Type Part Numbers - With 2.6 based kernels also make sure that older ixgbe drivers are - removed from the kernel, before loading the new module: +Finisar SFP+ SR bailed, 10g single rate FTLX8571D3BCL +Avago SFP+ SR bailed, 10g single rate AFBR-700SDZ +Finisar SFP+ LR bailed, 10g single rate FTLX1471D3BCL - rmmod ixgbe; modprobe ixgbe +82598-based adapters support all passive direct attach cables that comply +with SFF-8431 v4.1 and SFF-8472 v10.4 specifications. Active direct attach +cables are not supported. -3. Assign an IP address to the interface by entering the following, where - x is the interface number: - ifconfig ethx <IP_address> +Flow Control +------------ +Ethernet Flow Control (IEEE 802.3x) can be configured with ethtool to enable +receiving and transmitting pause frames for ixgbe. When TX is enabled, PAUSE +frames are generated when the receive packet buffer crosses a predefined +threshold. When rx is enabled, the transmit unit will halt for the time delay +specified when a PAUSE frame is received. -4. Verify that the interface works. Enter the following, where <IP_address> - is the IP address for another machine on the same subnet as the interface - that is being tested: +Flow Control is enabled by default. If you want to disable a flow control +capable link partner, use ethtool: - ping <IP_address> + ethtool -A eth? autoneg off RX off TX off +NOTE: For 82598 backplane cards entering 1 gig mode, flow control default +behavior is changed to off. Flow control in 1 gig mode on these devices can +lead to Tx hangs. Additional Configurations ========================= - Viewing Link Messages - --------------------- - Link messages will not be displayed to the console if the distribution is - restricting system messages. In order to see network driver link messages on - your console, set dmesg to eight by entering the following: - - dmesg -n 8 - - NOTE: This setting is not saved across reboots. - - Jumbo Frames ------------ The driver supports Jumbo Frames for all adapters. Jumbo Frames support is @@ -123,13 +142,8 @@ Additional Configurations other protocols besides TCP. It's also safe to use with configurations that are problematic for LRO, namely bridging and iSCSI. - GRO is enabled by default in the driver. Future versions of ethtool will - support disabling and re-enabling GRO on the fly. - - Data Center Bridging, aka DCB ----------------------------- - DCB is a configuration Quality of Service implementation in hardware. It uses the VLAN priority tag (802.1p) to filter traffic. That means that there are 8 different priorities that traffic can be filtered into. @@ -163,24 +177,71 @@ Additional Configurations http://e1000.sf.net - Ethtool ------- The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and - diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. Ethtool - version 3.0 or later is required for this functionality. + diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest + ethtool version is required for this functionality. The latest release of ethtool can be found from - http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel. + http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ - - NAPI + FCoE ---- + This release of the ixgbe driver contains new code to enable users to use + Fiber Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) and Data Center Bridging (DCB) + functionality that is supported by the 82598-based hardware. This code has + no default effect on the regular driver operation, and configuring DCB and + FCoE is outside the scope of this driver README. Refer to + http://www.open-fcoe.org/ for FCoE project information and contact + e1000-eedc@lists.sourceforge.net for DCB information. + + MAC and VLAN anti-spoofing feature + ---------------------------------- + When a malicious driver attempts to send a spoofed packet, it is dropped by + the hardware and not transmitted. An interrupt is sent to the PF driver + notifying it of the spoof attempt. + + When a spoofed packet is detected the PF driver will send the following + message to the system log (displayed by the "dmesg" command): + + Spoof event(s) detected on VF (n) + + Where n=the VF that attempted to do the spoofing. + + +Performance Tuning +================== + +An excellent article on performance tuning can be found at: + +http://www.redhat.com/promo/summit/2008/downloads/pdf/Thursday/Mark_Wagner.pdf + + +Known Issues +============ + + Enabling SR-IOV in a 32-bit Microsoft* Windows* Server 2008 Guest OS using + Intel (R) 82576-based GbE or Intel (R) 82599-based 10GbE controller under KVM + ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + KVM Hypervisor/VMM supports direct assignment of a PCIe device to a VM. This + includes traditional PCIe devices, as well as SR-IOV-capable devices using + Intel 82576-based and 82599-based controllers. + + While direct assignment of a PCIe device or an SR-IOV Virtual Function (VF) + to a Linux-based VM running 2.6.32 or later kernel works fine, there is a + known issue with Microsoft Windows Server 2008 VM that results in a "yellow + bang" error. This problem is within the KVM VMM itself, not the Intel driver, + or the SR-IOV logic of the VMM, but rather that KVM emulates an older CPU + model for the guests, and this older CPU model does not support MSI-X + interrupts, which is a requirement for Intel SR-IOV. - NAPI (Rx polling mode) is supported in the ixgbe driver. NAPI is enabled - by default in the driver. + If you wish to use the Intel 82576 or 82599-based controllers in SR-IOV mode + with KVM and a Microsoft Windows Server 2008 guest try the following + workaround. The workaround is to tell KVM to emulate a different model of CPU + when using qemu to create the KVM guest: - See www.cyberus.ca/~hadi/usenix-paper.tgz for more information on NAPI. + "-cpu qemu64,model=13" Support diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ixgbevf.txt b/Documentation/networking/ixgbevf.txt index 21dd5d15b6b4..5a91a41fa946 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ixgbevf.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ixgbevf.txt @@ -35,10 +35,6 @@ Driver ID Guide at: Known Issues/Troubleshooting ============================ - Unloading Physical Function (PF) Driver Causes System Reboots When VM is - Running and VF is Loaded on the VM - ------------------------------------------------------------------------ - Do not unload the PF driver (ixgbe) while VFs are assigned to guests. Support ======= diff --git a/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt b/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt index 7ee770b5ef5f..80a7a3454902 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ This is the driver for the MAC 10/100/1000 on-chip Ethernet controllers (Synopsys IP blocks); it has been fully tested on STLinux platforms. Currently this network device driver is for all STM embedded MAC/GMAC -(7xxx SoCs). +(7xxx SoCs). Other platforms start using it i.e. ARM SPEAr. DWC Ether MAC 10/100/1000 Universal version 3.41a and DWC Ether MAC 10/100 Universal version 4.0 have been used for developing the first code @@ -95,9 +95,14 @@ Several information came from the platform; please refer to the driver's Header file in include/linux directory. struct plat_stmmacenet_data { - int bus_id; - int pbl; - int has_gmac; + int bus_id; + int pbl; + int clk_csr; + int has_gmac; + int enh_desc; + int tx_coe; + int bugged_jumbo; + int pmt; void (*fix_mac_speed)(void *priv, unsigned int speed); void (*bus_setup)(unsigned long ioaddr); #ifdef CONFIG_STM_DRIVERS @@ -114,6 +119,12 @@ Where: registers (on STM platforms); - has_gmac: GMAC core is on board (get it at run-time in the next step); - bus_id: bus identifier. +- tx_coe: core is able to perform the tx csum in HW. +- enh_desc: if sets the MAC will use the enhanced descriptor structure. +- clk_csr: CSR Clock range selection. +- bugged_jumbo: some HWs are not able to perform the csum in HW for + over-sized frames due to limited buffer sizes. Setting this + flag the csum will be done in SW on JUMBO frames. struct plat_stmmacphy_data { int bus_id; @@ -131,13 +142,28 @@ Where: - interface: physical MII interface mode; - phy_reset: hook to reset HW function. +SOURCES: +- Kconfig +- Makefile +- stmmac_main.c: main network device driver; +- stmmac_mdio.c: mdio functions; +- stmmac_ethtool.c: ethtool support; +- stmmac_timer.[ch]: timer code used for mitigating the driver dma interrupts + Only tested on ST40 platforms based. +- stmmac.h: private driver structure; +- common.h: common definitions and VFTs; +- descs.h: descriptor structure definitions; +- dwmac1000_core.c: GMAC core functions; +- dwmac1000_dma.c: dma functions for the GMAC chip; +- dwmac1000.h: specific header file for the GMAC; +- dwmac100_core: MAC 100 core and dma code; +- dwmac100_dma.c: dma funtions for the MAC chip; +- dwmac1000.h: specific header file for the MAC; +- dwmac_lib.c: generic DMA functions shared among chips +- enh_desc.c: functions for handling enhanced descriptors +- norm_desc.c: functions for handling normal descriptors + TODO: -- Continue to make the driver more generic and suitable for other Synopsys - Ethernet controllers used on other architectures (i.e. ARM). -- 10G controllers are not supported. -- MAC uses Normal descriptors and GMAC uses enhanced ones. - This is a limit that should be reviewed. MAC could want to - use the enhanced structure. -- Checksumming: Rx/Tx csum is done in HW in case of GMAC only. +- XGMAC controller is not supported. - Review the timer optimisation code to use an embedded device that seems to be available in new chip generations. diff --git a/Documentation/nfc/nfc-pn544.txt b/Documentation/nfc/nfc-pn544.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2fcac9f5996e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/nfc/nfc-pn544.txt @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ +Kernel driver for the NXP Semiconductors PN544 Near Field +Communication chip + +Author: Jari Vanhala +Contact: Matti Aaltonen (matti.j.aaltonen at nokia.com) + +General +------- + +The PN544 is an integrated transmission module for contactless +communication. The driver goes under drives/nfc/ and is compiled as a +module named "pn544". It registers a misc device and creates a device +file named "/dev/pn544". + +Host Interfaces: I2C, SPI and HSU, this driver supports currently only I2C. + +The Interface +------------- + +The driver offers a sysfs interface for a hardware test and an IOCTL +interface for selecting between two operating modes. There are read, +write and poll functions for transferring messages. The two operating +modes are the normal (HCI) mode and the firmware update mode. + +PN544 is controlled by sending messages from the userspace to the +chip. The main function of the driver is just to pass those messages +without caring about the message content. + + +Protocols +--------- + +In the normal (HCI) mode and in the firmware update mode read and +write functions behave a bit differently because the message formats +or the protocols are different. + +In the normal (HCI) mode the protocol used is derived from the ETSI +HCI specification. The firmware is updated using a specific protocol, +which is different from HCI. + +HCI messages consist of an eight bit header and the message body. The +header contains the message length. Maximum size for an HCI message is +33. In HCI mode sent messages are tested for a correct +checksum. Firmware update messages have the length in the second (MSB) +and third (LSB) bytes of the message. The maximum FW message length is +1024 bytes. + +For the ETSI HCI specification see +http://www.etsi.org/WebSite/Technologies/ProtocolSpecification.aspx + +The Hardware Test +----------------- + +The idea of the test is that it can performed by reading from the +corresponding sysfs file. The test is implemented in the board file +and it should test that PN544 can be put into the firmware update +mode. If the test is not implemented the sysfs file does not get +created. + +Example: +> cat /sys/module/pn544/drivers/i2c\:pn544/3-002b/nfc_test +1 + +Normal Operation +---------------- + +PN544 is powered up when the device file is opened, otherwise it's +turned off. Only one instance can use the device at a time. + +Userspace applications control PN544 with HCI messages. The hardware +sends an interrupt when data is available for reading. Data is +physically read when the read function is called by a userspace +application. Poll() checks the read interrupt state. Configuration and +self testing are also done from the userspace using read and write. + +Example platform data: + +static int rx71_pn544_nfc_request_resources(struct i2c_client *client) +{ + /* Get and setup the HW resources for the device */ +} + +static void rx71_pn544_nfc_free_resources(void) +{ + /* Release the HW resources */ +} + +static void rx71_pn544_nfc_enable(int fw) +{ + /* Turn the device on */ +} + +static int rx71_pn544_nfc_test(void) +{ + /* + * Put the device into the FW update mode + * and then back to the normal mode. + * Check the behavior and return one on success, + * zero on failure. + */ +} + +static void rx71_pn544_nfc_disable(void) +{ + /* turn the power off */ +} + +static struct pn544_nfc_platform_data rx71_nfc_data = { + .request_resources = rx71_pn544_nfc_request_resources, + .free_resources = rx71_pn544_nfc_free_resources, + .enable = rx71_pn544_nfc_enable, + .test = rx71_pn544_nfc_test, + .disable = rx71_pn544_nfc_disable, +}; diff --git a/Documentation/power/drivers-testing.txt b/Documentation/power/drivers-testing.txt index 7f7a737f7f9f..638afdf4d6b8 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/drivers-testing.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/drivers-testing.txt @@ -23,10 +23,10 @@ Once you have resolved the suspend/resume-related problems with your test system without the new driver, you are ready to test it: a) Build the driver as a module, load it and try the test modes of hibernation - (see: Documents/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, 1). + (see: Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, 1). b) Load the driver and attempt to hibernate in the "reboot", "shutdown" and - "platform" modes (see: Documents/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, 1). + "platform" modes (see: Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, 1). c) Compile the driver directly into the kernel and try the test modes of hibernation. @@ -34,12 +34,12 @@ c) Compile the driver directly into the kernel and try the test modes of d) Attempt to hibernate with the driver compiled directly into the kernel in the "reboot", "shutdown" and "platform" modes. -e) Try the test modes of suspend (see: Documents/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, +e) Try the test modes of suspend (see: Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, 2). [As far as the STR tests are concerned, it should not matter whether or not the driver is built as a module.] f) Attempt to suspend to RAM using the s2ram tool with the driver loaded - (see: Documents/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, 2). + (see: Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, 2). Each of the above tests should be repeated several times and the STD tests should be mixed with the STR tests. If any of them fails, the driver cannot be diff --git a/Documentation/power/opp.txt b/Documentation/power/opp.txt index 44d87ad3cea9..cd445582d1f8 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/opp.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/opp.txt @@ -37,6 +37,9 @@ Typical usage of the OPP library is as follows: SoC framework -> modifies on required cases certain OPPs -> OPP layer -> queries to search/retrieve information -> +Architectures that provide a SoC framework for OPP should select ARCH_HAS_OPP +to make the OPP layer available. + OPP layer expects each domain to be represented by a unique device pointer. SoC framework registers a set of initial OPPs per device with the OPP layer. This list is expected to be an optimally small number typically around 5 per device. diff --git a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt index 489e9bacd165..ffe55ffa540a 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt @@ -50,6 +50,15 @@ type's callbacks are not defined) of given device. The bus type, device type and device class callbacks are referred to as subsystem-level callbacks in what follows. +By default, the callbacks are always invoked in process context with interrupts +enabled. However, subsystems can use the pm_runtime_irq_safe() helper function +to tell the PM core that a device's ->runtime_suspend() and ->runtime_resume() +callbacks should be invoked in atomic context with interrupts disabled +(->runtime_idle() is still invoked the default way). This implies that these +callback routines must not block or sleep, but it also means that the +synchronous helper functions listed at the end of Section 4 can be used within +an interrupt handler or in an atomic context. + The subsystem-level suspend callback is _entirely_ _responsible_ for handling the suspend of the device as appropriate, which may, but need not include executing the device driver's own ->runtime_suspend() callback (from the @@ -237,6 +246,10 @@ defined in include/linux/pm.h: Section 8); it may be modified only by the pm_runtime_no_callbacks() helper function + unsigned int irq_safe; + - indicates that the ->runtime_suspend() and ->runtime_resume() callbacks + will be invoked with the spinlock held and interrupts disabled + unsigned int use_autosuspend; - indicates that the device's driver supports delayed autosuspend (see Section 9); it may be modified only by the @@ -344,6 +357,10 @@ drivers/base/power/runtime.c and include/linux/pm_runtime.h: - decrement the device's usage counter; if the result is 0 then run pm_runtime_idle(dev) and return its result + int pm_runtime_put_sync_suspend(struct device *dev); + - decrement the device's usage counter; if the result is 0 then run + pm_runtime_suspend(dev) and return its result + int pm_runtime_put_sync_autosuspend(struct device *dev); - decrement the device's usage counter; if the result is 0 then run pm_runtime_autosuspend(dev) and return its result @@ -379,8 +396,8 @@ drivers/base/power/runtime.c and include/linux/pm_runtime.h: zero) bool pm_runtime_suspended(struct device *dev); - - return true if the device's runtime PM status is 'suspended', or false - otherwise + - return true if the device's runtime PM status is 'suspended' and its + 'power.disable_depth' field is equal to zero, or false otherwise void pm_runtime_allow(struct device *dev); - set the power.runtime_auto flag for the device and decrease its usage @@ -397,6 +414,11 @@ drivers/base/power/runtime.c and include/linux/pm_runtime.h: PM attributes from /sys/devices/.../power (or prevent them from being added when the device is registered) + void pm_runtime_irq_safe(struct device *dev); + - set the power.irq_safe flag for the device, causing the runtime-PM + suspend and resume callbacks (but not the idle callback) to be invoked + with interrupts disabled + void pm_runtime_mark_last_busy(struct device *dev); - set the power.last_busy field to the current time @@ -438,6 +460,15 @@ pm_runtime_suspended() pm_runtime_mark_last_busy() pm_runtime_autosuspend_expiration() +If pm_runtime_irq_safe() has been called for a device then the following helper +functions may also be used in interrupt context: + +pm_runtime_suspend() +pm_runtime_autosuspend() +pm_runtime_resume() +pm_runtime_get_sync() +pm_runtime_put_sync_suspend() + 5. Run-time PM Initialization, Device Probing and Removal Initially, the run-time PM is disabled for all devices, which means that the diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt index 302db5da49b3..7400d7555dc3 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ order to avoid the degeneration that had become the ppc32 kernel entry point and the way a new platform should be added to the kernel. The legacy iSeries platform breaks those rules as it predates this scheme, but no new board support will be accepted in the main tree that -doesn't follows them properly. In addition, since the advent of the +doesn't follow them properly. In addition, since the advent of the arch/powerpc merged architecture for ppc32 and ppc64, new 32-bit platforms and 32-bit platforms which move into arch/powerpc will be required to use these rules as well. @@ -1025,7 +1025,7 @@ dtc source code can be found at WARNING: This version is still in early development stage; the resulting device-tree "blobs" have not yet been validated with the -kernel. The current generated bloc lacks a useful reserve map (it will +kernel. The current generated block lacks a useful reserve map (it will be fixed to generate an empty one, it's up to the bootloader to fill it up) among others. The error handling needs work, bugs are lurking, etc... @@ -1098,7 +1098,7 @@ supported currently at the toplevel. * an arbitrary array of bytes */ - childnode@addresss { /* define a child node named "childnode" + childnode@address { /* define a child node named "childnode" * whose unit name is "childnode at * address" */ diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/4xx/cpm.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/4xx/cpm.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ee459806d35e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/4xx/cpm.txt @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +PPC4xx Clock Power Management (CPM) node + +Required properties: + - compatible : compatible list, currently only "ibm,cpm" + - dcr-access-method : "native" + - dcr-reg : < DCR register range > + +Optional properties: + - er-offset : All 4xx SoCs with a CPM controller have + one of two different order for the CPM + registers. Some have the CPM registers + in the following order (ER,FR,SR). The + others have them in the following order + (SR,ER,FR). For the second case set + er-offset = <1>. + - unused-units : specifier consist of one cell. For each + bit in the cell, the corresponding bit + in CPM will be set to turn off unused + devices. + - idle-doze : specifier consist of one cell. For each + bit in the cell, the corresponding bit + in CPM will be set to turn off unused + devices. This is usually just CPM[CPU]. + - standby : specifier consist of one cell. For each + bit in the cell, the corresponding bit + in CPM will be set on standby and + restored on resume. + - suspend : specifier consist of one cell. For each + bit in the cell, the corresponding bit + in CPM will be set on suspend (mem) and + restored on resume. Note, for standby + and suspend the corresponding bits can + be different or the same. Usually for + standby only class 2 and 3 units are set. + However, the interface does not care. + If they are the same, the additional + power saving will be seeing if support + is available to put the DDR in self + refresh mode and any additional power + saving techniques for the specific SoC. + +Example: + CPM0: cpm { + compatible = "ibm,cpm"; + dcr-access-method = "native"; + dcr-reg = <0x160 0x003>; + er-offset = <0>; + unused-units = <0x00000100>; + idle-doze = <0x02000000>; + standby = <0xfeff0000>; + suspend = <0xfeff791d>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/eeprom.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/eeprom.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4342c10de1bf --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/eeprom.txt @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +EEPROMs (I2C) + +Required properties: + + - compatible : should be "<manufacturer>,<type>" + If there is no specific driver for <manufacturer>, a generic + driver based on <type> is selected. Possible types are: + 24c00, 24c01, 24c02, 24c04, 24c08, 24c16, 24c32, 24c64, + 24c128, 24c256, 24c512, 24c1024, spd + + - reg : the I2C address of the EEPROM + +Optional properties: + + - pagesize : the length of the pagesize for writing. Please consult the + manual of your device, that value varies a lot. A wrong value + may result in data loss! If not specified, a safety value of + '1' is used which will be very slow. + + - read-only: this parameterless property disables writes to the eeprom + +Example: + +eeprom@52 { + compatible = "atmel,24c32"; + reg = <0x52>; + pagesize = <32>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/pps/pps.txt b/Documentation/pps/pps.txt index 125f4ab48998..d35dcdd82ff6 100644 --- a/Documentation/pps/pps.txt +++ b/Documentation/pps/pps.txt @@ -170,3 +170,49 @@ and the run ppstest as follow: Please, note that to compile userland programs you need the file timepps.h (see Documentation/pps/). + + +Generators +---------- + +Sometimes one needs to be able not only to catch PPS signals but to produce +them also. For example, running a distributed simulation, which requires +computers' clock to be synchronized very tightly. One way to do this is to +invent some complicated hardware solutions but it may be neither necessary +nor affordable. The cheap way is to load a PPS generator on one of the +computers (master) and PPS clients on others (slaves), and use very simple +cables to deliver signals using parallel ports, for example. + +Parallel port cable pinout: +pin name master slave +1 STROBE *------ * +2 D0 * | * +3 D1 * | * +4 D2 * | * +5 D3 * | * +6 D4 * | * +7 D5 * | * +8 D6 * | * +9 D7 * | * +10 ACK * ------* +11 BUSY * * +12 PE * * +13 SEL * * +14 AUTOFD * * +15 ERROR * * +16 INIT * * +17 SELIN * * +18-25 GND *-----------* + +Please note that parallel port interrupt occurs only on high->low transition, +so it is used for PPS assert edge. PPS clear edge can be determined only +using polling in the interrupt handler which actually can be done way more +precisely because interrupt handling delays can be quite big and random. So +current parport PPS generator implementation (pps_gen_parport module) is +geared towards using the clear edge for time synchronization. + +Clear edge polling is done with disabled interrupts so it's better to select +delay between assert and clear edge as small as possible to reduce system +latencies. But if it is too small slave won't be able to capture clear edge +transition. The default of 30us should be good enough in most situations. +The delay can be selected using 'delay' pps_gen_parport module parameter. diff --git a/Documentation/rbtree.txt b/Documentation/rbtree.txt index 221f38be98f4..19f8278c3854 100644 --- a/Documentation/rbtree.txt +++ b/Documentation/rbtree.txt @@ -21,8 +21,8 @@ three rotations, respectively, to balance the tree), with slightly slower To quote Linux Weekly News: There are a number of red-black trees in use in the kernel. - The anticipatory, deadline, and CFQ I/O schedulers all employ - rbtrees to track requests; the packet CD/DVD driver does the same. + The deadline and CFQ I/O schedulers employ rbtrees to + track requests; the packet CD/DVD driver does the same. The high-resolution timer code uses an rbtree to organize outstanding timer requests. The ext3 filesystem tracks directory entries in a red-black tree. Virtual memory areas (VMAs) are tracked with red-black diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/00-INDEX b/Documentation/scheduler/00-INDEX index 3c00c9c3219e..d2651c47ae27 100644 --- a/Documentation/scheduler/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/scheduler/00-INDEX @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ sched-arch.txt - CPU Scheduler implementation hints for architecture specific code. sched-design-CFS.txt - - goals, design and implementation of the Complete Fair Scheduler. + - goals, design and implementation of the Completely Fair Scheduler. sched-domains.txt - information on scheduling domains. sched-nice-design.txt diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc index 337c924cc81f..5e83769c6aa9 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc @@ -573,7 +573,7 @@ Changes from 20041018 to 20041123 * Backround nodev_timeout processing to DPC This enables us to unblock (stop dev_loss_tmo) when appopriate. * Fix array discovery with multiple luns. The max_luns was 0 at - the time the host structure was intialized. lpfc_cfg_params + the time the host structure was initialized. lpfc_cfg_params then set the max_luns to the correct value afterwards. * Remove unused define LPFC_MAX_LUN and set the default value of lpfc_max_lun parameter to 512. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas index 30023568805e..b64d10d221ec 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas @@ -1,3 +1,72 @@ +Release Date : Tues. Dec 14, 2010 17:00:00 PST 2010 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Adam Radford +Current Version : 00.00.05.29-rc1 +Old Version : 00.00.04.31-rc1 + 1. Rename megaraid_sas.c to megaraid_sas_base.c. + 2. Update GPL headers. + 3. Add MSI-X support and 'msix_disable' module parameter. + 4. Use lowest memory bar (for SR-IOV VF support). + 5. Add struct megasas_instance_temlate changes, and change all code to use + new instance entries: + + irqreturn_t (*service_isr )(int irq, void *devp); + void (*tasklet)(unsigned long); + u32 (*init_adapter)(struct megasas_instance *); + u32 (*build_and_issue_cmd) (struct megasas_instance *, + struct scsi_cmnd *); + void (*issue_dcmd) (struct megasas_instance *instance, + struct megasas_cmd *cmd); + + 6. Add code to support MegaRAID 9265/9285 controllers device id (0x5b). +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +1 Release Date : Thur. May 03, 2010 09:12:45 PST 2009 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Bo Yang + +2 Current Version : 00.00.04.31-rc1 +3 Older Version : 00.00.04.17.1-rc1 + +1. Add the Online Controller Reset (OCR) to the Driver. + OCR is the new feature for megaraid_sas driver which + will allow the fw to do the chip reset which will not + affact the OS behavious. + + To add the OCR support, driver need to do: + a). reset the controller chips -- Xscale and Gen2 which + will change the function calls and add the reset function + related to this two chips. + + b). during the reset, driver will store the pending cmds + which not returned by FW to driver's pending queue. Driver + will re-issue those pending cmds again to FW after the OCR + finished. + + c). In driver's timeout routine, driver will report to + OS as reset. Also driver's queue routine will block the + cmds until the OCR finished. + + d). in Driver's ISR routine, if driver get the FW state as + state change, FW in Failure status and FW support online controller + reset (OCR), driver will start to do the controller reset. + + e). In driver's IOCTL routine, the application cmds will wait for the + OCR to finish, then issue the cmds to FW. + + f). Before driver kill adapter, driver will do last chance of + OCR to see if driver can bring back the FW. + +2. Add the support update flag to the driver to tell LSI megaraid_sas + application which driver will support the device update. So application + will not need to do the device update after application add/del the device + from the system. +3. In driver's timeout routine, driver will do three time reset if fw is in + failed state. Driver will kill adapter if can't bring back FW after the + this three times reset. +4. Add the input parameter max_sectors to 1MB support to our GEN2 controller. + customer can use the input paramenter max_sectors to add 1MB support to GEN2 + controller. + 1 Release Date : Thur. Oct 29, 2009 09:12:45 PST 2009 - (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) Bo Yang diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt index 570ef2b3d79b..df322c103466 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt @@ -1044,9 +1044,9 @@ Details: /** - * queuecommand - queue scsi command, invoke 'done' on completion + * queuecommand - queue scsi command, invoke scp->scsi_done on completion + * @shost: pointer to the scsi host object * @scp: pointer to scsi command object - * @done: function pointer to be invoked on completion * * Returns 0 on success. * @@ -1074,42 +1074,45 @@ Details: * * Other types of errors that are detected immediately may be * flagged by setting scp->result to an appropriate value, - * invoking the 'done' callback, and then returning 0 from this - * function. If the command is not performed immediately (and the - * LLD is starting (or will start) the given command) then this - * function should place 0 in scp->result and return 0. + * invoking the scp->scsi_done callback, and then returning 0 + * from this function. If the command is not performed + * immediately (and the LLD is starting (or will start) the given + * command) then this function should place 0 in scp->result and + * return 0. * * Command ownership. If the driver returns zero, it owns the - * command and must take responsibility for ensuring the 'done' - * callback is executed. Note: the driver may call done before - * returning zero, but after it has called done, it may not - * return any value other than zero. If the driver makes a - * non-zero return, it must not execute the command's done - * callback at any time. - * - * Locks: struct Scsi_Host::host_lock held on entry (with "irqsave") - * and is expected to be held on return. + * command and must take responsibility for ensuring the + * scp->scsi_done callback is executed. Note: the driver may + * call scp->scsi_done before returning zero, but after it has + * called scp->scsi_done, it may not return any value other than + * zero. If the driver makes a non-zero return, it must not + * execute the command's scsi_done callback at any time. + * + * Locks: up to and including 2.6.36, struct Scsi_Host::host_lock + * held on entry (with "irqsave") and is expected to be + * held on return. From 2.6.37 onwards, queuecommand is + * called without any locks held. * * Calling context: in interrupt (soft irq) or process context * - * Notes: This function should be relatively fast. Normally it will - * not wait for IO to complete. Hence the 'done' callback is invoked - * (often directly from an interrupt service routine) some time after - * this function has returned. In some cases (e.g. pseudo adapter - * drivers that manufacture the response to a SCSI INQUIRY) - * the 'done' callback may be invoked before this function returns. - * If the 'done' callback is not invoked within a certain period - * the SCSI mid level will commence error processing. - * If a status of CHECK CONDITION is placed in "result" when the - * 'done' callback is invoked, then the LLD driver should - * perform autosense and fill in the struct scsi_cmnd::sense_buffer + * Notes: This function should be relatively fast. Normally it + * will not wait for IO to complete. Hence the scp->scsi_done + * callback is invoked (often directly from an interrupt service + * routine) some time after this function has returned. In some + * cases (e.g. pseudo adapter drivers that manufacture the + * response to a SCSI INQUIRY) the scp->scsi_done callback may be + * invoked before this function returns. If the scp->scsi_done + * callback is not invoked within a certain period the SCSI mid + * level will commence error processing. If a status of CHECK + * CONDITION is placed in "result" when the scp->scsi_done + * callback is invoked, then the LLD driver should perform + * autosense and fill in the struct scsi_cmnd::sense_buffer * array. The scsi_cmnd::sense_buffer array is zeroed prior to * the mid level queuing a command to an LLD. * * Defined in: LLD **/ - int queuecommand(struct scsi_cmnd * scp, - void (*done)(struct scsi_cmnd *)) + int queuecommand(struct Scsi_Host *shost, struct scsi_cmnd * scp) /** diff --git a/Documentation/serial/00-INDEX b/Documentation/serial/00-INDEX index 07dcdb0d2a36..e09468ad3cb1 100644 --- a/Documentation/serial/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/serial/00-INDEX @@ -14,6 +14,8 @@ riscom8.txt - notes on using the RISCom/8 multi-port serial driver. rocket.txt - info on the Comtrol RocketPort multiport serial driver. +serial-rs485.txt + - info about RS485 structures and support in the kernel. specialix.txt - info on hardware/driver for specialix IO8+ multiport serial card. stallion.txt diff --git a/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt b/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a4932387bbfb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ + RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS + +1. INTRODUCTION + + EIA-485, also known as TIA/EIA-485 or RS-485, is a standard defining the + electrical characteristics of drivers and receivers for use in balanced + digital multipoint systems. + This standard is widely used for communications in industrial automation + because it can be used effectively over long distances and in electrically + noisy environments. + +2. HARDWARE-RELATED CONSIDERATIONS + + Some CPUs/UARTs (e.g., Atmel AT91 or 16C950 UART) contain a built-in + half-duplex mode capable of automatically controlling line direction by + toggling RTS or DTR signals. That can be used to control external + half-duplex hardware like an RS485 transceiver or any RS232-connected + half-duplex devices like some modems. + + For these microcontrollers, the Linux driver should be made capable of + working in both modes, and proper ioctls (see later) should be made + available at user-level to allow switching from one mode to the other, and + vice versa. + +3. DATA STRUCTURES ALREADY AVAILABLE IN THE KERNEL + + The Linux kernel provides the serial_rs485 structure (see [1]) to handle + RS485 communications. This data structure is used to set and configure RS485 + parameters in the platform data and in ioctls. + + Any driver for devices capable of working both as RS232 and RS485 should + provide at least the following ioctls: + + - TIOCSRS485 (typically associated with number 0x542F). This ioctl is used + to enable/disable RS485 mode from user-space + + - TIOCGRS485 (typically associated with number 0x542E). This ioctl is used + to get RS485 mode from kernel-space (i.e., driver) to user-space. + + In other words, the serial driver should contain a code similar to the next + one: + + static struct uart_ops atmel_pops = { + /* ... */ + .ioctl = handle_ioctl, + }; + + static int handle_ioctl(struct uart_port *port, + unsigned int cmd, + unsigned long arg) + { + struct serial_rs485 rs485conf; + + switch (cmd) { + case TIOCSRS485: + if (copy_from_user(&rs485conf, + (struct serial_rs485 *) arg, + sizeof(rs485conf))) + return -EFAULT; + + /* ... */ + break; + + case TIOCGRS485: + if (copy_to_user((struct serial_rs485 *) arg, + ..., + sizeof(rs485conf))) + return -EFAULT; + /* ... */ + break; + + /* ... */ + } + } + + +4. USAGE FROM USER-LEVEL + + From user-level, RS485 configuration can be get/set using the previous + ioctls. For instance, to set RS485 you can use the following code: + + #include <linux/serial.h> + + /* Driver-specific ioctls: */ + #define TIOCGRS485 0x542E + #define TIOCSRS485 0x542F + + /* Open your specific device (e.g., /dev/mydevice): */ + int fd = open ("/dev/mydevice", O_RDWR); + if (fd < 0) { + /* Error handling. See errno. */ + } + + struct serial_rs485 rs485conf; + + /* Set RS485 mode: */ + rs485conf.flags |= SER_RS485_ENABLED; + + /* Set rts delay before send, if needed: */ + rs485conf.flags |= SER_RS485_RTS_BEFORE_SEND; + rs485conf.delay_rts_before_send = ...; + + /* Set rts delay after send, if needed: */ + rs485conf.flags |= SER_RS485_RTS_AFTER_SEND; + rs485conf.delay_rts_after_send = ...; + + if (ioctl (fd, TIOCSRS485, &rs485conf) < 0) { + /* Error handling. See errno. */ + } + + /* Use read() and write() syscalls here... */ + + /* Close the device when finished: */ + if (close (fd) < 0) { + /* Error handling. See errno. */ + } + +5. REFERENCES + + [1] include/linux/serial.h diff --git a/Documentation/serial/tty.txt b/Documentation/serial/tty.txt index 7c900507279f..540db41dfd5d 100644 --- a/Documentation/serial/tty.txt +++ b/Documentation/serial/tty.txt @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ write_wakeup() - May be called at any point between open and close. dcd_change() - Report to the tty line the current DCD pin status changes and the relative timestamp. The timestamp - can be NULL. + cannot be NULL. Driver Access diff --git a/Documentation/sh/clk.txt b/Documentation/sh/clk.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 114b595cfa97..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/sh/clk.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ -Clock framework on SuperH architecture - -The framework on SH extends existing API by the function clk_set_rate_ex, -which prototype is as follows: - - clk_set_rate_ex (struct clk *clk, unsigned long rate, int algo_id) - -The algo_id parameter is used to specify algorithm used to recalculate clocks, -adjanced to clock, specified as first argument. It is assumed that algo_id==0 -means no changes to adjanced clock - -Internally, the clk_set_rate_ex forwards request to clk->ops->set_rate method, -if it is present in ops structure. The method should set the clock rate and adjust -all needed clocks according to the passed algo_id. -Exact values for algo_id are machine-dependent. For the sh7722, the following -values are defined: - - NO_CHANGE = 0, - IUS_N1_N1, /* I:U = N:1, U:Sh = N:1 */ - IUS_322, /* I:U:Sh = 3:2:2 */ - IUS_522, /* I:U:Sh = 5:2:2 */ - IUS_N11, /* I:U:Sh = N:1:1 */ - SB_N1, /* Sh:B = N:1 */ - SB3_N1, /* Sh:B3 = N:1 */ - SB3_32, /* Sh:B3 = 3:2 */ - SB3_43, /* Sh:B3 = 4:3 */ - SB3_54, /* Sh:B3 = 5:4 */ - BP_N1, /* B:P = N:1 */ - IP_N1 /* I:P = N:1 */ - -Each of these constants means relation between clocks that can be set via the FRQCR -register diff --git a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx index 6bb916d57c95..68a4fe3818a1 100644 --- a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx +++ b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Declaring PXA2xx Master Controllers ----------------------------------- Typically a SPI master is defined in the arch/.../mach-*/board-*.c as a "platform device". The master configuration is passed to the driver via a table -found in arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/pxa2xx_spi.h: +found in include/linux/spi/pxa2xx_spi.h: struct pxa2xx_spi_master { enum pxa_ssp_type ssp_type; @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ using the "spi_board_info" structure found in "linux/spi/spi.h". See Each slave device attached to the PXA must provide slave specific configuration information via the structure "pxa2xx_spi_chip" found in -"arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/pxa2xx_spi.h". The pxa2xx_spi master controller driver +"include/linux/spi/pxa2xx_spi.h". The pxa2xx_spi master controller driver will uses the configuration whenever the driver communicates with the slave device. All fields are optional. diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/00-INDEX b/Documentation/sysctl/00-INDEX index 1286f455992f..8cf5d493fd03 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/00-INDEX @@ -4,8 +4,6 @@ README - general information about /proc/sys/ sysctl files. abi.txt - documentation for /proc/sys/abi/*. -ctl_unnumbered.txt - - explanation of why one should not add new binary sysctl numbers. fs.txt - documentation for /proc/sys/fs/*. kernel.txt diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt index 3894eaa23486..11d5ceda5bb0 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt @@ -28,11 +28,13 @@ show up in /proc/sys/kernel: - core_uses_pid - ctrl-alt-del - dentry-state +- dmesg_restrict - domainname - hostname - hotplug - java-appletviewer [ binfmt_java, obsolete ] - java-interpreter [ binfmt_java, obsolete ] +- kptr_restrict - kstack_depth_to_print [ X86 only ] - l2cr [ PPC only ] - modprobe ==> Documentation/debugging-modules.txt @@ -213,6 +215,19 @@ to decide what to do with it. ============================================================== +dmesg_restrict: + +This toggle indicates whether unprivileged users are prevented from using +dmesg(8) to view messages from the kernel's log buffer. When +dmesg_restrict is set to (0) there are no restrictions. When +dmesg_restrict is set set to (1), users must have CAP_SYSLOG to use +dmesg(8). + +The kernel config option CONFIG_SECURITY_DMESG_RESTRICT sets the default +value of dmesg_restrict. + +============================================================== + domainname & hostname: These files can be used to set the NIS/YP domainname and the @@ -247,6 +262,19 @@ This flag controls the L2 cache of G3 processor boards. If ============================================================== +kptr_restrict: + +This toggle indicates whether restrictions are placed on +exposing kernel addresses via /proc and other interfaces. When +kptr_restrict is set to (0), there are no restrictions. When +kptr_restrict is set to (1), the default, kernel pointers +printed using the %pK format specifier will be replaced with 0's +unless the user has CAP_SYSLOG. When kptr_restrict is set to +(2), kernel pointers printed using %pK will be replaced with 0's +regardless of privileges. + +============================================================== + kstack_depth_to_print: (X86 only) Controls the number of words to print when dumping the raw diff --git a/Documentation/timers/timer_stats.txt b/Documentation/timers/timer_stats.txt index 9bd00fc2e823..8abd40b22b7f 100644 --- a/Documentation/timers/timer_stats.txt +++ b/Documentation/timers/timer_stats.txt @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Linux system over a sample period: - the pid of the task(process) which initialized the timer - the name of the process which initialized the timer -- the function where the timer was intialized +- the function where the timer was initialized - the callback function which is associated to the timer - the number of events (callbacks) diff --git a/Documentation/trace/events-power.txt b/Documentation/trace/events-power.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..96d87b67fe37 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/trace/events-power.txt @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + Subsystem Trace Points: power + +The power tracing system captures events related to power transitions +within the kernel. Broadly speaking there are three major subheadings: + + o Power state switch which reports events related to suspend (S-states), + cpuidle (C-states) and cpufreq (P-states) + o System clock related changes + o Power domains related changes and transitions + +This document describes what each of the tracepoints is and why they +might be useful. + +Cf. include/trace/events/power.h for the events definitions. + +1. Power state switch events +============================ + +1.1 New trace API +----------------- + +A 'cpu' event class gathers the CPU-related events: cpuidle and +cpufreq. + +cpu_idle "state=%lu cpu_id=%lu" +cpu_frequency "state=%lu cpu_id=%lu" + +A suspend event is used to indicate the system going in and out of the +suspend mode: + +machine_suspend "state=%lu" + + +Note: the value of '-1' or '4294967295' for state means an exit from the current state, +i.e. trace_cpu_idle(4, smp_processor_id()) means that the system +enters the idle state 4, while trace_cpu_idle(PWR_EVENT_EXIT, smp_processor_id()) +means that the system exits the previous idle state. + +The event which has 'state=4294967295' in the trace is very important to the user +space tools which are using it to detect the end of the current state, and so to +correctly draw the states diagrams and to calculate accurate statistics etc. + +1.2 DEPRECATED trace API +------------------------ + +A new Kconfig option CONFIG_EVENT_POWER_TRACING_DEPRECATED with the default value of +'y' has been created. This allows the legacy trace power API to be used conjointly +with the new trace API. +The Kconfig option, the old trace API (in include/trace/events/power.h) and the +old trace points will disappear in a future release (namely 2.6.41). + +power_start "type=%lu state=%lu cpu_id=%lu" +power_frequency "type=%lu state=%lu cpu_id=%lu" +power_end "cpu_id=%lu" + +The 'type' parameter takes one of those macros: + . POWER_NONE = 0, + . POWER_CSTATE = 1, /* C-State */ + . POWER_PSTATE = 2, /* Fequency change or DVFS */ + +The 'state' parameter is set depending on the type: + . Target C-state for type=POWER_CSTATE, + . Target frequency for type=POWER_PSTATE, + +power_end is used to indicate the exit of a state, corresponding to the latest +power_start event. + +2. Clocks events +================ +The clock events are used for clock enable/disable and for +clock rate change. + +clock_enable "%s state=%lu cpu_id=%lu" +clock_disable "%s state=%lu cpu_id=%lu" +clock_set_rate "%s state=%lu cpu_id=%lu" + +The first parameter gives the clock name (e.g. "gpio1_iclk"). +The second parameter is '1' for enable, '0' for disable, the target +clock rate for set_rate. + +3. Power domains events +======================= +The power domain events are used for power domains transitions + +power_domain_target "%s state=%lu cpu_id=%lu" + +The first parameter gives the power domain name (e.g. "mpu_pwrdm"). +The second parameter is the power domain target state. + diff --git a/Documentation/trace/events.txt b/Documentation/trace/events.txt index 09bd8e902989..b510564aac7e 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/events.txt +++ b/Documentation/trace/events.txt @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ is the size of the data item, in bytes. For example, here's the information displayed for the 'sched_wakeup' event: -# cat /debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_wakeup/format +# cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_wakeup/format name: sched_wakeup ID: 60 @@ -201,19 +201,19 @@ to the 'filter' file for the given event. For example: -# cd /debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_wakeup +# cd /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_wakeup # echo "common_preempt_count > 4" > filter A slightly more involved example: -# cd /debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_signal_send +# cd /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/signal/signal_generate # echo "((sig >= 10 && sig < 15) || sig == 17) && comm != bash" > filter If there is an error in the expression, you'll get an 'Invalid argument' error when setting it, and the erroneous string along with an error message can be seen by looking at the filter e.g.: -# cd /debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_signal_send +# cd /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/signal/signal_generate # echo "((sig >= 10 && sig < 15) || dsig == 17) && comm != bash" > filter -bash: echo: write error: Invalid argument # cat filter diff --git a/Documentation/trace/postprocess/trace-vmscan-postprocess.pl b/Documentation/trace/postprocess/trace-vmscan-postprocess.pl index b3e73ddb1567..12cecc83cd91 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/postprocess/trace-vmscan-postprocess.pl +++ b/Documentation/trace/postprocess/trace-vmscan-postprocess.pl @@ -373,9 +373,18 @@ EVENT_PROCESS: print " $regex_lru_isolate/o\n"; next; } + my $isolate_mode = $1; my $nr_scanned = $4; my $nr_contig_dirty = $7; - $perprocesspid{$process_pid}->{HIGH_NR_SCANNED} += $nr_scanned; + + # To closer match vmstat scanning statistics, only count isolate_both + # and isolate_inactive as scanning. isolate_active is rotation + # isolate_inactive == 0 + # isolate_active == 1 + # isolate_both == 2 + if ($isolate_mode != 1) { + $perprocesspid{$process_pid}->{HIGH_NR_SCANNED} += $nr_scanned; + } $perprocesspid{$process_pid}->{HIGH_NR_CONTIG_DIRTY} += $nr_contig_dirty; } elsif ($tracepoint eq "mm_vmscan_lru_shrink_inactive") { $details = $5; diff --git a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt index b29d8e56cf28..c9ffa9ced7ee 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu> - December 11, 2009 + October 28, 2010 @@ -107,9 +107,14 @@ allowed to issue dynamic suspends. The user interface for controlling dynamic PM is located in the power/ subdirectory of each USB device's sysfs directory, that is, in /sys/bus/usb/devices/.../power/ where "..." is the device's ID. The -relevant attribute files are: wakeup, control, and autosuspend. -(There may also be a file named "level"; this file was deprecated -as of the 2.6.35 kernel and replaced by the "control" file.) +relevant attribute files are: wakeup, control, and +autosuspend_delay_ms. (There may also be a file named "level"; this +file was deprecated as of the 2.6.35 kernel and replaced by the +"control" file. In 2.6.38 the "autosuspend" file will be deprecated +and replaced by the "autosuspend_delay_ms" file. The only difference +is that the newer file expresses the delay in milliseconds whereas the +older file uses seconds. Confusingly, both files are present in 2.6.37 +but only "autosuspend" works.) power/wakeup @@ -140,33 +145,36 @@ as of the 2.6.35 kernel and replaced by the "control" file.) suspended and autoresume was not allowed. This setting is no longer supported.) - power/autosuspend + power/autosuspend_delay_ms This file contains an integer value, which is the - number of seconds the device should remain idle before - the kernel will autosuspend it (the idle-delay time). - The default is 2. 0 means to autosuspend as soon as - the device becomes idle, and negative values mean - never to autosuspend. You can write a number to the - file to change the autosuspend idle-delay time. - -Writing "-1" to power/autosuspend and writing "on" to power/control do -essentially the same thing -- they both prevent the device from being -autosuspended. Yes, this is a redundancy in the API. + number of milliseconds the device should remain idle + before the kernel will autosuspend it (the idle-delay + time). The default is 2000. 0 means to autosuspend + as soon as the device becomes idle, and negative + values mean never to autosuspend. You can write a + number to the file to change the autosuspend + idle-delay time. + +Writing "-1" to power/autosuspend_delay_ms and writing "on" to +power/control do essentially the same thing -- they both prevent the +device from being autosuspended. Yes, this is a redundancy in the +API. (In 2.6.21 writing "0" to power/autosuspend would prevent the device from being autosuspended; the behavior was changed in 2.6.22. The power/autosuspend attribute did not exist prior to 2.6.21, and the power/level attribute did not exist prior to 2.6.22. power/control -was added in 2.6.34.) +was added in 2.6.34, and power/autosuspend_delay_ms was added in +2.6.37 but did not become functional until 2.6.38.) Changing the default idle-delay time ------------------------------------ -The default autosuspend idle-delay time is controlled by a module -parameter in usbcore. You can specify the value when usbcore is -loaded. For example, to set it to 5 seconds instead of 2 you would +The default autosuspend idle-delay time (in seconds) is controlled by +a module parameter in usbcore. You can specify the value when usbcore +is loaded. For example, to set it to 5 seconds instead of 2 you would do: modprobe usbcore autosuspend=5 @@ -234,25 +242,23 @@ every device. If a driver knows that its device has proper suspend/resume support, it can enable autosuspend all by itself. For example, the video -driver for a laptop's webcam might do this, since these devices are -rarely used and so should normally be autosuspended. +driver for a laptop's webcam might do this (in recent kernels they +do), since these devices are rarely used and so should normally be +autosuspended. Sometimes it turns out that even when a device does work okay with -autosuspend there are still problems. For example, there are -experimental patches adding autosuspend support to the usbhid driver, -which manages keyboards and mice, among other things. Tests with a -number of keyboards showed that typing on a suspended keyboard, while -causing the keyboard to do a remote wakeup all right, would -nonetheless frequently result in lost keystrokes. Tests with mice -showed that some of them would issue a remote-wakeup request in -response to button presses but not to motion, and some in response to -neither. +autosuspend there are still problems. For example, the usbhid driver, +which manages keyboards and mice, has autosuspend support. Tests with +a number of keyboards show that typing on a suspended keyboard, while +causing the keyboard to do a remote wakeup all right, will nonetheless +frequently result in lost keystrokes. Tests with mice show that some +of them will issue a remote-wakeup request in response to button +presses but not to motion, and some in response to neither. The kernel will not prevent you from enabling autosuspend on devices that can't handle it. It is even possible in theory to damage a -device by suspending it at the wrong time -- for example, suspending a -USB hard disk might cause it to spin down without parking the heads. -(Highly unlikely, but possible.) Take care. +device by suspending it at the wrong time. (Highly unlikely, but +possible.) Take care. The driver interface for Power Management @@ -336,10 +342,6 @@ autosuspend the interface's device. When the usage counter is = 0 then the interface is considered to be idle, and the kernel may autosuspend the device. -(There is a similar usage counter field in struct usb_device, -associated with the device itself rather than any of its interfaces. -This counter is used only by the USB core.) - Drivers need not be concerned about balancing changes to the usage counter; the USB core will undo any remaining "get"s when a driver is unbound from its interface. As a corollary, drivers must not call @@ -409,11 +411,11 @@ during autosuspend. For example, there's not much point autosuspending a keyboard if the user can't cause the keyboard to do a remote wakeup by typing on it. If the driver sets intf->needs_remote_wakeup to 1, the kernel won't autosuspend the -device if remote wakeup isn't available or has been disabled through -the power/wakeup attribute. (If the device is already autosuspended, -though, setting this flag won't cause the kernel to autoresume it. -Normally a driver would set this flag in its probe method, at which -time the device is guaranteed not to be autosuspended.) +device if remote wakeup isn't available. (If the device is already +autosuspended, though, setting this flag won't cause the kernel to +autoresume it. Normally a driver would set this flag in its probe +method, at which time the device is guaranteed not to be +autosuspended.) If a driver does its I/O asynchronously in interrupt context, it should call usb_autopm_get_interface_async() before starting output and @@ -422,20 +424,19 @@ it receives an input event, it should call usb_mark_last_busy(struct usb_device *udev); -in the event handler. This sets udev->last_busy to the current time. -udev->last_busy is the field used for idle-delay calculations; -updating it will cause any pending autosuspend to be moved back. Most -of the usb_autopm_* routines will also set the last_busy field to the -current time. +in the event handler. This tells the PM core that the device was just +busy and therefore the next autosuspend idle-delay expiration should +be pushed back. Many of the usb_autopm_* routines also make this call, +so drivers need to worry only when interrupt-driven input arrives. Asynchronous operation is always subject to races. For example, a -driver may call one of the usb_autopm_*_interface_async() routines at -a time when the core has just finished deciding the device has been -idle for long enough but not yet gotten around to calling the driver's -suspend method. The suspend method must be responsible for -synchronizing with the output request routine and the URB completion -handler; it should cause autosuspends to fail with -EBUSY if the -driver needs to use the device. +driver may call the usb_autopm_get_interface_async() routine at a time +when the core has just finished deciding the device has been idle for +long enough but not yet gotten around to calling the driver's suspend +method. The suspend method must be responsible for synchronizing with +the I/O request routine and the URB completion handler; it should +cause autosuspends to fail with -EBUSY if the driver needs to use the +device. External suspend calls should never be allowed to fail in this way, only autosuspend calls. The driver can tell them apart by checking @@ -472,7 +473,9 @@ Firstly, a device may already be autosuspended when a system suspend occurs. Since system suspends are supposed to be as transparent as possible, the device should remain suspended following the system resume. But this theory may not work out well in practice; over time -the kernel's behavior in this regard has changed. +the kernel's behavior in this regard has changed. As of 2.6.37 the +policy is to resume all devices during a system resume and let them +handle their own runtime suspends afterward. Secondly, a dynamic power-management event may occur as a system suspend is underway. The window for this is short, since system diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 index f2510541373b..42517d9121de 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 @@ -83,3 +83,4 @@ 82 -> WinFast DTV2000 H rev. J [107d:6f2b] 83 -> Prof 7301 DVB-S/S2 [b034:3034] 84 -> Samsung SMT 7020 DVB-S [18ac:dc00,18ac:dccd] + 85 -> Twinhan VP-1027 DVB-S [1822:0023] diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx index 5c568757c301..31b485723bc5 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ 0 -> Unknown EM2800 video grabber (em2800) [eb1a:2800] - 1 -> Unknown EM2750/28xx video grabber (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2710,eb1a:2820,eb1a:2821,eb1a:2860,eb1a:2861,eb1a:2862,eb1a:2863,eb1a:2870,eb1a:2881,eb1a:2883,eb1a:2868] + 1 -> Unknown EM2750/28xx video grabber (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2710,eb1a:2820,eb1a:2821,eb1a:2860,eb1a:2861,eb1a:2862,eb1a:2863,eb1a:2870,eb1a:2881,eb1a:2883,eb1a:2868,eb1a:2875] 2 -> Terratec Cinergy 250 USB (em2820/em2840) [0ccd:0036] 3 -> Pinnacle PCTV USB 2 (em2820/em2840) [2304:0208] 4 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB 2 (em2820/em2840) [2040:4200,2040:4201] @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ 8 -> Kworld USB2800 (em2800) 9 -> Pinnacle Dazzle DVC 90/100/101/107 / Kaiser Baas Video to DVD maker (em2820/em2840) [1b80:e302,1b80:e304,2304:0207,2304:021a] 10 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 900 (em2880) [2040:6500] - 11 -> Terratec Hybrid XS (em2880) [0ccd:0042] + 11 -> Terratec Hybrid XS (em2880) 12 -> Kworld PVR TV 2800 RF (em2820/em2840) 13 -> Terratec Prodigy XS (em2880) [0ccd:0047] 14 -> SIIG AVTuner-PVR / Pixelview Prolink PlayTV USB 2.0 (em2820/em2840) @@ -31,6 +31,7 @@ 30 -> Videology 20K14XUSB USB2.0 (em2820/em2840) 31 -> Usbgear VD204v9 (em2821) 32 -> Supercomp USB 2.0 TV (em2821) + 33 -> Elgato Video Capture (em2860) [0fd9:0033] 34 -> Terratec Cinergy A Hybrid XS (em2860) [0ccd:004f] 35 -> Typhoon DVD Maker (em2860) 36 -> NetGMBH Cam (em2860) @@ -45,14 +46,14 @@ 45 -> Pinnacle PCTV DVB-T (em2870) 46 -> Compro, VideoMate U3 (em2870) [185b:2870] 47 -> KWorld DVB-T 305U (em2880) [eb1a:e305] - 48 -> KWorld DVB-T 310U (em2880) [eb1a:e310] + 48 -> KWorld DVB-T 310U (em2880) 49 -> MSI DigiVox A/D (em2880) [eb1a:e310] 50 -> MSI DigiVox A/D II (em2880) [eb1a:e320] 51 -> Terratec Hybrid XS Secam (em2880) [0ccd:004c] 52 -> DNT DA2 Hybrid (em2881) 53 -> Pinnacle Hybrid Pro (em2881) 54 -> Kworld VS-DVB-T 323UR (em2882) [eb1a:e323] - 55 -> Terratec Hybrid XS (em2882) (em2882) [0ccd:005e] + 55 -> Terratec Cinnergy Hybrid T USB XS (em2882) (em2882) [0ccd:005e,0ccd:0042] 56 -> Pinnacle Hybrid Pro (2) (em2882) [2304:0226] 57 -> Kworld PlusTV HD Hybrid 330 (em2883) [eb1a:a316] 58 -> Compro VideoMate ForYou/Stereo (em2820/em2840) [185b:2041] diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 index 4000c29fcfb6..6b4c72d8862d 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ 125 -> Beholder BeholdTV 409 [0000:4090] 126 -> Beholder BeholdTV 505 FM [5ace:5050] 127 -> Beholder BeholdTV 507 FM / BeholdTV 509 FM [5ace:5070,5ace:5090] -128 -> Beholder BeholdTV Columbus TVFM [0000:5201] +128 -> Beholder BeholdTV Columbus TV/FM [0000:5201] 129 -> Beholder BeholdTV 607 FM [5ace:6070] 130 -> Beholder BeholdTV M6 [5ace:6190] 131 -> Twinhan Hybrid DTV-DVB 3056 PCI [1822:0022] @@ -180,3 +180,5 @@ 179 -> Beholder BeholdTV A7 [5ace:7090] 180 -> Avermedia PCI M733A [1461:4155,1461:4255] 181 -> TechoTrend TT-budget T-3000 [13c2:2804] +182 -> Kworld PCI SBTVD/ISDB-T Full-Seg Hybrid [17de:b136] +183 -> Compro VideoMate Vista M1F [185b:c900] diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/Makefile b/Documentation/video4linux/Makefile deleted file mode 100644 index 1ed0e98d057d..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/Makefile +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8 +0,0 @@ -# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built. -obj- := dummy.o - -# List of programs to build -hostprogs-y := v4lgrab - -# Tell kbuild to always build the programs -always := $(hostprogs-y) diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/README.cpia b/Documentation/video4linux/README.cpia deleted file mode 100644 index 8a747fee661f..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/README.cpia +++ /dev/null @@ -1,191 +0,0 @@ -This is a driver for the CPiA PPC2 driven parallel connected -Camera. For example the Creative WebcamII is CPiA driven. - - ) [1]Peter Pregler, Linz 2000, published under the [2]GNU GPL - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- - -USAGE: - -General: -======== - -1) Make sure you have created the video devices (/dev/video*): - -- if you have a recent MAKEDEV do a 'cd /dev;./MAKEDEV video' -- otherwise do a: - -cd /dev -mknod video0 c 81 0 -ln -s video0 video - -2) Compile the kernel (see below for the list of options to use), - configure your parport and reboot. - -3) If all worked well you should get messages similar - to the following (your versions may be different) on the console: - -V4L-Driver for Vision CPiA based cameras v0.7.4 -parport0: read2 timeout. -parport0: Multimedia device, VLSI Vision Ltd PPC2 -Parallel port driver for Vision CPiA based camera - CPIA Version: 1.20 (2.0) - CPIA PnP-ID: 0553:0002:0100 - VP-Version: 1.0 0100 - 1 camera(s) found - - -As modules: -=========== - -Make sure you have selected the following kernel options (you can -select all stuff as modules): - -The cpia-stuff is in the section 'Character devices -> Video For Linux'. - -CONFIG_PARPORT=m -CONFIG_PARPORT_PC=m -CONFIG_PARPORT_PC_FIFO=y -CONFIG_PARPORT_1284=y -CONFIG_VIDEO_DEV=m -CONFIG_VIDEO_CPIA=m -CONFIG_VIDEO_CPIA_PP=m - -For autoloading of all those modules you need to tell module-init-tools -some stuff. Add the following line to your module-init-tools config-file -(e.g. /etc/modprobe.conf or wherever your distribution does store that -stuff): - -options parport_pc io=0x378 irq=7 dma=3 -alias char-major-81 cpia_pp - -The first line tells the dma/irq channels to use. Those _must_ match -the settings of your BIOS. Do NOT simply use the values above. See -Documentation/parport.txt for more information about this. The second -line associates the video-device file with the driver. Of cause you -can also load the modules once upon boot (usually done in /etc/modules). - -Linked into the kernel: -======================= - -Make sure you have selected the following kernel options. Note that -you cannot compile the parport-stuff as modules and the cpia-driver -statically (the other way round is okay though). - -The cpia-stuff is in the section 'Character devices -> Video For Linux'. - -CONFIG_PARPORT=y -CONFIG_PARPORT_PC=y -CONFIG_PARPORT_PC_FIFO=y -CONFIG_PARPORT_1284=y -CONFIG_VIDEO_DEV=y -CONFIG_VIDEO_CPIA=y -CONFIG_VIDEO_CPIA_PP=y - -To use DMA/irq you will need to tell the kernel upon boot time the -hardware configuration of the parport. You can give the boot-parameter -at the LILO-prompt or specify it in lilo.conf. I use the following -append-line in lilo.conf: - - append="parport=0x378,7,3" - -See Documentation/parport.txt for more information about the -configuration of the parport and the values given above. Do not simply -use the values given above. - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- -FEATURES: - -- mmap/read v4l-interface (but no overlay) -- image formats: CIF/QCIF, SIF/QSIF, various others used by isabel; - note: all sizes except CIF/QCIF are implemented by clipping, i.e. - pixels are not uploaded from the camera -- palettes: VIDEO_PALETTE_GRAY, VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB565, VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB555, - VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB24, VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB32, VIDEO_PALETTE_YUYV, - VIDEO_PALETTE_UYVY, VIDEO_PALETTE_YUV422 -- state information (color balance, exposure, ...) is preserved between - device opens -- complete control over camera via proc-interface (_all_ camera settings are - supported), there is also a python-gtk application available for this [3] -- works under SMP (but the driver is completely serialized and synchronous) - so you get no benefit from SMP, but at least it does not crash your box -- might work for non-Intel architecture, let us know about this - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- -TESTED APPLICATIONS: - -- a simple test application based on Xt is available at [3] -- another test-application based on gqcam-0.4 (uses GTK) -- gqcam-0.6 should work -- xawtv-3.x (also the webcam software) -- xawtv-2.46 -- w3cam (cgi-interface and vidcat, e.g. you may try out 'vidcat |xv - -maxpect -root -quit +noresetroot -rmode 5 -') -- vic, the MBONE video conferencing tool (version 2.8ucl4-1) -- isabel 3R4beta (barely working, but AFAICT all the problems are on - their side) -- camserv-0.40 - -See [3] for pointers to v4l-applications. - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- -KNOWN PROBLEMS: - -- some applications do not handle the image format correctly, you will - see strange horizontal stripes instead of a nice picture -> make sure - your application does use a supported image size or queries the driver - for the actually used size (reason behind this: the camera cannot - provide any image format, so if size NxM is requested the driver will - use a format to the closest fitting N1xM1, the application should now - query for this granted size, most applications do not). -- all the todo ;) -- if there is not enough light and the picture is too dark try to - adjust the SetSensorFPS setting, automatic frame rate adjustment - has its price -- do not try out isabel 3R4beta (built 135), you will be disappointed - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- -TODO: - -- multiple camera support (struct camera or something) - This should work, - but hasn't been tested yet. -- architecture independence? -- SMP-safe asynchronous mmap interface -- nibble mode for old parport interfaces -- streaming capture, this should give a performance gain - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- -IMPLEMENTATION NOTES: - -The camera can act in two modes, streaming or grabbing. Right now a -polling grab-scheme is used. Maybe interrupt driven streaming will be -used for a asynchronous mmap interface in the next major release of the -driver. This might give a better frame rate. - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- -THANKS (in no particular order): - -- Scott J. Bertin <sbertin@mindspring.com> for cleanups, the proc-filesystem - and much more -- Henry Bruce <whb@vvl.co.uk> for providing developers information about - the CPiA chip, I wish all companies would treat Linux as seriously -- Karoly Erdei <Karoly.Erdei@risc.uni-linz.ac.at> and RISC-Linz for being - my boss ;) resp. my employer and for providing me the hardware and - allow me to devote some working time to this project -- Manuel J. Petit de Gabriel <mpetit@dit.upm.es> for providing help - with Isabel (http://isabel.dit.upm.es/) -- Bas Huisman <bhuism@cs.utwente.nl> for writing the initial parport code -- Jarl Totland <Jarl.Totland@bdc.no> for setting up the mailing list - and maintaining the web-server[3] -- Chris Whiteford <Chris@informinteractive.com> for fixes related to the - 1.02 firmware -- special kudos to all the tester whose machines crashed and/or - will crash. :) - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- -REFERENCES - - 1. http://www.risc.uni-linz.ac.at/ - mailto:Peter_Pregler@email.com - 2. see the file COPYING in the top directory of the kernel tree - 3. http://webcam.sourceforge.net/ diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/Zoran b/Documentation/video4linux/Zoran index 00e3f9267814..699b60e070d2 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/Zoran +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/Zoran @@ -322,76 +322,11 @@ your IRQs and make sure the card has its own interrupts. 4. Programming interface -This driver conforms to video4linux and video4linux2, both can be used to -use the driver. Since video4linux didn't provide adequate calls to fully -use the cards' features, we've introduced several programming extensions, -which are currently officially accepted in the 2.4.x branch of the kernel. -These extensions are known as the v4l/mjpeg extensions. See zoran.h for -details (structs/ioctls). - -Information - video4linux: -http://linux.bytesex.org/v4l2/API.html -Documentation/video4linux/API.html -/usr/include/linux/videodev.h - -Information - video4linux/mjpeg extensions: -./zoran.h -(also see below) - -Information - video4linux2: -http://linuxtv.org -http://v4l2spec.bytesex.org/ -/usr/include/linux/videodev2.h - -More information on the video4linux/mjpeg extensions, by Serguei -Miridonovi and Rainer Johanni: --- -The ioctls for that interface are as follows: - -BUZIOC_G_PARAMS -BUZIOC_S_PARAMS - -Get and set the parameters of the buz. The user should always do a -BUZIOC_G_PARAMS (with a struct buz_params) to obtain the default -settings, change what he likes and then make a BUZIOC_S_PARAMS call. - -BUZIOC_REQBUFS - -Before being able to capture/playback, the user has to request -the buffers he is wanting to use. Fill the structure -zoran_requestbuffers with the size (recommended: 256*1024) and -the number (recommended 32 up to 256). There are no such restrictions -as for the Video for Linux buffers, you should LEAVE SUFFICIENT -MEMORY for your system however, else strange things will happen .... -On return, the zoran_requestbuffers structure contains number and -size of the actually allocated buffers. -You should use these numbers for doing a mmap of the buffers -into the user space. -The BUZIOC_REQBUFS ioctl also makes it happen, that the next mmap -maps the MJPEG buffer instead of the V4L buffers. - -BUZIOC_QBUF_CAPT -BUZIOC_QBUF_PLAY - -Queue a buffer for capture or playback. The first call also starts -streaming capture. When streaming capture is going on, you may -only queue further buffers or issue syncs until streaming -capture is switched off again with a argument of -1 to -a BUZIOC_QBUF_CAPT/BUZIOC_QBUF_PLAY ioctl. - -BUZIOC_SYNC - -Issue this ioctl when all buffers are queued. This ioctl will -block until the first buffer becomes free for saving its -data to disk (after BUZIOC_QBUF_CAPT) or for reuse (after BUZIOC_QBUF_PLAY). - -BUZIOC_G_STATUS - -Get the status of the input lines (video source connected/norm). +This driver conforms to video4linux2. Support for V4L1 and for the custom +zoran ioctls has been removed in kernel 2.6.38. For programming example, please, look at lavrec.c and lavplay.c code in -lavtools-1.2p2 package (URL: http://www.cicese.mx/) -and the 'examples' directory in the original Buz driver distribution. +the MJPEG-tools (http://mjpeg.sf.net/). Additional notes for software developers: @@ -402,9 +337,6 @@ Additional notes for software developers: standard is "more constant" for current country than geometry settings of a variety of TV capture cards which may work in ITU or square pixel format. --- -Please note that lavplay/lavrec are also included in the MJPEG-tools -(http://mjpeg.sf.net/). =========================== diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Cards b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Cards index 12217fc49725..db833ced2cb8 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Cards +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Cards @@ -464,10 +464,6 @@ Siemens ------- Multimedia eXtension Board (MXB) (SAA7146, SAA7111) -Stradis -------- - SDM275,SDM250,SDM026,SDM025 (SAA7146, IBMMPEG2): MPEG2 decoder only - Powercolor ---------- MTV878 diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/MAKEDEV b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/MAKEDEV index 9d112f7fd5f7..093c0cd18042 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/MAKEDEV +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/MAKEDEV @@ -19,7 +19,6 @@ function makedev () { echo "*** new device names ***" makedev video 0 makedev radio 64 -makedev vtx 192 makedev vbi 224 #echo "*** old device names (for compatibility only) ***" diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index 56ba7bba7168..261776e0c5e1 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -302,12 +302,14 @@ sonixj 0c45:60fb Surfer NoName sonixj 0c45:60fc LG-LIC300 sonixj 0c45:60fe Microdia Audio sonixj 0c45:6100 PC Camera (SN9C128) +sonixj 0c45:6102 PC Camera (SN9C128) sonixj 0c45:610a PC Camera (SN9C128) sonixj 0c45:610b PC Camera (SN9C128) sonixj 0c45:610c PC Camera (SN9C128) sonixj 0c45:610e PC Camera (SN9C128) sonixj 0c45:6128 Microdia/Sonix SNP325 sonixj 0c45:612a Avant Camera +sonixj 0c45:612b Speed-Link REFLECT2 sonixj 0c45:612c Typhoon Rasy Cam 1.3MPix sonixj 0c45:6130 Sonix Pccam sonixj 0c45:6138 Sn9c120 Mo4000 @@ -364,6 +366,7 @@ t613 17a1:0128 TASCORP JPEG Webcam, NGS Cyclops vc032x 17ef:4802 Lenovo Vc0323+MI1310_SOC pac207 2001:f115 D-Link DSB-C120 sq905c 2770:9050 Disney pix micro (CIF) +sq905c 2770:9051 Lego Bionicle sq905c 2770:9052 Disney pix micro 2 (VGA) sq905c 2770:905c All 11 known cameras with this ID sq905 2770:9120 All 24 known cameras with this ID diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/meye.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/meye.txt index bf3af5fe558f..34e2842c70ae 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/meye.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/meye.txt @@ -45,8 +45,6 @@ module argument syntax (<param>=<value> when passing the option to the module or meye.<param>=<value> on the kernel boot line when meye is statically linked into the kernel). Those options are: - forcev4l1: force use of V4L1 API instead of V4L2 - gbuffers: number of capture buffers, default is 2 (32 max) gbufsize: size of each capture buffer, default is 614400 @@ -79,9 +77,8 @@ Usage: Private API: ------------ - The driver supports frame grabbing with the video4linux API - (either v4l1 or v4l2), so all video4linux tools (like xawtv) - should work with this driver. + The driver supports frame grabbing with the video4linux API, + so all video4linux tools (like xawtv) should work with this driver. Besides the video4linux interface, the driver has a private interface for accessing the Motion Eye extended parameters (camera sharpness, @@ -123,7 +120,4 @@ Private API: Bugs / Todo: ------------ - - the driver could be much cleaned up by removing the v4l1 support. - However, this means all v4l1-only applications will stop working. - - 'motioneye' still uses the meye private v4l1 API extensions. diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt index e831aaca66f8..f22f35c271f3 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt @@ -44,8 +44,8 @@ All drivers have the following structure: 2) A way of initializing and commanding sub-devices (if any). -3) Creating V4L2 device nodes (/dev/videoX, /dev/vbiX, /dev/radioX and - /dev/vtxX) and keeping track of device-node specific data. +3) Creating V4L2 device nodes (/dev/videoX, /dev/vbiX and /dev/radioX) + and keeping track of device-node specific data. 4) Filehandle-specific structs containing per-filehandle data; @@ -192,6 +192,11 @@ You also need a way to go from the low-level struct to v4l2_subdev. For the common i2c_client struct the i2c_set_clientdata() call is used to store a v4l2_subdev pointer, for other busses you may have to use other methods. +Bridges might also need to store per-subdev private data, such as a pointer to +bridge-specific per-subdev private data. The v4l2_subdev structure provides +host private data for that purpose that can be accessed with +v4l2_get_subdev_hostdata() and v4l2_set_subdev_hostdata(). + From the bridge driver perspective you load the sub-device module and somehow obtain the v4l2_subdev pointer. For i2c devices this is easy: you call i2c_get_clientdata(). For other busses something similar needs to be done. @@ -448,6 +453,10 @@ You should also set these fields: - ioctl_ops: if you use the v4l2_ioctl_ops to simplify ioctl maintenance (highly recommended to use this and it might become compulsory in the future!), then set this to your v4l2_ioctl_ops struct. +- lock: leave to NULL if you want to do all the locking in the driver. + Otherwise you give it a pointer to a struct mutex_lock and before any + of the v4l2_file_operations is called this lock will be taken by the + core and released afterwards. - parent: you only set this if v4l2_device was registered with NULL as the parent device struct. This only happens in cases where one hardware device has multiple PCI devices that all share the same v4l2_device core. @@ -464,6 +473,22 @@ If you use v4l2_ioctl_ops, then you should set either .unlocked_ioctl or The v4l2_file_operations struct is a subset of file_operations. The main difference is that the inode argument is omitted since it is never used. +v4l2_file_operations and locking +-------------------------------- + +You can set a pointer to a mutex_lock in struct video_device. Usually this +will be either a top-level mutex or a mutex per device node. If you want +finer-grained locking then you have to set it to NULL and do you own locking. + +If a lock is specified then all file operations will be serialized on that +lock. If you use videobuf then you must pass the same lock to the videobuf +queue initialize function: if videobuf has to wait for a frame to arrive, then +it will temporarily unlock the lock and relock it afterwards. If your driver +also waits in the code, then you should do the same to allow other processes +to access the device node while the first process is waiting for something. + +The implementation of a hotplug disconnect should also take the lock before +calling v4l2_device_disconnect. video_device registration ------------------------- @@ -483,7 +508,6 @@ types exist: VFL_TYPE_GRABBER: videoX for video input/output devices VFL_TYPE_VBI: vbiX for vertical blank data (i.e. closed captions, teletext) VFL_TYPE_RADIO: radioX for radio tuners -VFL_TYPE_VTX: vtxX for teletext devices (deprecated, don't use) The last argument gives you a certain amount of control over the device device node number used (i.e. the X in videoX). Normally you will pass -1 @@ -547,9 +571,8 @@ from /dev). After video_unregister_device() returns no new opens can be done. However, in the case of USB devices some application might still have one of these -device nodes open. So after the unregister all file operations will return -an error as well, except for the ioctl and unlocked_ioctl file operations: -those will still be passed on since some buffer ioctls may still be needed. +device nodes open. So after the unregister all file operations (except +release, of course) will return an error as well. When the last user of the video device node exits, then the vdev->release() callback is called and you can do the final cleanup there. diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/v4lgrab.c b/Documentation/video4linux/v4lgrab.c deleted file mode 100644 index c8ded175796e..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/v4lgrab.c +++ /dev/null @@ -1,201 +0,0 @@ -/* Simple Video4Linux image grabber. */ -/* - * Video4Linux Driver Test/Example Framegrabbing Program - * - * Compile with: - * gcc -s -Wall -Wstrict-prototypes v4lgrab.c -o v4lgrab - * Use as: - * v4lgrab >image.ppm - * - * Copyright (C) 1998-05-03, Phil Blundell <philb@gnu.org> - * Copied from http://www.tazenda.demon.co.uk/phil/vgrabber.c - * with minor modifications (Dave Forrest, drf5n@virginia.edu). - * - * - * For some cameras you may need to pre-load libv4l to perform - * the necessary decompression, e.g.: - * - * export LD_PRELOAD=/usr/lib/libv4l/v4l1compat.so - * ./v4lgrab >image.ppm - * - * see http://hansdegoede.livejournal.com/3636.html for details. - * - */ - -#include <unistd.h> -#include <sys/types.h> -#include <sys/stat.h> -#include <fcntl.h> -#include <stdio.h> -#include <sys/ioctl.h> -#include <stdlib.h> - -#include <linux/types.h> -#include <linux/videodev.h> - -#define VIDEO_DEV "/dev/video0" - -/* Stole this from tvset.c */ - -#define READ_VIDEO_PIXEL(buf, format, depth, r, g, b) \ -{ \ - switch (format) \ - { \ - case VIDEO_PALETTE_GREY: \ - switch (depth) \ - { \ - case 4: \ - case 6: \ - case 8: \ - (r) = (g) = (b) = (*buf++ << 8);\ - break; \ - \ - case 16: \ - (r) = (g) = (b) = \ - *((unsigned short *) buf); \ - buf += 2; \ - break; \ - } \ - break; \ - \ - \ - case VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB565: \ - { \ - unsigned short tmp = *(unsigned short *)buf; \ - (r) = tmp&0xF800; \ - (g) = (tmp<<5)&0xFC00; \ - (b) = (tmp<<11)&0xF800; \ - buf += 2; \ - } \ - break; \ - \ - case VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB555: \ - (r) = (buf[0]&0xF8)<<8; \ - (g) = ((buf[0] << 5 | buf[1] >> 3)&0xF8)<<8; \ - (b) = ((buf[1] << 2 ) & 0xF8)<<8; \ - buf += 2; \ - break; \ - \ - case VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB24: \ - (r) = buf[0] << 8; (g) = buf[1] << 8; \ - (b) = buf[2] << 8; \ - buf += 3; \ - break; \ - \ - default: \ - fprintf(stderr, \ - "Format %d not yet supported\n", \ - format); \ - } \ -} - -static int get_brightness_adj(unsigned char *image, long size, int *brightness) { - long i, tot = 0; - for (i=0;i<size*3;i++) - tot += image[i]; - *brightness = (128 - tot/(size*3))/3; - return !((tot/(size*3)) >= 126 && (tot/(size*3)) <= 130); -} - -int main(int argc, char ** argv) -{ - int fd = open(VIDEO_DEV, O_RDONLY), f; - struct video_capability cap; - struct video_window win; - struct video_picture vpic; - - unsigned char *buffer, *src; - int bpp = 24, r = 0, g = 0, b = 0; - unsigned int i, src_depth = 16; - - if (fd < 0) { - perror(VIDEO_DEV); - exit(1); - } - - if (ioctl(fd, VIDIOCGCAP, &cap) < 0) { - perror("VIDIOGCAP"); - fprintf(stderr, "(" VIDEO_DEV " not a video4linux device?)\n"); - close(fd); - exit(1); - } - - if (ioctl(fd, VIDIOCGWIN, &win) < 0) { - perror("VIDIOCGWIN"); - close(fd); - exit(1); - } - - if (ioctl(fd, VIDIOCGPICT, &vpic) < 0) { - perror("VIDIOCGPICT"); - close(fd); - exit(1); - } - - if (cap.type & VID_TYPE_MONOCHROME) { - vpic.depth=8; - vpic.palette=VIDEO_PALETTE_GREY; /* 8bit grey */ - if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic) < 0) { - vpic.depth=6; - if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic) < 0) { - vpic.depth=4; - if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic) < 0) { - fprintf(stderr, "Unable to find a supported capture format.\n"); - close(fd); - exit(1); - } - } - } - } else { - vpic.depth=24; - vpic.palette=VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB24; - - if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic) < 0) { - vpic.palette=VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB565; - vpic.depth=16; - - if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic)==-1) { - vpic.palette=VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB555; - vpic.depth=15; - - if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic)==-1) { - fprintf(stderr, "Unable to find a supported capture format.\n"); - return -1; - } - } - } - } - - buffer = malloc(win.width * win.height * bpp); - if (!buffer) { - fprintf(stderr, "Out of memory.\n"); - exit(1); - } - - do { - int newbright; - read(fd, buffer, win.width * win.height * bpp); - f = get_brightness_adj(buffer, win.width * win.height, &newbright); - if (f) { - vpic.brightness += (newbright << 8); - if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic)==-1) { - perror("VIDIOSPICT"); - break; - } - } - } while (f); - - fprintf(stdout, "P6\n%d %d 255\n", win.width, win.height); - - src = buffer; - - for (i = 0; i < win.width * win.height; i++) { - READ_VIDEO_PIXEL(src, vpic.palette, src_depth, r, g, b); - fputc(r>>8, stdout); - fputc(g>>8, stdout); - fputc(b>>8, stdout); - } - - close(fd); - return 0; -} diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/videobuf b/Documentation/video4linux/videobuf index 17a1f9abf260..1d00d7f15b8f 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/videobuf +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/videobuf @@ -247,8 +247,6 @@ calls. The relevant helper functions are: int nonblocking); int videobuf_streamon(struct videobuf_queue *q); int videobuf_streamoff(struct videobuf_queue *q); - int videobuf_cgmbuf(struct videobuf_queue *q, struct video_mbuf *mbuf, - int count); So, for example, a VIDIOC_REQBUFS call turns into a call to the driver's vidioc_reqbufs() callback which, in turn, usually only needs to locate the @@ -258,10 +256,7 @@ boilerplate in a lot of V4L2 drivers. The vidioc_streamon() and vidioc_streamoff() functions will be a bit more complex, of course, since they will also need to deal with starting and -stopping the capture engine. videobuf_cgmbuf(), called from the driver's -vidiocgmbuf() function, only exists if the V4L1 compatibility module has -been selected with CONFIG_VIDEO_V4L1_COMPAT, so its use must be surrounded -with #ifdef directives. +stopping the capture engine. Buffer allocation diff --git a/Documentation/vm/Makefile b/Documentation/vm/Makefile index 9dcff328b964..3fa4d0668864 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/vm/Makefile @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ obj- := dummy.o # List of programs to build -hostprogs-y := slabinfo page-types hugepage-mmap hugepage-shm map_hugetlb +hostprogs-y := page-types hugepage-mmap hugepage-shm map_hugetlb # Tell kbuild to always build the programs always := $(hostprogs-y) diff --git a/Documentation/vm/slabinfo.c b/Documentation/vm/slabinfo.c deleted file mode 100644 index 92e729f4b676..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/vm/slabinfo.c +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1364 +0,0 @@ -/* - * Slabinfo: Tool to get reports about slabs - * - * (C) 2007 sgi, Christoph Lameter - * - * Compile by: - * - * gcc -o slabinfo slabinfo.c - */ -#include <stdio.h> -#include <stdlib.h> -#include <sys/types.h> -#include <dirent.h> -#include <strings.h> -#include <string.h> -#include <unistd.h> -#include <stdarg.h> -#include <getopt.h> -#include <regex.h> -#include <errno.h> - -#define MAX_SLABS 500 -#define MAX_ALIASES 500 -#define MAX_NODES 1024 - -struct slabinfo { - char *name; - int alias; - int refs; - int aliases, align, cache_dma, cpu_slabs, destroy_by_rcu; - int hwcache_align, object_size, objs_per_slab; - int sanity_checks, slab_size, store_user, trace; - int order, poison, reclaim_account, red_zone; - unsigned long partial, objects, slabs, objects_partial, objects_total; - unsigned long alloc_fastpath, alloc_slowpath; - unsigned long free_fastpath, free_slowpath; - unsigned long free_frozen, free_add_partial, free_remove_partial; - unsigned long alloc_from_partial, alloc_slab, free_slab, alloc_refill; - unsigned long cpuslab_flush, deactivate_full, deactivate_empty; - unsigned long deactivate_to_head, deactivate_to_tail; - unsigned long deactivate_remote_frees, order_fallback; - int numa[MAX_NODES]; - int numa_partial[MAX_NODES]; -} slabinfo[MAX_SLABS]; - -struct aliasinfo { - char *name; - char *ref; - struct slabinfo *slab; -} aliasinfo[MAX_ALIASES]; - -int slabs = 0; -int actual_slabs = 0; -int aliases = 0; -int alias_targets = 0; -int highest_node = 0; - -char buffer[4096]; - -int show_empty = 0; -int show_report = 0; -int show_alias = 0; -int show_slab = 0; -int skip_zero = 1; -int show_numa = 0; -int show_track = 0; -int show_first_alias = 0; -int validate = 0; -int shrink = 0; -int show_inverted = 0; -int show_single_ref = 0; -int show_totals = 0; -int sort_size = 0; -int sort_active = 0; -int set_debug = 0; -int show_ops = 0; -int show_activity = 0; - -/* Debug options */ -int sanity = 0; -int redzone = 0; -int poison = 0; -int tracking = 0; -int tracing = 0; - -int page_size; - -regex_t pattern; - -static void fatal(const char *x, ...) -{ - va_list ap; - - va_start(ap, x); - vfprintf(stderr, x, ap); - va_end(ap); - exit(EXIT_FAILURE); -} - -static void usage(void) -{ - printf("slabinfo 5/7/2007. (c) 2007 sgi.\n\n" - "slabinfo [-ahnpvtsz] [-d debugopts] [slab-regexp]\n" - "-a|--aliases Show aliases\n" - "-A|--activity Most active slabs first\n" - "-d<options>|--debug=<options> Set/Clear Debug options\n" - "-D|--display-active Switch line format to activity\n" - "-e|--empty Show empty slabs\n" - "-f|--first-alias Show first alias\n" - "-h|--help Show usage information\n" - "-i|--inverted Inverted list\n" - "-l|--slabs Show slabs\n" - "-n|--numa Show NUMA information\n" - "-o|--ops Show kmem_cache_ops\n" - "-s|--shrink Shrink slabs\n" - "-r|--report Detailed report on single slabs\n" - "-S|--Size Sort by size\n" - "-t|--tracking Show alloc/free information\n" - "-T|--Totals Show summary information\n" - "-v|--validate Validate slabs\n" - "-z|--zero Include empty slabs\n" - "-1|--1ref Single reference\n" - "\nValid debug options (FZPUT may be combined)\n" - "a / A Switch on all debug options (=FZUP)\n" - "- Switch off all debug options\n" - "f / F Sanity Checks (SLAB_DEBUG_FREE)\n" - "z / Z Redzoning\n" - "p / P Poisoning\n" - "u / U Tracking\n" - "t / T Tracing\n" - ); -} - -static unsigned long read_obj(const char *name) -{ - FILE *f = fopen(name, "r"); - - if (!f) - buffer[0] = 0; - else { - if (!fgets(buffer, sizeof(buffer), f)) - buffer[0] = 0; - fclose(f); - if (buffer[strlen(buffer)] == '\n') - buffer[strlen(buffer)] = 0; - } - return strlen(buffer); -} - - -/* - * Get the contents of an attribute - */ -static unsigned long get_obj(const char *name) -{ - if (!read_obj(name)) - return 0; - - return atol(buffer); -} - -static unsigned long get_obj_and_str(const char *name, char **x) -{ - unsigned long result = 0; - char *p; - - *x = NULL; - - if (!read_obj(name)) { - x = NULL; - return 0; - } - result = strtoul(buffer, &p, 10); - while (*p == ' ') - p++; - if (*p) - *x = strdup(p); - return result; -} - -static void set_obj(struct slabinfo *s, const char *name, int n) -{ - char x[100]; - FILE *f; - - snprintf(x, 100, "%s/%s", s->name, name); - f = fopen(x, "w"); - if (!f) - fatal("Cannot write to %s\n", x); - - fprintf(f, "%d\n", n); - fclose(f); -} - -static unsigned long read_slab_obj(struct slabinfo *s, const char *name) -{ - char x[100]; - FILE *f; - size_t l; - - snprintf(x, 100, "%s/%s", s->name, name); - f = fopen(x, "r"); - if (!f) { - buffer[0] = 0; - l = 0; - } else { - l = fread(buffer, 1, sizeof(buffer), f); - buffer[l] = 0; - fclose(f); - } - return l; -} - - -/* - * Put a size string together - */ -static int store_size(char *buffer, unsigned long value) -{ - unsigned long divisor = 1; - char trailer = 0; - int n; - - if (value > 1000000000UL) { - divisor = 100000000UL; - trailer = 'G'; - } else if (value > 1000000UL) { - divisor = 100000UL; - trailer = 'M'; - } else if (value > 1000UL) { - divisor = 100; - trailer = 'K'; - } - - value /= divisor; - n = sprintf(buffer, "%ld",value); - if (trailer) { - buffer[n] = trailer; - n++; - buffer[n] = 0; - } - if (divisor != 1) { - memmove(buffer + n - 2, buffer + n - 3, 4); - buffer[n-2] = '.'; - n++; - } - return n; -} - -static void decode_numa_list(int *numa, char *t) -{ - int node; - int nr; - - memset(numa, 0, MAX_NODES * sizeof(int)); - - if (!t) - return; - - while (*t == 'N') { - t++; - node = strtoul(t, &t, 10); - if (*t == '=') { - t++; - nr = strtoul(t, &t, 10); - numa[node] = nr; - if (node > highest_node) - highest_node = node; - } - while (*t == ' ') - t++; - } -} - -static void slab_validate(struct slabinfo *s) -{ - if (strcmp(s->name, "*") == 0) - return; - - set_obj(s, "validate", 1); -} - -static void slab_shrink(struct slabinfo *s) -{ - if (strcmp(s->name, "*") == 0) - return; - - set_obj(s, "shrink", 1); -} - -int line = 0; - -static void first_line(void) -{ - if (show_activity) - printf("Name Objects Alloc Free %%Fast Fallb O\n"); - else - printf("Name Objects Objsize Space " - "Slabs/Part/Cpu O/S O %%Fr %%Ef Flg\n"); -} - -/* - * Find the shortest alias of a slab - */ -static struct aliasinfo *find_one_alias(struct slabinfo *find) -{ - struct aliasinfo *a; - struct aliasinfo *best = NULL; - - for(a = aliasinfo;a < aliasinfo + aliases; a++) { - if (a->slab == find && - (!best || strlen(best->name) < strlen(a->name))) { - best = a; - if (strncmp(a->name,"kmall", 5) == 0) - return best; - } - } - return best; -} - -static unsigned long slab_size(struct slabinfo *s) -{ - return s->slabs * (page_size << s->order); -} - -static unsigned long slab_activity(struct slabinfo *s) -{ - return s->alloc_fastpath + s->free_fastpath + - s->alloc_slowpath + s->free_slowpath; -} - -static void slab_numa(struct slabinfo *s, int mode) -{ - int node; - - if (strcmp(s->name, "*") == 0) - return; - - if (!highest_node) { - printf("\n%s: No NUMA information available.\n", s->name); - return; - } - - if (skip_zero && !s->slabs) - return; - - if (!line) { - printf("\n%-21s:", mode ? "NUMA nodes" : "Slab"); - for(node = 0; node <= highest_node; node++) - printf(" %4d", node); - printf("\n----------------------"); - for(node = 0; node <= highest_node; node++) - printf("-----"); - printf("\n"); - } - printf("%-21s ", mode ? "All slabs" : s->name); - for(node = 0; node <= highest_node; node++) { - char b[20]; - - store_size(b, s->numa[node]); - printf(" %4s", b); - } - printf("\n"); - if (mode) { - printf("%-21s ", "Partial slabs"); - for(node = 0; node <= highest_node; node++) { - char b[20]; - - store_size(b, s->numa_partial[node]); - printf(" %4s", b); - } - printf("\n"); - } - line++; -} - -static void show_tracking(struct slabinfo *s) -{ - printf("\n%s: Kernel object allocation\n", s->name); - printf("-----------------------------------------------------------------------\n"); - if (read_slab_obj(s, "alloc_calls")) - printf(buffer); - else - printf("No Data\n"); - - printf("\n%s: Kernel object freeing\n", s->name); - printf("------------------------------------------------------------------------\n"); - if (read_slab_obj(s, "free_calls")) - printf(buffer); - else - printf("No Data\n"); - -} - -static void ops(struct slabinfo *s) -{ - if (strcmp(s->name, "*") == 0) - return; - - if (read_slab_obj(s, "ops")) { - printf("\n%s: kmem_cache operations\n", s->name); - printf("--------------------------------------------\n"); - printf(buffer); - } else - printf("\n%s has no kmem_cache operations\n", s->name); -} - -static const char *onoff(int x) -{ - if (x) - return "On "; - return "Off"; -} - -static void slab_stats(struct slabinfo *s) -{ - unsigned long total_alloc; - unsigned long total_free; - unsigned long total; - - if (!s->alloc_slab) - return; - - total_alloc = s->alloc_fastpath + s->alloc_slowpath; - total_free = s->free_fastpath + s->free_slowpath; - - if (!total_alloc) - return; - - printf("\n"); - printf("Slab Perf Counter Alloc Free %%Al %%Fr\n"); - printf("--------------------------------------------------\n"); - printf("Fastpath %8lu %8lu %3lu %3lu\n", - s->alloc_fastpath, s->free_fastpath, - s->alloc_fastpath * 100 / total_alloc, - s->free_fastpath * 100 / total_free); - printf("Slowpath %8lu %8lu %3lu %3lu\n", - total_alloc - s->alloc_fastpath, s->free_slowpath, - (total_alloc - s->alloc_fastpath) * 100 / total_alloc, - s->free_slowpath * 100 / total_free); - printf("Page Alloc %8lu %8lu %3lu %3lu\n", - s->alloc_slab, s->free_slab, - s->alloc_slab * 100 / total_alloc, - s->free_slab * 100 / total_free); - printf("Add partial %8lu %8lu %3lu %3lu\n", - s->deactivate_to_head + s->deactivate_to_tail, - s->free_add_partial, - (s->deactivate_to_head + s->deactivate_to_tail) * 100 / total_alloc, - s->free_add_partial * 100 / total_free); - printf("Remove partial %8lu %8lu %3lu %3lu\n", - s->alloc_from_partial, s->free_remove_partial, - s->alloc_from_partial * 100 / total_alloc, - s->free_remove_partial * 100 / total_free); - - printf("RemoteObj/SlabFrozen %8lu %8lu %3lu %3lu\n", - s->deactivate_remote_frees, s->free_frozen, - s->deactivate_remote_frees * 100 / total_alloc, - s->free_frozen * 100 / total_free); - - printf("Total %8lu %8lu\n\n", total_alloc, total_free); - - if (s->cpuslab_flush) - printf("Flushes %8lu\n", s->cpuslab_flush); - - if (s->alloc_refill) - printf("Refill %8lu\n", s->alloc_refill); - - total = s->deactivate_full + s->deactivate_empty + - s->deactivate_to_head + s->deactivate_to_tail; - - if (total) - printf("Deactivate Full=%lu(%lu%%) Empty=%lu(%lu%%) " - "ToHead=%lu(%lu%%) ToTail=%lu(%lu%%)\n", - s->deactivate_full, (s->deactivate_full * 100) / total, - s->deactivate_empty, (s->deactivate_empty * 100) / total, - s->deactivate_to_head, (s->deactivate_to_head * 100) / total, - s->deactivate_to_tail, (s->deactivate_to_tail * 100) / total); -} - -static void report(struct slabinfo *s) -{ - if (strcmp(s->name, "*") == 0) - return; - - printf("\nSlabcache: %-20s Aliases: %2d Order : %2d Objects: %lu\n", - s->name, s->aliases, s->order, s->objects); - if (s->hwcache_align) - printf("** Hardware cacheline aligned\n"); - if (s->cache_dma) - printf("** Memory is allocated in a special DMA zone\n"); - if (s->destroy_by_rcu) - printf("** Slabs are destroyed via RCU\n"); - if (s->reclaim_account) - printf("** Reclaim accounting active\n"); - - printf("\nSizes (bytes) Slabs Debug Memory\n"); - printf("------------------------------------------------------------------------\n"); - printf("Object : %7d Total : %7ld Sanity Checks : %s Total: %7ld\n", - s->object_size, s->slabs, onoff(s->sanity_checks), - s->slabs * (page_size << s->order)); - printf("SlabObj: %7d Full : %7ld Redzoning : %s Used : %7ld\n", - s->slab_size, s->slabs - s->partial - s->cpu_slabs, - onoff(s->red_zone), s->objects * s->object_size); - printf("SlabSiz: %7d Partial: %7ld Poisoning : %s Loss : %7ld\n", - page_size << s->order, s->partial, onoff(s->poison), - s->slabs * (page_size << s->order) - s->objects * s->object_size); - printf("Loss : %7d CpuSlab: %7d Tracking : %s Lalig: %7ld\n", - s->slab_size - s->object_size, s->cpu_slabs, onoff(s->store_user), - (s->slab_size - s->object_size) * s->objects); - printf("Align : %7d Objects: %7d Tracing : %s Lpadd: %7ld\n", - s->align, s->objs_per_slab, onoff(s->trace), - ((page_size << s->order) - s->objs_per_slab * s->slab_size) * - s->slabs); - - ops(s); - show_tracking(s); - slab_numa(s, 1); - slab_stats(s); -} - -static void slabcache(struct slabinfo *s) -{ - char size_str[20]; - char dist_str[40]; - char flags[20]; - char *p = flags; - - if (strcmp(s->name, "*") == 0) - return; - - if (actual_slabs == 1) { - report(s); - return; - } - - if (skip_zero && !show_empty && !s->slabs) - return; - - if (show_empty && s->slabs) - return; - - store_size(size_str, slab_size(s)); - snprintf(dist_str, 40, "%lu/%lu/%d", s->slabs - s->cpu_slabs, - s->partial, s->cpu_slabs); - - if (!line++) - first_line(); - - if (s->aliases) - *p++ = '*'; - if (s->cache_dma) - *p++ = 'd'; - if (s->hwcache_align) - *p++ = 'A'; - if (s->poison) - *p++ = 'P'; - if (s->reclaim_account) - *p++ = 'a'; - if (s->red_zone) - *p++ = 'Z'; - if (s->sanity_checks) - *p++ = 'F'; - if (s->store_user) - *p++ = 'U'; - if (s->trace) - *p++ = 'T'; - - *p = 0; - if (show_activity) { - unsigned long total_alloc; - unsigned long total_free; - - total_alloc = s->alloc_fastpath + s->alloc_slowpath; - total_free = s->free_fastpath + s->free_slowpath; - - printf("%-21s %8ld %10ld %10ld %3ld %3ld %5ld %1d\n", - s->name, s->objects, - total_alloc, total_free, - total_alloc ? (s->alloc_fastpath * 100 / total_alloc) : 0, - total_free ? (s->free_fastpath * 100 / total_free) : 0, - s->order_fallback, s->order); - } - else - printf("%-21s %8ld %7d %8s %14s %4d %1d %3ld %3ld %s\n", - s->name, s->objects, s->object_size, size_str, dist_str, - s->objs_per_slab, s->order, - s->slabs ? (s->partial * 100) / s->slabs : 100, - s->slabs ? (s->objects * s->object_size * 100) / - (s->slabs * (page_size << s->order)) : 100, - flags); -} - -/* - * Analyze debug options. Return false if something is amiss. - */ -static int debug_opt_scan(char *opt) -{ - if (!opt || !opt[0] || strcmp(opt, "-") == 0) - return 1; - - if (strcasecmp(opt, "a") == 0) { - sanity = 1; - poison = 1; - redzone = 1; - tracking = 1; - return 1; - } - - for ( ; *opt; opt++) - switch (*opt) { - case 'F' : case 'f': - if (sanity) - return 0; - sanity = 1; - break; - case 'P' : case 'p': - if (poison) - return 0; - poison = 1; - break; - - case 'Z' : case 'z': - if (redzone) - return 0; - redzone = 1; - break; - - case 'U' : case 'u': - if (tracking) - return 0; - tracking = 1; - break; - - case 'T' : case 't': - if (tracing) - return 0; - tracing = 1; - break; - default: - return 0; - } - return 1; -} - -static int slab_empty(struct slabinfo *s) -{ - if (s->objects > 0) - return 0; - - /* - * We may still have slabs even if there are no objects. Shrinking will - * remove them. - */ - if (s->slabs != 0) - set_obj(s, "shrink", 1); - - return 1; -} - -static void slab_debug(struct slabinfo *s) -{ - if (strcmp(s->name, "*") == 0) - return; - - if (sanity && !s->sanity_checks) { - set_obj(s, "sanity", 1); - } - if (!sanity && s->sanity_checks) { - if (slab_empty(s)) - set_obj(s, "sanity", 0); - else - fprintf(stderr, "%s not empty cannot disable sanity checks\n", s->name); - } - if (redzone && !s->red_zone) { - if (slab_empty(s)) - set_obj(s, "red_zone", 1); - else - fprintf(stderr, "%s not empty cannot enable redzoning\n", s->name); - } - if (!redzone && s->red_zone) { - if (slab_empty(s)) - set_obj(s, "red_zone", 0); - else - fprintf(stderr, "%s not empty cannot disable redzoning\n", s->name); - } - if (poison && !s->poison) { - if (slab_empty(s)) - set_obj(s, "poison", 1); - else - fprintf(stderr, "%s not empty cannot enable poisoning\n", s->name); - } - if (!poison && s->poison) { - if (slab_empty(s)) - set_obj(s, "poison", 0); - else - fprintf(stderr, "%s not empty cannot disable poisoning\n", s->name); - } - if (tracking && !s->store_user) { - if (slab_empty(s)) - set_obj(s, "store_user", 1); - else - fprintf(stderr, "%s not empty cannot enable tracking\n", s->name); - } - if (!tracking && s->store_user) { - if (slab_empty(s)) - set_obj(s, "store_user", 0); - else - fprintf(stderr, "%s not empty cannot disable tracking\n", s->name); - } - if (tracing && !s->trace) { - if (slabs == 1) - set_obj(s, "trace", 1); - else - fprintf(stderr, "%s can only enable trace for one slab at a time\n", s->name); - } - if (!tracing && s->trace) - set_obj(s, "trace", 1); -} - -static void totals(void) -{ - struct slabinfo *s; - - int used_slabs = 0; - char b1[20], b2[20], b3[20], b4[20]; - unsigned long long max = 1ULL << 63; - - /* Object size */ - unsigned long long min_objsize = max, max_objsize = 0, avg_objsize; - - /* Number of partial slabs in a slabcache */ - unsigned long long min_partial = max, max_partial = 0, - avg_partial, total_partial = 0; - - /* Number of slabs in a slab cache */ - unsigned long long min_slabs = max, max_slabs = 0, - avg_slabs, total_slabs = 0; - - /* Size of the whole slab */ - unsigned long long min_size = max, max_size = 0, - avg_size, total_size = 0; - - /* Bytes used for object storage in a slab */ - unsigned long long min_used = max, max_used = 0, - avg_used, total_used = 0; - - /* Waste: Bytes used for alignment and padding */ - unsigned long long min_waste = max, max_waste = 0, - avg_waste, total_waste = 0; - /* Number of objects in a slab */ - unsigned long long min_objects = max, max_objects = 0, - avg_objects, total_objects = 0; - /* Waste per object */ - unsigned long long min_objwaste = max, - max_objwaste = 0, avg_objwaste, - total_objwaste = 0; - - /* Memory per object */ - unsigned long long min_memobj = max, - max_memobj = 0, avg_memobj, - total_objsize = 0; - - /* Percentage of partial slabs per slab */ - unsigned long min_ppart = 100, max_ppart = 0, - avg_ppart, total_ppart = 0; - - /* Number of objects in partial slabs */ - unsigned long min_partobj = max, max_partobj = 0, - avg_partobj, total_partobj = 0; - - /* Percentage of partial objects of all objects in a slab */ - unsigned long min_ppartobj = 100, max_ppartobj = 0, - avg_ppartobj, total_ppartobj = 0; - - - for (s = slabinfo; s < slabinfo + slabs; s++) { - unsigned long long size; - unsigned long used; - unsigned long long wasted; - unsigned long long objwaste; - unsigned long percentage_partial_slabs; - unsigned long percentage_partial_objs; - - if (!s->slabs || !s->objects) - continue; - - used_slabs++; - - size = slab_size(s); - used = s->objects * s->object_size; - wasted = size - used; - objwaste = s->slab_size - s->object_size; - - percentage_partial_slabs = s->partial * 100 / s->slabs; - if (percentage_partial_slabs > 100) - percentage_partial_slabs = 100; - - percentage_partial_objs = s->objects_partial * 100 - / s->objects; - - if (percentage_partial_objs > 100) - percentage_partial_objs = 100; - - if (s->object_size < min_objsize) - min_objsize = s->object_size; - if (s->partial < min_partial) - min_partial = s->partial; - if (s->slabs < min_slabs) - min_slabs = s->slabs; - if (size < min_size) - min_size = size; - if (wasted < min_waste) - min_waste = wasted; - if (objwaste < min_objwaste) - min_objwaste = objwaste; - if (s->objects < min_objects) - min_objects = s->objects; - if (used < min_used) - min_used = used; - if (s->objects_partial < min_partobj) - min_partobj = s->objects_partial; - if (percentage_partial_slabs < min_ppart) - min_ppart = percentage_partial_slabs; - if (percentage_partial_objs < min_ppartobj) - min_ppartobj = percentage_partial_objs; - if (s->slab_size < min_memobj) - min_memobj = s->slab_size; - - if (s->object_size > max_objsize) - max_objsize = s->object_size; - if (s->partial > max_partial) - max_partial = s->partial; - if (s->slabs > max_slabs) - max_slabs = s->slabs; - if (size > max_size) - max_size = size; - if (wasted > max_waste) - max_waste = wasted; - if (objwaste > max_objwaste) - max_objwaste = objwaste; - if (s->objects > max_objects) - max_objects = s->objects; - if (used > max_used) - max_used = used; - if (s->objects_partial > max_partobj) - max_partobj = s->objects_partial; - if (percentage_partial_slabs > max_ppart) - max_ppart = percentage_partial_slabs; - if (percentage_partial_objs > max_ppartobj) - max_ppartobj = percentage_partial_objs; - if (s->slab_size > max_memobj) - max_memobj = s->slab_size; - - total_partial += s->partial; - total_slabs += s->slabs; - total_size += size; - total_waste += wasted; - - total_objects += s->objects; - total_used += used; - total_partobj += s->objects_partial; - total_ppart += percentage_partial_slabs; - total_ppartobj += percentage_partial_objs; - - total_objwaste += s->objects * objwaste; - total_objsize += s->objects * s->slab_size; - } - - if (!total_objects) { - printf("No objects\n"); - return; - } - if (!used_slabs) { - printf("No slabs\n"); - return; - } - - /* Per slab averages */ - avg_partial = total_partial / used_slabs; - avg_slabs = total_slabs / used_slabs; - avg_size = total_size / used_slabs; - avg_waste = total_waste / used_slabs; - - avg_objects = total_objects / used_slabs; - avg_used = total_used / used_slabs; - avg_partobj = total_partobj / used_slabs; - avg_ppart = total_ppart / used_slabs; - avg_ppartobj = total_ppartobj / used_slabs; - - /* Per object object sizes */ - avg_objsize = total_used / total_objects; - avg_objwaste = total_objwaste / total_objects; - avg_partobj = total_partobj * 100 / total_objects; - avg_memobj = total_objsize / total_objects; - - printf("Slabcache Totals\n"); - printf("----------------\n"); - printf("Slabcaches : %3d Aliases : %3d->%-3d Active: %3d\n", - slabs, aliases, alias_targets, used_slabs); - - store_size(b1, total_size);store_size(b2, total_waste); - store_size(b3, total_waste * 100 / total_used); - printf("Memory used: %6s # Loss : %6s MRatio:%6s%%\n", b1, b2, b3); - - store_size(b1, total_objects);store_size(b2, total_partobj); - store_size(b3, total_partobj * 100 / total_objects); - printf("# Objects : %6s # PartObj: %6s ORatio:%6s%%\n", b1, b2, b3); - - printf("\n"); - printf("Per Cache Average Min Max Total\n"); - printf("---------------------------------------------------------\n"); - - store_size(b1, avg_objects);store_size(b2, min_objects); - store_size(b3, max_objects);store_size(b4, total_objects); - printf("#Objects %10s %10s %10s %10s\n", - b1, b2, b3, b4); - - store_size(b1, avg_slabs);store_size(b2, min_slabs); - store_size(b3, max_slabs);store_size(b4, total_slabs); - printf("#Slabs %10s %10s %10s %10s\n", - b1, b2, b3, b4); - - store_size(b1, avg_partial);store_size(b2, min_partial); - store_size(b3, max_partial);store_size(b4, total_partial); - printf("#PartSlab %10s %10s %10s %10s\n", - b1, b2, b3, b4); - store_size(b1, avg_ppart);store_size(b2, min_ppart); - store_size(b3, max_ppart); - store_size(b4, total_partial * 100 / total_slabs); - printf("%%PartSlab%10s%% %10s%% %10s%% %10s%%\n", - b1, b2, b3, b4); - - store_size(b1, avg_partobj);store_size(b2, min_partobj); - store_size(b3, max_partobj); - store_size(b4, total_partobj); - printf("PartObjs %10s %10s %10s %10s\n", - b1, b2, b3, b4); - - store_size(b1, avg_ppartobj);store_size(b2, min_ppartobj); - store_size(b3, max_ppartobj); - store_size(b4, total_partobj * 100 / total_objects); - printf("%% PartObj%10s%% %10s%% %10s%% %10s%%\n", - b1, b2, b3, b4); - - store_size(b1, avg_size);store_size(b2, min_size); - store_size(b3, max_size);store_size(b4, total_size); - printf("Memory %10s %10s %10s %10s\n", - b1, b2, b3, b4); - - store_size(b1, avg_used);store_size(b2, min_used); - store_size(b3, max_used);store_size(b4, total_used); - printf("Used %10s %10s %10s %10s\n", - b1, b2, b3, b4); - - store_size(b1, avg_waste);store_size(b2, min_waste); - store_size(b3, max_waste);store_size(b4, total_waste); - printf("Loss %10s %10s %10s %10s\n", - b1, b2, b3, b4); - - printf("\n"); - printf("Per Object Average Min Max\n"); - printf("---------------------------------------------\n"); - - store_size(b1, avg_memobj);store_size(b2, min_memobj); - store_size(b3, max_memobj); - printf("Memory %10s %10s %10s\n", - b1, b2, b3); - store_size(b1, avg_objsize);store_size(b2, min_objsize); - store_size(b3, max_objsize); - printf("User %10s %10s %10s\n", - b1, b2, b3); - - store_size(b1, avg_objwaste);store_size(b2, min_objwaste); - store_size(b3, max_objwaste); - printf("Loss %10s %10s %10s\n", - b1, b2, b3); -} - -static void sort_slabs(void) -{ - struct slabinfo *s1,*s2; - - for (s1 = slabinfo; s1 < slabinfo + slabs; s1++) { - for (s2 = s1 + 1; s2 < slabinfo + slabs; s2++) { - int result; - - if (sort_size) - result = slab_size(s1) < slab_size(s2); - else if (sort_active) - result = slab_activity(s1) < slab_activity(s2); - else - result = strcasecmp(s1->name, s2->name); - - if (show_inverted) - result = -result; - - if (result > 0) { - struct slabinfo t; - - memcpy(&t, s1, sizeof(struct slabinfo)); - memcpy(s1, s2, sizeof(struct slabinfo)); - memcpy(s2, &t, sizeof(struct slabinfo)); - } - } - } -} - -static void sort_aliases(void) -{ - struct aliasinfo *a1,*a2; - - for (a1 = aliasinfo; a1 < aliasinfo + aliases; a1++) { - for (a2 = a1 + 1; a2 < aliasinfo + aliases; a2++) { - char *n1, *n2; - - n1 = a1->name; - n2 = a2->name; - if (show_alias && !show_inverted) { - n1 = a1->ref; - n2 = a2->ref; - } - if (strcasecmp(n1, n2) > 0) { - struct aliasinfo t; - - memcpy(&t, a1, sizeof(struct aliasinfo)); - memcpy(a1, a2, sizeof(struct aliasinfo)); - memcpy(a2, &t, sizeof(struct aliasinfo)); - } - } - } -} - -static void link_slabs(void) -{ - struct aliasinfo *a; - struct slabinfo *s; - - for (a = aliasinfo; a < aliasinfo + aliases; a++) { - - for (s = slabinfo; s < slabinfo + slabs; s++) - if (strcmp(a->ref, s->name) == 0) { - a->slab = s; - s->refs++; - break; - } - if (s == slabinfo + slabs) - fatal("Unresolved alias %s\n", a->ref); - } -} - -static void alias(void) -{ - struct aliasinfo *a; - char *active = NULL; - - sort_aliases(); - link_slabs(); - - for(a = aliasinfo; a < aliasinfo + aliases; a++) { - - if (!show_single_ref && a->slab->refs == 1) - continue; - - if (!show_inverted) { - if (active) { - if (strcmp(a->slab->name, active) == 0) { - printf(" %s", a->name); - continue; - } - } - printf("\n%-12s <- %s", a->slab->name, a->name); - active = a->slab->name; - } - else - printf("%-20s -> %s\n", a->name, a->slab->name); - } - if (active) - printf("\n"); -} - - -static void rename_slabs(void) -{ - struct slabinfo *s; - struct aliasinfo *a; - - for (s = slabinfo; s < slabinfo + slabs; s++) { - if (*s->name != ':') - continue; - - if (s->refs > 1 && !show_first_alias) - continue; - - a = find_one_alias(s); - - if (a) - s->name = a->name; - else { - s->name = "*"; - actual_slabs--; - } - } -} - -static int slab_mismatch(char *slab) -{ - return regexec(&pattern, slab, 0, NULL, 0); -} - -static void read_slab_dir(void) -{ - DIR *dir; - struct dirent *de; - struct slabinfo *slab = slabinfo; - struct aliasinfo *alias = aliasinfo; - char *p; - char *t; - int count; - - if (chdir("/sys/kernel/slab") && chdir("/sys/slab")) - fatal("SYSFS support for SLUB not active\n"); - - dir = opendir("."); - while ((de = readdir(dir))) { - if (de->d_name[0] == '.' || - (de->d_name[0] != ':' && slab_mismatch(de->d_name))) - continue; - switch (de->d_type) { - case DT_LNK: - alias->name = strdup(de->d_name); - count = readlink(de->d_name, buffer, sizeof(buffer)); - - if (count < 0) - fatal("Cannot read symlink %s\n", de->d_name); - - buffer[count] = 0; - p = buffer + count; - while (p > buffer && p[-1] != '/') - p--; - alias->ref = strdup(p); - alias++; - break; - case DT_DIR: - if (chdir(de->d_name)) - fatal("Unable to access slab %s\n", slab->name); - slab->name = strdup(de->d_name); - slab->alias = 0; - slab->refs = 0; - slab->aliases = get_obj("aliases"); - slab->align = get_obj("align"); - slab->cache_dma = get_obj("cache_dma"); - slab->cpu_slabs = get_obj("cpu_slabs"); - slab->destroy_by_rcu = get_obj("destroy_by_rcu"); - slab->hwcache_align = get_obj("hwcache_align"); - slab->object_size = get_obj("object_size"); - slab->objects = get_obj("objects"); - slab->objects_partial = get_obj("objects_partial"); - slab->objects_total = get_obj("objects_total"); - slab->objs_per_slab = get_obj("objs_per_slab"); - slab->order = get_obj("order"); - slab->partial = get_obj("partial"); - slab->partial = get_obj_and_str("partial", &t); - decode_numa_list(slab->numa_partial, t); - free(t); - slab->poison = get_obj("poison"); - slab->reclaim_account = get_obj("reclaim_account"); - slab->red_zone = get_obj("red_zone"); - slab->sanity_checks = get_obj("sanity_checks"); - slab->slab_size = get_obj("slab_size"); - slab->slabs = get_obj_and_str("slabs", &t); - decode_numa_list(slab->numa, t); - free(t); - slab->store_user = get_obj("store_user"); - slab->trace = get_obj("trace"); - slab->alloc_fastpath = get_obj("alloc_fastpath"); - slab->alloc_slowpath = get_obj("alloc_slowpath"); - slab->free_fastpath = get_obj("free_fastpath"); - slab->free_slowpath = get_obj("free_slowpath"); - slab->free_frozen= get_obj("free_frozen"); - slab->free_add_partial = get_obj("free_add_partial"); - slab->free_remove_partial = get_obj("free_remove_partial"); - slab->alloc_from_partial = get_obj("alloc_from_partial"); - slab->alloc_slab = get_obj("alloc_slab"); - slab->alloc_refill = get_obj("alloc_refill"); - slab->free_slab = get_obj("free_slab"); - slab->cpuslab_flush = get_obj("cpuslab_flush"); - slab->deactivate_full = get_obj("deactivate_full"); - slab->deactivate_empty = get_obj("deactivate_empty"); - slab->deactivate_to_head = get_obj("deactivate_to_head"); - slab->deactivate_to_tail = get_obj("deactivate_to_tail"); - slab->deactivate_remote_frees = get_obj("deactivate_remote_frees"); - slab->order_fallback = get_obj("order_fallback"); - chdir(".."); - if (slab->name[0] == ':') - alias_targets++; - slab++; - break; - default : - fatal("Unknown file type %lx\n", de->d_type); - } - } - closedir(dir); - slabs = slab - slabinfo; - actual_slabs = slabs; - aliases = alias - aliasinfo; - if (slabs > MAX_SLABS) - fatal("Too many slabs\n"); - if (aliases > MAX_ALIASES) - fatal("Too many aliases\n"); -} - -static void output_slabs(void) -{ - struct slabinfo *slab; - - for (slab = slabinfo; slab < slabinfo + slabs; slab++) { - - if (slab->alias) - continue; - - - if (show_numa) - slab_numa(slab, 0); - else if (show_track) - show_tracking(slab); - else if (validate) - slab_validate(slab); - else if (shrink) - slab_shrink(slab); - else if (set_debug) - slab_debug(slab); - else if (show_ops) - ops(slab); - else if (show_slab) - slabcache(slab); - else if (show_report) - report(slab); - } -} - -struct option opts[] = { - { "aliases", 0, NULL, 'a' }, - { "activity", 0, NULL, 'A' }, - { "debug", 2, NULL, 'd' }, - { "display-activity", 0, NULL, 'D' }, - { "empty", 0, NULL, 'e' }, - { "first-alias", 0, NULL, 'f' }, - { "help", 0, NULL, 'h' }, - { "inverted", 0, NULL, 'i'}, - { "numa", 0, NULL, 'n' }, - { "ops", 0, NULL, 'o' }, - { "report", 0, NULL, 'r' }, - { "shrink", 0, NULL, 's' }, - { "slabs", 0, NULL, 'l' }, - { "track", 0, NULL, 't'}, - { "validate", 0, NULL, 'v' }, - { "zero", 0, NULL, 'z' }, - { "1ref", 0, NULL, '1'}, - { NULL, 0, NULL, 0 } -}; - -int main(int argc, char *argv[]) -{ - int c; - int err; - char *pattern_source; - - page_size = getpagesize(); - - while ((c = getopt_long(argc, argv, "aAd::Defhil1noprstvzTS", - opts, NULL)) != -1) - switch (c) { - case '1': - show_single_ref = 1; - break; - case 'a': - show_alias = 1; - break; - case 'A': - sort_active = 1; - break; - case 'd': - set_debug = 1; - if (!debug_opt_scan(optarg)) - fatal("Invalid debug option '%s'\n", optarg); - break; - case 'D': - show_activity = 1; - break; - case 'e': - show_empty = 1; - break; - case 'f': - show_first_alias = 1; - break; - case 'h': - usage(); - return 0; - case 'i': - show_inverted = 1; - break; - case 'n': - show_numa = 1; - break; - case 'o': - show_ops = 1; - break; - case 'r': - show_report = 1; - break; - case 's': - shrink = 1; - break; - case 'l': - show_slab = 1; - break; - case 't': - show_track = 1; - break; - case 'v': - validate = 1; - break; - case 'z': - skip_zero = 0; - break; - case 'T': - show_totals = 1; - break; - case 'S': - sort_size = 1; - break; - - default: - fatal("%s: Invalid option '%c'\n", argv[0], optopt); - - } - - if (!show_slab && !show_alias && !show_track && !show_report - && !validate && !shrink && !set_debug && !show_ops) - show_slab = 1; - - if (argc > optind) - pattern_source = argv[optind]; - else - pattern_source = ".*"; - - err = regcomp(&pattern, pattern_source, REG_ICASE|REG_NOSUB); - if (err) - fatal("%s: Invalid pattern '%s' code %d\n", - argv[0], pattern_source, err); - read_slab_dir(); - if (show_alias) - alias(); - else - if (show_totals) - totals(); - else { - link_slabs(); - rename_slabs(); - sort_slabs(); - output_slabs(); - } - return 0; -} diff --git a/Documentation/w1/slaves/00-INDEX b/Documentation/w1/slaves/00-INDEX index f8101d6b07b7..75613c9ac4db 100644 --- a/Documentation/w1/slaves/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/w1/slaves/00-INDEX @@ -2,3 +2,5 @@ - This file w1_therm - The Maxim/Dallas Semiconductor ds18*20 temperature sensor. +w1_ds2423 + - The Maxim/Dallas Semiconductor ds2423 counter device. diff --git a/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_ds2423 b/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_ds2423 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..90a65d23cf59 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_ds2423 @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +Kernel driver w1_ds2423 +======================= + +Supported chips: + * Maxim DS2423 based counter devices. + +supported family codes: + W1_THERM_DS2423 0x1D + +Author: Mika Laitio <lamikr@pilppa.org> + +Description +----------- + +Support is provided through the sysfs w1_slave file. Each opening and +read sequence of w1_slave file initiates the read of counters and ram +available in DS2423 pages 12 - 15. + +Result of each page is provided as an ASCII output where each counter +value and associated ram buffer is outpputed to own line. + +Each lines will contain the values of 42 bytes read from the counter and +memory page along the crc=YES or NO for indicating whether the read operation +was successfull and CRC matched. +If the operation was successfull, there is also in the end of each line +a counter value expressed as an integer after c= + +Meaning of 42 bytes represented is following: + - 1 byte from ram page + - 4 bytes for the counter value + - 4 zero bytes + - 2 bytes for crc16 which was calculated from the data read since the previous crc bytes + - 31 remaining bytes from the ram page + - crc=YES/NO indicating whether read was ok and crc matched + - c=<int> current counter value + +example from the successfull read: +00 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 6d 38 00 ff ff 00 00 fe ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff crc=YES c=2 +00 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 e0 1f 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff crc=YES c=2 +00 29 c6 5d 18 00 00 00 00 04 37 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff crc=YES c=408798761 +00 05 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 8d 39 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff crc=YES c=5 + +example from the read with crc errors: +00 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 6d 38 00 ff ff 00 00 fe ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff crc=YES c=2 +00 02 00 00 22 00 00 00 00 e0 1f 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff crc=NO +00 e1 61 5d 19 00 00 00 00 df 0b 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff crc=NO +00 05 00 00 20 00 00 00 00 8d 39 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff crc=NO diff --git a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt index 30b43e1b2697..9b7221a86df2 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt @@ -600,6 +600,7 @@ Protocol: 2.07+ 0x00000001 lguest 0x00000002 Xen 0x00000003 Moorestown MID + 0x00000004 CE4100 TV Platform Field name: hardware_subarch_data Type: write (subarch-dependent) @@ -621,9 +622,9 @@ Protocol: 2.08+ The payload may be compressed. The format of both the compressed and uncompressed data should be determined using the standard magic numbers. The currently supported compression formats are gzip - (magic numbers 1F 8B or 1F 9E), bzip2 (magic number 42 5A) and LZMA - (magic number 5D 00). The uncompressed payload is currently always ELF - (magic number 7F 45 4C 46). + (magic numbers 1F 8B or 1F 9E), bzip2 (magic number 42 5A), LZMA + (magic number 5D 00), and XZ (magic number FD 37). The uncompressed + payload is currently always ELF (magic number 7F 45 4C 46). Field name: payload_length Type: read diff --git a/Documentation/xz.txt b/Documentation/xz.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2cf3e2608de3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/xz.txt @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + +XZ data compression in Linux +============================ + +Introduction + + XZ is a general purpose data compression format with high compression + ratio and relatively fast decompression. The primary compression + algorithm (filter) is LZMA2. Additional filters can be used to improve + compression ratio even further. E.g. Branch/Call/Jump (BCJ) filters + improve compression ratio of executable data. + + The XZ decompressor in Linux is called XZ Embedded. It supports + the LZMA2 filter and optionally also BCJ filters. CRC32 is supported + for integrity checking. The home page of XZ Embedded is at + <http://tukaani.org/xz/embedded.html>, where you can find the + latest version and also information about using the code outside + the Linux kernel. + + For userspace, XZ Utils provide a zlib-like compression library + and a gzip-like command line tool. XZ Utils can be downloaded from + <http://tukaani.org/xz/>. + +XZ related components in the kernel + + The xz_dec module provides XZ decompressor with single-call (buffer + to buffer) and multi-call (stateful) APIs. The usage of the xz_dec + module is documented in include/linux/xz.h. + + The xz_dec_test module is for testing xz_dec. xz_dec_test is not + useful unless you are hacking the XZ decompressor. xz_dec_test + allocates a char device major dynamically to which one can write + .xz files from userspace. The decompressed output is thrown away. + Keep an eye on dmesg to see diagnostics printed by xz_dec_test. + See the xz_dec_test source code for the details. + + For decompressing the kernel image, initramfs, and initrd, there + is a wrapper function in lib/decompress_unxz.c. Its API is the + same as in other decompress_*.c files, which is defined in + include/linux/decompress/generic.h. + + scripts/xz_wrap.sh is a wrapper for the xz command line tool found + from XZ Utils. The wrapper sets compression options to values suitable + for compressing the kernel image. + + For kernel makefiles, two commands are provided for use with + $(call if_needed). The kernel image should be compressed with + $(call if_needed,xzkern) which will use a BCJ filter and a big LZMA2 + dictionary. It will also append a four-byte trailer containing the + uncompressed size of the file, which is needed by the boot code. + Other things should be compressed with $(call if_needed,xzmisc) + which will use no BCJ filter and 1 MiB LZMA2 dictionary. + +Notes on compression options + + Since the XZ Embedded supports only streams with no integrity check or + CRC32, make sure that you don't use some other integrity check type + when encoding files that are supposed to be decoded by the kernel. With + liblzma, you need to use either LZMA_CHECK_NONE or LZMA_CHECK_CRC32 + when encoding. With the xz command line tool, use --check=none or + --check=crc32. + + Using CRC32 is strongly recommended unless there is some other layer + which will verify the integrity of the uncompressed data anyway. + Double checking the integrity would probably be waste of CPU cycles. + Note that the headers will always have a CRC32 which will be validated + by the decoder; you can only change the integrity check type (or + disable it) for the actual uncompressed data. + + In userspace, LZMA2 is typically used with dictionary sizes of several + megabytes. The decoder needs to have the dictionary in RAM, thus big + dictionaries cannot be used for files that are intended to be decoded + by the kernel. 1 MiB is probably the maximum reasonable dictionary + size for in-kernel use (maybe more is OK for initramfs). The presets + in XZ Utils may not be optimal when creating files for the kernel, + so don't hesitate to use custom settings. Example: + + xz --check=crc32 --lzma2=dict=512KiB inputfile + + An exception to above dictionary size limitation is when the decoder + is used in single-call mode. Decompressing the kernel itself is an + example of this situation. In single-call mode, the memory usage + doesn't depend on the dictionary size, and it is perfectly fine to + use a big dictionary: for maximum compression, the dictionary should + be at least as big as the uncompressed data itself. + +Future plans + + Creating a limited XZ encoder may be considered if people think it is + useful. LZMA2 is slower to compress than e.g. Deflate or LZO even at + the fastest settings, so it isn't clear if LZMA2 encoder is wanted + into the kernel. + + Support for limited random-access reading is planned for the + decompression code. I don't know if it could have any use in the + kernel, but I know that it would be useful in some embedded projects + outside the Linux kernel. + +Conformance to the .xz file format specification + + There are a couple of corner cases where things have been simplified + at expense of detecting errors as early as possible. These should not + matter in practice all, since they don't cause security issues. But + it is good to know this if testing the code e.g. with the test files + from XZ Utils. + +Reporting bugs + + Before reporting a bug, please check that it's not fixed already + at upstream. See <http://tukaani.org/xz/embedded.html> to get the + latest code. + + Report bugs to <lasse.collin@tukaani.org> or visit #tukaani on + Freenode and talk to Larhzu. I don't actively read LKML or other + kernel-related mailing lists, so if there's something I should know, + you should email to me personally or use IRC. + + Don't bother Igor Pavlov with questions about the XZ implementation + in the kernel or about XZ Utils. While these two implementations + include essential code that is directly based on Igor Pavlov's code, + these implementations aren't maintained nor supported by him. diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/HOWTO b/Documentation/zh_CN/HOWTO index 69160779e432..faf976c0c731 100644 --- a/Documentation/zh_CN/HOWTO +++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/HOWTO @@ -347,8 +347,8 @@ bugzilla.kernel.org是Linux内核开发者们用来跟踪内核Bug的网站。 最新bug的通知，可以订阅bugme-new邮件列表（只有新的bug报告会被寄到这里） 或者订阅bugme-janitor邮件列表（所有bugzilla的变动都会被寄到这里）。 - http://lists.osdl.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-new - http://lists.osdl.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-janitors + https://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-new + https://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-janitors 邮件列表 diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmittingDrivers b/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmittingDrivers index c27b0f6cdd39..5889f8df6312 100644 --- a/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmittingDrivers +++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmittingDrivers @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ Linux 2.4: Linux 2.6: 除了遵循和 2.4 版内核同样的规则外，你还需要在 linux-kernel 邮件 列表上跟踪最新的 API 变化。向 Linux 2.6 内核提交驱动的顶级联系人 - 是 Andrew Morton <akpm@osdl.org>。 + 是 Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>。 决定设备驱动能否被接受的条件 ---------------------------- |